Ford 4000 Service Manual

Download

Page 1

Information and Instructions

This individual Shop

ies on agricultural wheel type tractors

Manual is one unit of a ser-

Contained

in it are the necessary specifications and the brief but terse procedural data needed by a mechanic

when repairing a tractor on which he has had no previous actual experience.

The material is arranged in a systematic order beginning with an index which is followed immediately by a Table of Condensed Service Specifications. These specifications include dimen-

sions, fits in order of arrangement is the procedures section.

In the procedures tion starts with the front and proceeds

clearances and timing instructions. Next

section, the order of presenta-

axle system and steering

toward the rear axle

. The last por-

tion of the procedures section is devoted to the

power take-off and

power

lift systems.

Interspersed

where needed in this section are additional tabu-

lar specifications pertaining to wear limits, torqu-

ing, etc.

HOW TO USE THE INDEX

Suppose you want to know the procedure for R&R (remove and first step is to look in the index under the main heading of ENGINE until you find the entry "Camshaft" Now read to the right where under the

column covering the tractor you are repairing, you

will find a number

paragraph pertaining to the camshaft wanted paragraph in the manual until the running index appearing side corner of each page contains are seeking.In this paragraph formation concerning the removal

reinstall)of the engine

which indicates

camshaft. Your

the beginning

. To locate this

, turn the pages

on the top out-

the number you

you will find the in-

of the camshaft.

Page 2

SHOP MANUAL

FORD

SERIES 2000-3000-4000

(COVERS MODELS

Tractor Serial Number

numbers and tractor model number

pad at right front corner of transmission

Numbers will be stamped on top of pad partially on top of and partially on mounting face of pad explanation of the numbers that will appear at this location:

along with manufacturing and production code

5A25

PRIOR

will appear on implement mbunting

TO 1975)

directly behind engine starter).

(

on mounting face of pad, or

Refer to following

Transmission Production

Code Number

31022C

Tractor

Manufacturing

Code Number

Engine Serial Number

Identification and engine production code number

C0 025A2

along with tractor size identification

will appear on either

the left or right pan rail of cylinder block casting approximately at mid-

Refer to following explanation of the numbers that will

length of engine

appear at this location.

Tractor Identification

L:G:o 0 1 0 0 S:A 5

Engine

Type -

Tractor Identification:

Before 7-20-68

L-2000 N-3000 P-4000

After 7-19-68

B-2000 C-3000

D-4000

Engine Type:

Tractor Model

Number

Tractor

Production Code Number

engine type

Engine

Serial Number

Engine

Production

Code Number

D-Diesel Engine G-Gasoline Engine P-LP-Gas Engine

The following tractor models prior to 1975 are covered in this manual:

2100 All Purpose 2110 L

3106 4100 All 4110 L.C.G.

4140 S.U. 4200 Row Crop

C:G. (Low Center Gravity)

All Purpose

Purpose

Page 3

By Starting Paragraph)

INDEX

(

BELT PULLEY ................................ 337

BRAKES ......................................308

CARBURETOR, GASOLINE ................... 106

CARBURETOR, LP-GAS ....................... 117

CLUTCH, SINGLE DISC ....................... 184

CLUTCH, DUAL DISC ......................... 185

CLUTCH, POWER TAKE-OFF ................. 332

COOLING SYSTEM:

Radiator .................................... 169

Thermostat ..................................168

Water Pump ................................. 170

DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM:

Bleeding ............................... 129,131

Filters ......................................128

Injection Pump ......................... 151,155

Injector Nozzles ..............................132

Troubleshooting .............................120

DIFFERENTIAL ......................... 284, 300

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK ................... 290,304

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM:

Generator & Regulator ....................... 171

Ignition Distributor .......................... 175

Starting Motor .......................... 172,173

ENGINE:

Assembly, R&R ............................... 66

Camshaft .................................... 87

Connecting Rod Bearings ...................... 95

Crankshaft & Bearings ........................ 96

Crankshaft Oil Seals .......................... 97

Cylinder Head ................................ 68

Cylinders ....................................91

Flywheel, R&R ..............................100

Oil Pan .....................................101

Oil Pump .................................... 103

Pistons & Rings ............................... 89

Piston & Rod Removal ......................... 88

Piston Pins ................................... 94

Rocker Arms ................................. 76

ENGINE

: (

cent)

Timing Gear Cover ............................ 77

Timing Gears ................................. 81

Valve Adjustment Valves & Seats Valve Guides

.............................

...............................

Springs ....................... 71

72 70

FINAL DRIVE GEARS ......................... 307

FRONT AXLE .............

non-Diesel

GOVERNOR

HYDRAULIC

Adjustments Lift Cover Assembly Lift Cylinder Pump Pump Remote Control

Selector Valve ............................... 368

Troubleshooting

IGNITION SYSTEM LP-GAS SYSTEM

(

LIFT SYSTEM:

.................................344

Overhaul .......................349

Piston Type

(

Gear Type

(

Valves .......................370

) ..........................

) .......... 366

.............................

...........................

................ . .............

............... L 24,46

) ...................... 164

R&R .................... 347

360

342

174 107

POWER STEERING:

Bleed System

Control Valve ............................. 13,40

Pump ........................................ 12

Steering Gear

System Pressure

POWER TAKE

..........................

......................

...........................

OFF .................. 316, 324, 326

10,37,54

13,28,34,58

11,38

REAR AXLE:

Axle Housings Bearing Adjustment

Remove & Reinstall

Shaft

STEERING TRANSMISSION (By Type):

Auxiliary Four-Speed Six-Speed Eight-Speed Select-O-Speed

..........................

Manual

(

...................................

...................................201

) .........................

..................................193

.................................210

..............................219

..................... 294, 307

...............

298,307

295, 306

5,28

186

CONDENSED

General

Engine Make ........................

No. of Cylinders .....................

Bore-Inches, Non-Diesel .............

Diesel .............................

Stroke-Inches, Non-Diesel ...........

Diesel .............................

Displacement-Cubic Inches,

Non-Diesel ........................

Diesel .............................

Compression Ratio, Non-Diesel .......

Diesel .............................

TRACTOR SERIES

(Before 7/

2000

Own

4.2

3.8

158

8.0:1

16.5:1

SERVICE DATA

20/68)

3000 Own

4.2

3.8

4.2

158

175

8.0:1

16.5:1

4000 Own

4.4

4.2 3.8

4.4

192

201

8.01:1

16.5:1

TRACTOR SERIES

(After 7/

2000

Own

4.2

3.8

158

7.8:1

16.5:1

3000

Own

4.2

3.8

4.2

158

175

7.8:1

16.5:1

19/68)

4000

Own

4.4

201

7.8:1

16.5:1

Page 4

CONDENSED SERVICE

TRACTOR SERIES TRACTOR SERIES

(

Before 7/20/68

DATA (CONT).

) (After 7/

19/68)

Tune-Up Compression

Gage

Lbs. C(

, Cranking

2000 3000 4000 2000 3000 4000

Speed of 200 RPM:

Non-Diesel (All Spark Plugs Out) ...

Diesel .............................

115-150 115-150 115-150 105-140 115-150 115-150 420-510 420-510 420-510 410-490 420-500 420-500

Max. Allowable Variation @ 200 RPM:

Non-Diesel ........................ 25

Diesel ............................. 50

Firing Order ........................ 1-2-3

Valve Tappet Gap-Intake, Hot ....... 0.015

Valve Tappet Gap-Exhaust, Hot ..... 0.018

Valve Face Angle-Degrees .......... 44

Valve Seat Angle-Degrees ........... 45

Ignition Timing ......................

Injection Timing ..................... . 19° BTDC

Spark Plug Make .................... Autolite

Spark Plug Model .................... AG-5

Engine Low Idle RPM ................ 600-650

Engine High Idle RPM, Non-Diesel .... 2065-2115

Diesel ............................. 2175-2225

Engine Rated RPM, Non-Diesel ....... 1900

Diesel ............................. 2000

Battery Terminal Grounded .......... Negative

Sizes-Capacities

Crankshaft

Crankpin Diameter

Camshaft

Piston Pin Diameter

Valve Valve

Main Bearings Running Clearance ....

Rod Bearings Running

Aluminum Bearings

Copper Lead Camshaft

Crankshaft End Play .................

Camshaft End Play ..................

Piston Skirt to Cylinder Clearance ....

Cooling System, Quarts ..............

Crankcase, Quarts-With Filter ......

Transmission, Quarts:

4-Speed ........................... 6.5

6-Speed ...........................

8-Speed ........................... 171/2

10-Speed(Select-O-Speed

Final Drive Steering Gear Housing

Power Steering System, Quarts ....... 2.31

Journal Diameter

Stem Diameter Stem Diameter

Bearings Running Clearance

Clearances

Journal Diameter

..................

.................

Intake ........

Exhaust ......

Clearance,

Bearings

Hydraulic

...............

Quarts ....... 0.85

.........

..........

..............

13.2 13.8 14.0 13.2 13.8 14.0 7 8 8 7 7 9

) .......... 12

Quarts ...... 231

25 25 25 25 25 50 50 50 50 50

1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3 1-2-3

0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015

0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018

44 44 44 44 44

45 45 45 45 45

19°BTDC 19° BTDC 19°BTDC 19° BTDC 19°BTDC

Autolite Autolite Autolite Autolite Autolite

AG-5 AG-5 AG-5 AG-5 AG-5

600-650 600-650 600-700 600-700 600-700 2285-2335 2395-2445 2065-2165 2285-2385 2385-2495 2175-2225 2395-2445 2225-2275 2225-2275 2425-2475

2100 2200 1900 2100 2200

2000 2100 2000 2000 2200

Negative Negative Negative Negative Negative

See Paragraph 180

3.3714-3.3722

2.749-2.750

2.3895-2.3905

1.4997-1.5000

0.3711-0.3718

0.3701-0.3708

0.0022-0.0045

0.0025-0.0045

0.0017

0.0038

0.001-0.003

0.004-0.008

0.001-0.007

See paragraph 105

6.5

131/4

20V2

0.85

2.31

.... 6.5 6.5 ...

.... 14.5 13.8 ....

17 14.5 13.8 13.8

13V4 12 12 13.3

26'4 24

0.66 0.85 0.85 0.66

2.0 2.3 2.3 2.35

.6 24.6 33.9

Page 5

2000

3000-4000

FRONT SYSTEM AND STEERING

4110 & 4140 S.U.)

(MODELS 2100

2110

3100

Paragraphs 1-6

1. Cap Screw

2. Retainer

3. Pivotpin

4. Front support

(

5. Spacer

6. Axle center member

7. Bushing

inner bushing)

FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY AND

STEERING LINKAGE

3100-4110

2110

Models 2100

4140 S.U.

1. SPINDLE BUSHINGS. To renew

the spindle bushings (19 and 22-Fig.

1), proceed as follows: Support front of tractor and disconnect steering arms (17) from wheel spindles (24). Slide spindle out of the axle extension (21). Drive old bushings from front axle extension and install new ones using a piloted drift or bushing driver. New bushings will not require final sizing if

Lower

extension.

installation of the

view show,

Fig. 2-Top view shows proper

dust seal on stalling steering

tion of thrust bearing on spindle before

upper end of spindle before in-

arm.

spindle In axle

installa-

installing

pivot pin and tighten pin to a torque of 300-320 Ft.-Lbs. Install retainer (2) and tighten cap screw (1) to a torque of 75 Ft.-Lbs. If removed, tighten radius rod to axle bolts and axle extension bolts to a torque of 130-160 Ft.-Lbs.

front support, proceed as follows: Re-

move engine hood, grille, lower hood to

rods

similar

to text for

and remodels

on later

of 2100

Spacer

Exploded view

Fig. 1 and

3100 front axle

lated parts

prior to production date 8-

70. Radius

models attach to axle exten-

sions

and

(5) is available in three lengths;

used

Models 2110, 4110

4140 are

refer

selection.

front support bolts and unbolt radiator

8. l' ont drag link end

9. Clamp

10. [)rag link

11. Steering

12. Dust c.var

lI Rear dreg link and

14. Radius

15. Radius rod cap

16. Radius red 12 Steering arm

18. Dust Seal

19. Spindle bushing, upper

20. Grease fitting

21. Axle extension, L.H.

22. S indle bushing, lower

23. Thrust bearing

24. Spindle

25. Steering arm key

gear easy.

red ball spacer

from front support. Place floor jack under front end of transmission and take weight of tractor from front axle. Remove front axle pivot pin as in paragraph 2. Remove bolts retaining front support casting to engine and tower the front support to floor. When reinstalling, tighten the front support bolts to a torque of 200-240 Ft.-Lbs. for models prior to production date 8-70, or 180220 Ft.-Lbs. for later models.

Drag link ends are non-adjustable au-

not distorted during installation. Renew thrust bearing (23) if worn or rough. Refer to Fig. 2 for dust seal and thrust bearing installation.

2. AXLE CENTER

MEMBER,

PIVOT PIN AND BUSHINGS. To remove the axle center member (6Fig. 1), on models prior to production

tomotive type and renewal procedure is evident. Refer to Fig. 1 for manual steering tractors and to Fig. 5 for power steering.

inch; vary the length of each drag link

an equal amount to obtain proper toe-

in. date 8-70, support front of tractor, unbolt radius rods and axle extensions

from axle center member and swing the axle extensions and wheel assem-

Models 2100-2110

blies away from tractor.

NOTE: On models after production date 7-70, the radius rods are attached to axle extensions instead of the axle center member and generally do not

steering gear, first be sure that gear housing is properly filled, then disconnect both drag links from steering arms and proceed as follows:

need to be disconnected.

Remove cap screw (1) and retainer (2), then unscrew front axle pivot pin (3). Withdraw axle center member from either side of tractor. Remove

5) when so equipped and press

spacer

(

out bushing (7).

The front axle support spacer (5) used on models prior to production date 8-70 is available in three lengths: Red,

2.235-2.240; Green, 2.245-2.250 and Grey, 2.255-2.260. Select a spacer that will provide a close fit between pivot pin bosses of front support.

To reassemble, press new bushing into axle center member. If used, insert previously selected spacer into bushing

and be sure spacer is a free fit in

check wormshaft end play, first loosen the lock nuts (1-Fig. 3) on the sector

shaft adjusting screws

screws out two full turns. The wormshaft should turn freely without perceptible end play. Shims (24) are avail-

able in thicknesses of 0.0024 (brass),

0.005 (steel) and 0.010 (steel); also, a

0.005 thick paper gasket is available. Install at least one paper gasket and brass or steel shims as required. Tighten the steering shaft cover retaining cap screws to a torque of 25 Ft.-

Lbs. Renew wormshaft bearings as outlined in paragraph 9 if end play is perceptible with paper gasket, but without any metal shims installed.

bushing.

On all models, insert axle center

member into front support, then install

shaft end play, readjust sector shaft end play as follows:

3. FRONT SUPPORT. To remove

4. DRAG LINKS AND TOE-IN.

Front wheel toe-in should be Y4 to 'A-

MANUAL STEERING GEAR

3100-4110

5. ADJUSTMENT. To adjust the

6. WORMSHAFT END PLAY. To

After checking or adjusting worn-

(8) and back

Page 6

Paragraphs 7-9

Fig. 3-Exploded

adjustable

a shim(7) that

I ,rknut

d parkin,

4 Sidecovere

5. Hushing

6 "0` ring

.. Shun

8. Adjust, ngsrrew

9. Sector gear I urn e)

7. SECTOR SHAFT END PLAY. Before adjusting sector shaft end play, be sure that wormshaft is properly ad-

justed as outlined in paragraphs 5 and

6, then proceed as follows:

Turn the steering wheel to mid or straight ahead position. With the lock nuts on both sector shaft adjusting screws loosened and the adjusting

screw on forward sector shaft (left side)

backed out several turns, turn sector

shaft adjusting screw (right side) in

until there is no perceptible end play in rear sector shaft (13). Tighten lock nut while holding adjusting screw. Turn adjusting screw on left side of unit (front sector shaft) in until there is no perceptible end play of front sector shaft (9). Hold the adjusting screw and tighten lock nut.

Adjustment of steering gear is cor-

rect if a pull of 1 to 2%4 lbs. is required

at outer edge of steering wheel to turn the steering gear over center position. When adjustment of sector shafts is correct, reconnect the drag links to steering arms.

8. R&R STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY. To remove the steering gear assembly, proceed as follows: Discon-

view of 2000 and 3000 manual steering

by varying

thicknessof shims (24);

will provide

zero to 0

11. HnusIFg 1 2 Oiilevel & filler plug

18. Bettor pear (doublet21Hearing retainer 14, Nut

1.5, Washer

16.Steeringarm,Rll-

17. Felt dust seal

IS. Oil seal

Steering arm

002

clearance

sector

1,11

gear

shaft end play Is adjusted

sector

betweenhead of adjusting screw(8) and slot In

9 or 13).

shaft

(

14.

22.

23.

24.

25.

assembly

Ilearingeup Bearingrvne&

rnl lers

Hearing retainer

Wormshaft nseembly

Shims

Rearing cure &

rollers

Wormshaft(23) end play is

by screws(8). Select

Bearing cup

27. Steeringeolumn

Bushing

Dustseal

Grommet

31. Steering wheel nut

Geekel (select-

32.

Speed transmissions

only)

nect battery ground cable and remove the steering wheel. Remove the sheet metal covers at each side of steering gear. Remove screws retaining instrument panel, disconnect ground terminal at left side of panel and rotate panel up out of opening in sheet metal. Disconnect wiring from instrument panel and remove the panel assembly. Remove the light switch and choke or diesel fuel shut-off cable. If equipped with Select-O-Speed transmission, refer to paragraphs 245 and 246 for removal of controls. Remove engine hood and the sheet metal surrounding fuel tank. Shut off the fuel supply, disconnect fuel supply line and diesel fuel return line from tank, then remove fuel tank assembly. Thoroughly clean the steering gear and surrounding area. Disconnect drag links from steering arms, then unbolt and remove steering gear assembly from transmission housing. Drain lubricant from steering gear housing if unit is to be disassembled. Note: On models with Select-OSpeed transmission, take care that no dirt or foreign material enters transmission housing while removing steering gear assembly and place a cover over opening in transmission

Fig.

4-Cross-

gear assembly

sector

Fig. 3 for exploded

sectional view

gears and wormshaft assembly

showing

view and parts Identification.

of manual steering

correct

Installation of

while steering gear is removed.

To reinstall the steering gear assembly, first place a new gasket on opening in transmission housing (Select-OSpeed transmission models only), then reinstall unit by reversing removal procedure. Refill gear housing with SAE 90 E.P. gear lubricant (Ford specification M2C53-A).

9. OVERHAUL. Major overhaul of the steering gear unit necessitates removal of the unit from tractor as outlined in paragraph 8. After removing unit, refer to Fig. 3 and proceed as follows:

Remove steering arm retaining nuts (14) and pull steering arms (10 and 16) from sector shafts (9 and 13). Sector shafts and side covers (4) can be removed as a unit after removing cover retaining screws. To separate shaft and cover, remove lock nut (1) and thread adjusting screw (8) into cover until threads clear. Unbolt steering shaft cover (27) from gear housing (11) and remove cover, shaft and ball nut assembly. Do not disassemble the ball nut and steering shaft assembly (23) as component replacement parts are not available. If steering shaft and/or ball nut are damaged, renew the complete assembly. The need and procedure for further disassembly and/or overhaul is evident from inspection of unit.

The bushings in gear housing for the sector shafts are not serviced separately from housing; install a new housing if bushings are excessively worn. Bushings (5) in side covers (4) are renewable separately from side covers.

Shims (7) on the adjusting screws (8) are available in thicknesses of 0.063,

0.064, 0.066 and 0.069. When reassembling, select a shim that will provide zero to 0.002 clearance between ad-

justing screw head and slot in sector

shaft.

FORD

Refer to

Page 7

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs 10-11

Fig. 5-Drawing valve

assembly

I Power steering pump

(early)

2. Steering cylinder,

3. Tube, pump to reservoir Tube clamp

5. Reservoir

of 2000

(

8),

refer to Fig.

3000

and

12.Exploded

6. Tune, pump to

reservoir

7. Return tube

8. Steering

tossy

9. Front inner tube,

L.H.

10. Rose mar tube, L. H.

ll. Dust cover

To rehssemble, insert the steering shaft and ball nut unit into gear housing with gear teeth on ball nut forward, then install steering shaft housing (27) with proper number of shims as outlined in paragraph 6. Insert the sector shafts, with their ad-

justing screws and correct, thickness

shims, into gear housing so that sector gear teeth and ball nut teeth are timed as shown in Fig. 4. Place new "0" rings (6-Fig. 3) on side covers (4) and pull the side covers into place with sector shaft adjustment screws. Install and tighten the side cover retaining cap screws to a torque of 25 Ft.-Lbs. and adjust the sector shaft end play as outlined in paragraph 7. Install new packing rings (3-Fig. 3) on adjusting screws, install flat washers (2) and tighten the adjusting screw lock nuts (1) while holding adjusting screws in proper position.

Refill gear housing with SAE 90 EP gear lubricant to level with plug (12) opening (approximately 1%4 pints). When reinstalling steering arms, tighten the retaining nuts (14) to a torque of 115-125 Ft.-Lbs.

power steering

pump

our & valve

For exploded view of steering

system

view of power steering pump

25) in Fig. 10.

(

12. Drag link asscmhly 13 Radius tad ball

14. Radius rod ball cap

15. Rear outer tube, R.H. t6. Front inner tube,

R.H.

17. Drag link tube

18. Clamp

(

1) is shown

POWER STEERING SYSTEM

Models 2100

-2110-3100-4110-

4140

CAUTION:

dleanliness of all parts Importance In the operilitlon and servicing of the hydraylic power steering system. Of equal Importance Is the avoidance of nicks or burrs on any of the working parts.

10. FLUID AND BLEEDING. Recommended power steering fluid is Ford M2C41-A oil. Maintain fluid level to full mark on dipstick ,it-Fig. 6); reservoir assembly (5-Fig. 5) on early models is located tinder engine hood directly behind,ptidiator. On late models, reservoir is nlburlted on pump (25). After each 600 hgiirs of operation, it is recommended that the filter element (8

-Fig. 6 or 3-Fig. 10) be renewed, any oil in reservoir be removed with suction gun and that the, reservoir be refilled to full mark on 'dipstick with new; clean oil.

The power steering system is selfbleeding. When unit has been disassembled, refill with new oil to full mark on dipstick, then start engine

The maintenance of absolute

gear and

In Fig. 7, late

19.

Ore'vsure tube

Drag link fruit tend

20.

21. Duatseal

22 .

Steering arm

23. Radius ad

24. Steering cylinder,

L.H.

25. Steering pump (late)

s of the utmost

Fig.-6-Exploded

and filter assembly usedonearly models.

1. (lipstick

2. Gasket

3. Nut

4. Sealing washer

5. Cover

view of power steering

reservoir

6. Gasket

7. Spring

8. Filter element

9. Reservoir

10 Clamp

and cycle the system several times by turning the steering wheel from lock to lock. Recheck fluid level and add as required. System is fully bled when no more 'air bubbles appear in reservoir as

systerh is being cycled.

11.. CHECKING SYSTEM PRES-

SURE AND FLOW. The power

steering pump assembly incorporates a

pressure relief valve and a flow control valve. System relief pressure and flow should be as follows:

Early Late

Pump Pump

Pressure, psi ........... 650 650

Flow, gpm @ 1000 rpm . 3.5 2.74

To check 'system relief pressure,in-

stall..a "T" fitting in pressure line (19Fig. 5) at pump connection and connect a 0-1000 psi gage to fitting. With the engine running at 1000 RPM and the front wheels turned against lock, gage reading should be 600-700 psi.

Page 8

Paragraph 12

FORD

'0' RINGS

35 34 I

Fig. 7-Exploded

tip end of valve

I Cap plug

2. "0 ring

3. Flow control valve

4 Spring

5 Tubing .-Tt,

,Shims

Cap ping

0 ring

9 Spring

31 3,

view of early power steering pump

(

3) Is towards side of rear through 10). Refer

10. Pressure reliefvalve

11.

Seal ring

12. Outlet elbow

13. Cap plug

14 "0" ring

15 Rearcover

10. !(.. ring 17 "0" ring

18 _ Rear plate

19. Inner seal ring

29 2

cover

Fig.

Note that

(

15) containing the relief valve

9 for

20. Outer seal ring

21. Bearing block

22. Drive or & shaft

23. Driven gear & shaft

24. Pump body 25 Bolt(dowelt rings 12(

26. Bearing black

27. Outer seal ring

28- Inner seal ring

29 Frontmver

model

flow control

4200 shaft

seals.

valve

(

spring

4) and small

assembly(Items 6

30. Seal (except model

4200)

31. Locating ring 32 '0" ring

33. Drive gear

84. Tab washer

35. Nut

36. Woodruff key

Fig. 8-Drawing showing gears and bearing blocks

from rear

(

flanged

correct

Installation of

In pump body. View is

) end of pump body.

CAUTION: When

relief pressure

checking system

hold the steering wheel against lock for only long enough to observe gage reading; pump may be damaged if steering wheel is held in

this position for an excessive length of time.

To adjust the pressure on early mod-

els, remove pressure relief valve cap (7

-Fig. 7 as required

)

and add or remove shims (6)

If adding shims under the pressure relief valve cap will not increase system pressure

remove and overhaul power steering pump as outlined in paragraph 12.

On late models,

sembled to

Refe

r to paragraph 12 and Fig. 10.

Shims (

25) control system pressure and

pump must be disas-

adjust opening pressure.

are available in thicknesses of 0.010,

0.015 and 0.060

A change of 0.005 in

total shim pack thickness will alter

system pressure about 35 psi. Late pump does not contain a flow control valve.

12. R&R AND OVERHAUL PUMP. Thoroughly clean pump, lines and surrounding area. Disconnect lines from pump and allow fluid to drain. Cap all openings to prevent dirt from entering pump or lines, then unbolt and remove pump assembly from engine front plate. When reinstalling

pump, use new sealing "0" ring and tighten retaining bolts to a torque of 23-29 Ft.-Lbs. Reconnect lines, fill and bleed system as in paragraph 10.

On early models, refer to exploded view of pump in Fig. 7 and disassemble pump as follows: Scribe an assembly mark across pump covers and body. Straighten tab on washer (34) and remove nut (35). Pull drive gear (33) from pump shaft and remove key (36). Remove the four through-bolts and separate rear cover assembly (15), plate (18), body (24) and front cover (29). Remove bearing blocks (21 and

26) and gears (22 and 23) from pump as a unit. Remove caps (1, 7 and 13) from

Fig,

pump Is fitted with

stead

models

outer seal

model 4200

9-On

of single seal (30

Lips of two

lip Is toward retaining snap ring (31).

Pump front cover Is

tractors

shaft

three

Fig.

Innerseals face

29);

drive shaft is (22).

(

power steering

seals

7) used on

rear cover (15) and withdraw flow control valve (3), pressure relief valve (10) and related parts. Remove snap ring (31) and the oil seal (30) from front

cover. Clean all parts in a suitable solvent, air dry, then lightly oil all machined surfaces.

Inspect bearing blocks (21 and 26) for

signs of seizure or scoring on face of journals. (When disassembling bearing

block and gear unit, keep parts in rela-

tive position to facilitate reassembly.)

Light score marks on faces of bearing

blocks can be removed by lapping bearing block on a surface plate using grade "0" emery paper and kerosene.

(

30A) in-

other

Inward,

Page 9

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs 13-16

Fig. 10-Exploded

steering

power integral reservoir used

most

late

view of

pump With

models.

Examine body for wear in gear running

track. If track is worn deeper than

0.0025 on inlet side, body must be renewed. Examine pump gears for exces-

sive wear or damage on journals, faces or teeth. Runout across the gear face to tooth edge should not exceed 0.001. If

necessary, the gear journals may be

lightly polished with grade "0" emery

paper to remove wear marks. The gear

faces may be polished by sandwiching

grade "0" emery paper between gear

and face of scrap bearing block, then

rotating the gear. New gears are avail-

able in matched sets only.

When reassembling pump, install all

new seals, "0" rings and sealing rings.

On models with three shaft seals (Fig.

are installed lips

9), the two inner

seals

first and outer seal lip out to serve as a

dust seal.

Install flow control valve (3), spring (4) and plugs (1 and 13) with new "0" rings (2 and 14). Install pressure relief valve (10), spring (9) and plug (7), being sure that all shims (6) are in plug and using new "0" ring (8). Assemble pump gears to bearing blocks (use Fig. 8 as a guide, if necessary) and insert the unit into pump body. Be sure the

two bolt rings (hollow dowels) are in place in pump body, then position the front cover on body. Place the rear plate (18-Fig. 7) at rear of body and install rear cover. Tighten the four cap screws (throughbolts) to a torque of 13-

17 Ft.-Lbs. Install the pump drive gear key, drive gear, tab washer and nut. Tighten the nut to a torque of 55-60 Ft.-Lbs. and bend tab of washer against flat on nut.

On models with integral pump and

reservoir refer to Fig. 10. Clean pump

and surrounding area and disconnect pump pressure and return lines. Remove the two cap screws securing pump to engine front cover and lift off

1. Bolt

2, Reservoir

3. Filter

4. Gaeket

5. Through-bolt

6. Cover

7. O-ring

8. Seal nng

9. Bearing block

10. Driven gear 1I. Follow gear

12. Woodruffkey

13. Body

14. Outlet elbow

15. Ring dowel

16..Seal ring 17 . Seal ring

16. Flange'casing

10. Oil seal

20. Snap ring

21. O-ring 22 Drive gear 23, Shot, not

24. Valve hody

25. Shin, park

26. Spring 27 . Spring guide 28 Seal

29. Valve head

30. valve seat

31. O-ring

32. Relief valve

pump and reservoir as a unit. Drain the reservoir and remove through-bolt (1), reservoir (2) and filter (3).

Relief valve cartridge (32) can now be removed if service is indicated. For access to shims (25), grasp seat (30) lightly in a protected vise and unscrew body (24). Shims (25) are available in thicknesses of 0.010, 0.015 and 0.060. Starting with the removed shim pack, substitute shims thus varying total pack thickness, to adjust opening pressure. Available shims permit thickness adjustment in increments of 0.005 and each 0.005 in shim pack thickness will change opening pressure about 35 psi. If parts are renewed, the correct thickness can only be determined by trial and error, using the removed shim pack as a guide.

To disassemble the pump, bend back tab washer and remove shaft nut (23), drive gear (22) and key (12). Mark or note relative positions of flange housing (18), pump body (13) and cover (6); then remove pump throughbolts (5). Keep parts in their proper relative position when disassembling pump unit. Pump gears (10 & 11) are available in a matched set only. Bearing blocks (9) are available separately but should be renewed in pairs if renewal is because of wear. Bearing blocks should also be renewed with gear set if any shaft or bore wear is evident.

When reassembling the pump,

tighten through bolts (5) to a torque of

25 Ft.-Lbs. and drive gear nut (23) to a

torque of 30-40 Ft.-Lbs.

13, CONTROL VALVE AND

STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY. The power steering system is of the linkage booster type which control valve combined with the steering shaft and gear assembly as an

integral unit. Refer to Fig. 12 for an exploded view of the assembly. Adjust-

utilizes a

align indent in

Fig.

reservoir with positioning lugs

When

Installing

shown.

reservoir

pump body as

ment and service information for thr

unit is contained graphs 14

in the following para-

through 17.

14. ADJUST STEERING GEAR. The

steering carried in and 22 End thrust to operate the control

To adjust sector gears lock nuts screws

wormshaft (21-Fig. 12) is

needle roller hearings i20

) which require no adjustment

of the wormshaft is utiliz,,il

valve spool.

loosen the

1) and back both adjusting

(

8) out two full turns. Turn ad-

(

justing screw on rear sector shaft (13)

in until there is no perceptible backlash of rear sector shaft gears. the lock nut while holding adjusting screw in this position sector shaft adjusted

. With the rear

turn the ad-

justing screw on front sector shaft (9) in

until there is no perceptible backlash of

then tighten

front sector shaft gears

lock nut while holding adjusting scre,'

in this position.

15. R&R

STEERING GEAR AND

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY. To

remove the steering steering

control valve assembly, prt,-

gear and power

ceod as follows:

16. Disconnect

and remove

battery ground cable

the steering wheel. Drai1:

power steering reservoir and disconnect cylinder line at outer side of either cylinder to drain oil from the control

Remove the sheet metal covers

valve at each side of steering gear

screws retaining instrument panel, disconnect ground terminal at left side of panel and rotate panel up out of the opening in sheet metal. Disconnect

Tighten

Remove

Page 10

Paragraphs 17-20

FORD

1 3 4

Fig. 12-Exploded view of power steering or reaction of front wheels through

I buck nut 12

2. Washer 13

3. Packing 14. Nut

4. side covers 15. Washer

5. slushing 36

G. "0 "ring 17.

Shim 13. Ollaeal

S Adma-ring rvcw' IH. Paper "Ilk" 10 1051

9. Seeni'gea g 20. Needlr rollerben ink Streri gnnnl..H. 21. Warns hallasacmbl

Housing 22 Needle roll crbaaring

wiring from instrument panel and remove the panel assembly. Remove the light switch and choke or diesel shut-off cable. If equipped with SelectO-Speed transmission, refer to para-

graphs 245 and 246 for removal of controls. Remove hood and the sheet metal surrounding fuel tank. Shut off the fuel supply valve, disconnect fuel supply line and diesel fuel return line from tank, then remove the fuel tank as-

sembly.

17. Thoroughly clean the steering gear, power steering line connections and surrounding area. Disconnect drag links from steering arms and disconnect power steering lines from control valve. Unbolt and remove the steering gear and control valve assembly from

or down,

Oil level & filler plug

Sector gear,double

Steering arm, Rit Felt dust seal

23. Adapter assembly

gear and valve

steering

thereby

linkage and gears

actuating the control valve (27).

24. Oil seal

25. "0" ring

26. Thrust bearing asay,

27. Valve assembly

28. Tube seat

29. Reaction plungers (2)

30. Thrust plungers(61

31. Tubes,-at

32. "0"ring

33. Return union

34. Check valve

35. Plunger springs (.3)

top of transmission housing. Note: On models with Select-O-Speed transmission, take care that no dirt or other foreign material enters the transmission when removing or reinstalling the steering gear and cover the opening in transmission housing while steering gear unit is.removed. Drain lubricating

oil from gear housing.

versing removal procedure. On SelectO-Speed transmission new gasket over opening in transmission housing before reinstalling steering gear. Refill and bleed the power steering system as outlined in paragraph 10. Refill steering gear with

SAE 90 E.P. gear lubricant.

assembly. Turning

causes

effort

on steering

wormshaft

38. Thrust bearing easy.

37. Pre.

.her

38. Lockout

39. "0" ring

40. Oil seal

41. Steeringculumn

42. Upper bushing

43 Dust seal

44. Grommel

45. Steering w heel nut

Reinstall steering gear unit by re-

models,place a

4 3 2 1

(21) to move

lad spring

wheel,

Fig.

13-Cross

assembly showing

sector gears

exploded view of unit and for parts Identfllca-

18. RENEFA

UPPER SEAL.

sectional

correct

and wormahaft

tion.

7ONTROL VALVE

If power steering fluid

view of steering gear

Installation

;

refer

leaks from steering column housing, the control valve upper seal (40-Fig.

12) is leaking and can be renewed as follows:

Follow general procedures outlined

in paragraph 16, except that the fuel lines do not need to be disconnected nor does the fuel tank need to be removed.

Thoroughly clean the steering gear and

control valve assembly

Remove the cap screws retaining steering column (41) to steering gear and remove the steering column lower

end of steering column with

Remove the seal from

OTC945-2 puller and slide hammer.

prive

the bushing

(

42) from upper end of steering column with a 1-inch diameter dowel.

19. Fabricate a seal guide from an 18

inch

length of %-inch

thin

wall electrical conduit by counterboring the inside diameter to 27 of 3 inches

32-inch for a depth

Install new seal in lower end of steering column using a 1% inch diameter driver. Install seal so that spring and lip will be downward (towards control valve

Place counterbored end of seal guide through seal and install

the steering column over steering shaft with new "0" ring in groove in steering column

Install the steering column retaining cap screws to a torque of 25 Ft

Lbs. and remove the seal guide.Install new bushing in top end of steering column

then reinstall removed parts. Refill and bleed power steering as outlined in paragraph 10.

20. OVERHAUL CONTROL

VALVE. With

steering gear and con-

trol valve assembly removed from

tractor as outlined in paragraphs 15

(

timing) of

Fig. 12 for

•

Page 11

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs 21-22

through 17, proceed as follows:

Scribe a line across steering column, valve housing and adapter to facilitate reassembly. Remove return line union (33-Fig. 12) from valve housing, dis-

card "0" ring (32) and unscrew the

check valve (34). Remove the cap screws retaining steering column and remove column from steering shaft. Carefully unstake lock nut (38) and

temporarily install steering wheel on

shaft to hold shaft while unscrewing

nut. Remove the steering wheel and

nut and position steering gear unit on

bench so that steering shaft is in hori-

zontal position. Slide spring washer (37), upper thrust bearing (36), control valve assembly (27) and lower thrust bearing (26) from steering shaft. Note: Take care that control valve spool, plungers (30) and check valves (29) do not drop out of valve housing as it is

removed from steering shaft. Unbolt and remove adapter (23) from steering gear housing.

Note which end of the control valve

spool has the identification groove (Fig.

15), then slide spool from housing.

Remove the six plungers (30-Fig. 12),

three springs (35) and the two check

valves (29), noting which hole contained the check valves. If any of the brass seats (28 and/or 31) for the pump pressure line and the steering cylinder lines are damaged, remove them from valve housing by threading a tap into the seat, clamping tap in vise and pulling the housing from the seat. Remove seal (40) and bushing (42) from steering column. Remove seal (24) from adapter (23).

Inspect all removed parts for damage

or undue wear and renew any not ac-

ceptable for further service. Install new "0" rings (25, 32 & 39), seals (24 and

40) and lock nut (38) when reassembling. To reassemble, proceed as follows:

21. Install new seal (24) in adapter (23) with lip of seal up (towards control valve). Install the adapter over steering shaft and to steering gear housing with a new 0.005 thick paper gasket (19) and tighten the retaining nuts to a torque of 25 Ft.-Lbs. Place new "0" ring (25) in groove in top of adapter. Place the small race, bearing retainer and large race over steering shaft and against shoulder on shaft. Lubricate valve spool and insert in housing with identifying groove in same direction as when removed. Insert the check valves in same bore from which they were removed and with open ends inward. Lubricate and insert the six plungers in the remaining bores with a spring between each set of plungers. Carefully place the assembled valve unit on steering shaft next to thrust bearing with the offset cylinder ports upward as shown in Fig. 16. Place large race of upper thrust bearing on shaft against valve, then install bearing retainer and small race. Place spring washer on shaft against small thrust bearing race with cup side of washer towards the race. Install a new lock nut, tighten the nut so that all end play is removed, then loosen the nut 1/6-turn and stake the nut to locating slot in steering shaft as shown

in Fig. 16. Reinstall the steering

column as outlined in paragraph 19.

22. OVERHAUL STEERING GEAR.

With control valve assembly and

adapter removed from top of steering gear as outlined in paragraph 20, refer to Fig. 12 and proceed as follows:

Remove the nuts (14) and with suit-

remove steering

able pullers

and 16). Remove

the lock nuts (1) from

sector shaft adjusting screws (8) and

remove cap screws retaining side

covers

With

screws in to

sector shafts and

housing

and 13

housing

ball nut assembly

4) to steering gear housing.

(

screwdriver

push

, turn adjusting

side covers from

the steering gear

. Withdraw

and adjusting screws from

)

Remove steering

the sector

(21). Drive the seals

(18) from steering gear housing.

Carefully inspect all parts and renew any that are damaged or show undue wear. Sector shaft bushings in steering gear housing are not serviced separately from housing. Bushings in side covers may be renewed or a new side cover and bushing assembly may be installed if bushings are worn. Steering shaft and ball nut assembly is

serviced Renew needle bearings steering gear housing loose or worn

(

trade

Reassemble seals seals to inside

as a complete unit only.

; drive or press on lettered

end of bearing

mark)

unit as follows:

18) in gear

(

. Install new seal (24) in

(20 and 22) in

and adapter if

housing with lips of

adapter (23) with lip of seal upward (toward control valve). Place steering shaft and ball nut assembly in gear housing with gear teeth on ball nut forward, then install the adapter with a new 0.005 thick paper gasket (19). Note: Take care not to damage seal in adapter when installing the adapter over steering shaft; wrap threads, sharp shoulders, etc., with plastic tape. Tighten the adapter retaining nuts to a torque of 25 Ft.-Lbs. Insert adjusting

arms (10

shafts (9

shaft and

cage only.

Install

Fig. 14-View

side of control spool assembly;Install three sets of control

plungers and springs and

the two check

bores

showing

in housing

valve and

valves in the

as shown.

upper

valve

the

Fig. 15-Insert

that

identification

control

notch

of steering

valve

will be

spool in housing

towards

shaft.

top end

Page 12

Paragraphs 23-24

Fig. 17-Exploded view

rod

seals can be

screw (

8) in slot of rear sector gear (13) (gear with double teeth of thickness clearance between head of adjusting screw and slot in sector shaft. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.063,

0.064,0.066 and 0 sembled sector gear and adjusting screw in gear housing so that teeth of sector gear and ball nut are meshed as shown in Fig.13. Install a new

(6-Fig. 12) the "0"

ring and pull side cover onto

sector gear with adjusting

of power steering cylinder used on 2100

renewed but

will give zero to 0.002

that

on side cover

cylinder,

) with

a shim (7)

069. Insert the as-

(

4), lubricate

screw. In-

piston and piston rod

cylinder assembly.

stall the side cover retaining cap screws and tighten them to a torque of 25 Ft.-Lbs. Turn adjusting until there is no perceptible end play of sector shaft, then install new packing

ring

Hold the adjusting screw in proper po-

sition while installing and tightening

lock nut.

sector shaft

0" ring

shaft as previously outlined for rear sector shaft using Fig. 13 as a guide for timing

teeth.

Fig. 16

nut is properly positioned as

explained In

to slot

2110,3100 and

are not serviced

(

3), washer

(

2) and lock nut (1).

Select a shim

9), then install front sector

(

front

sector to rear sector shaft

Install steering arms and

When valve retaining

text; stake

shaft as

shown.

1. Cylinderaesembly

2. Tubing seats (2)

3. Grease fitting

4. Dust seal

5. Inner seal

6. Outer seal

7. scraper washer

8. Bushing

9. Sn7, ring

10. Enssembly

models.

Piston

4110

except as a complete

screw in

(

7) for the front

tighten retaining nuts to a torque of

115-125 Ft.-Lbs. Reinstall control

valve as outlined in paragraph 21,

steering column as in and reinstall

the steering trol valve assembly graph 17.

nut

23. POWER CYLINDERS. Power cylinders are right and left assemblies and should be identified prior to removal. Place a drain pan under cylinder to be removed and disconnect the hydraulic

lines.

front and rear ball and bump from mounting holes. Clear cylinder of oil by moving piston rod back and forth.

Loosen clamp and unscrew forward end assembly (10-Fig. 17) from piston rod. Remove

snap ring

to end of travel. Then, remove the

scraper washer

(7), wiperseal (6), alu-

minum bushing (8) and inner

(If seal did

not come

rod, remove with awl or other sharp

pointed tool.)

If cylinder or piston

the complete power cylinder must be

renewed as only the rod end assembly

and seal kit are available for service.

Reassemble by reversing disassembly procedure. Seals should be soaked in power steering fluid prior to installation. Carefully

install inner

piston rod with lip of seal inward, then,

using a dull pointed tool, work outer lip of seal into proper position in cylinder.

Install the

aluminum

seal with lip outward, washer with

scraper lip outward and then install

retaining

assembly.

snap ring and

Reinstall

with ports upward, reconnect cylinder

lines and fill and bleed the system as

outlined in

paragraph ward end assembly far enough

onto piston rod so that

piston will reach end

front wheel spindles contact their

. Piston rod should not flex when

stops

cylinder is fully extended.

FORD

paragraph 19

gear and con-

as outlined in para-

Remove nuts from

socket assemblies

(9) and pull rod

seal (5).

out with piston

rod is damaged,

seal over

bushing, outer

forward end

power cylinder

10. Note: For-

should be screwed

of stroke before

FRONT SYSTEM AND STEERING

FRONT AXLE

STEERING LINKAGE

All Models

24. SPINDLE BUSHINGS. To

renew the spindle bushings (21 and 23

-Fig. 19), support front of tractor and

ASSEMBLY AND

(MODEL 4100 ALL PURPOSE)

disconnect steering arms (13 and 19) from wheel spindles (26). Slide the wheel and spindle assemblies (remove wheels from hubs if desired for clearance) out of the front axle (22). Drive old bushings from front axle extensions and install new bushings

extensions

with piloted drift or bushing driver.

New bushings are final sized and should not require reaming installed worn or rough rect installation

. Renew thrust bearing (24) if

. Refer to Fig. 18 for cor-

of thrust bearing and

spindle dust seal.

if carefully

Page 13

2000

Fig. 18

dust seal on axle extension

lation

3000-4000

Top view

of thrust

lation spindle In axle

proper installation of

shows

spindle is Installed in

after

spindle

Lower

view

bearingonspindle prior

shows

extension.

proper instal-

to instal-

1. Plug

2. Front trunnion bracket

3. Bushing

4. Shim. (0.002, 0 006 and 0.015)

5. 'throat washer

6. Axle center member

7. Thrust washer

S. Bushing

9. Connecting rod

0. Clamp

11. Connecting rod end.

12. Dust ..Is

13. Right steering arm

14. Front support 15, Steering gear assy.

16. Drag link rear end

17. Clamp 1a Drag link front end

19. Left steering arm

20. Dust seal

21. Upper spindle bushing

22. Left axle extension

23. Lower spindle bushing

24. Thrust bearing

25. Woodruttkey

26. Left wheel spindle

Paragraphs 25-30

25. AXLE CENTER

MEMBER,

PIVOT PINS AND BUSHINGS. To remove axle center member (6-Fig.

19), support front of tractor, remove bolts from clamps (10) on connecting rod (9) and bolts that retain axle exten-

sions

(22) in center member. Slide the

axle extension semblies

port center member and

(2), then remove

nion

spindle and

out of center member. Sup-

remove trun-

center member

from front support. Note: When removing trunnion, take

care

or damage shims (4).

Pivot pins

are an integral

front axle center member and are renewable by installing new center

member only. Pivot pin bushing (3) in

trunnion and bushing (8) in front support should be renewed if worn, Also, renew thrust washers (5 and/or 7) if worn.

Reinstall front axle center member by reversing removal procedure. Install shims (4) as required to eliminate end play of axle center member between front support and trunnion. Shims are available in thicknesses of

0.002, 0.005 and 0.015. Place all shims between front thrust washer (5) and trunnion (2).

26, FRONT SUPPORT. To remove front support, proceed as follows: Drain cooling system and remove hood, and radiator. Support front end of tractor. Disconnect assembly (18-Fig. trunnion (2). Roll the front

drag link from end

19) and remove axle assem

bly away from tractor, attach hoist to front support, then unbolt and remove front support from engine. Install by reversing the removal procedure. Tighten the front support to engine bolts to a torque of 200-240 Ft.-Lbs. Install shims (4) between thrust

wheel as-

not to lose

part of the

grille

Fig. 19-Exploded view of model Manual steering linkage is exploded view

of the steering gear

shown

4100

;

refer

washer (5) and trunnion (2) to eliminate end play of front axle on pivot pins. When reconnecting drag link, refer to paragraph 27.

27. DRAG LINK, CONNECTING ROD AND TOE-IN. Front wheel spindle arm connecting rod ends and drag link ends are of the non-adjustable automotive type and procedure for renewing same is evident.

Toe-in should be correct for each

tread width position when connecting

rod clamp bolt is placed in corresponding notch of rod end assembly. If toe-in is not within limits of 0 to '/4inch, check for bent or excessively worn parts.

On models prior to production date 8/70, length of drag link between steering gear arm and right front spindle arm should be adjusted for different tread width positions as follows: When right front axle extension is in innermost position or extended 2

inches (one adjustment hole), drag link should be in shortest position. Then,

lengthen drag link one notch for each additional 2 inch extension of right

front axle.

STEERING GEAR UNIT

All Manual Steering Models;

Early Models With Power

Steering

28. Refer to Fig. 21 for exploded view of steering gear unit used on all manual steering models and early tractors with power steering.

front axle assembly

Fig

assembly

steering

35 for

15) that is

(

models.

front support and

power

steering

used on both manual steering

system.Refer to Fig. 21 for

29. ADJUSTMENT. If there is no perceptible end play of either the steering (worm) shaft (6-Fig. 21) or the rocker shaft (22) and a pull at outer edge of steering wheel of 1 to 2% lbs. is required to turn gear unit past midposition (with drag link or power steering cylinder disconnected from steering arm), adjustment can be considered correct. Although usually performed only during reassembly of gear unit, adjustments for wormshaft and rocker shaft end play can be made to correct excessive end play or turning effort. With unit removed from tractor as outlined in paragraph 32, proceed as follows:

30. WORMSHAFT END PLAY.

Remove side cover (25-Fig. 21) and

inspect condition of unit. If no obvious damage or excessive wear is noted, add or remove shims (14) and gaskets (15) so that the wormshaft turns freely, but has no perceptible end play. Approximate shim and gasket thickness can be determined by installing steering column without shims or gaskets and

measuring

resulting gap between

steering column and

Tighten column retaining nuts finger tight and

measure gap

points with feeler gage as shown in Fig.

25. Paper gaskets are 0.010 thick and steel shims are available in thicknesses of 0.003 and 0.010. Use one gasket on each side of shim pack and, on final assembly, apply a light coat of sealer to gaskets. Tighten steering

steering linkage.

and power

gear housing.

at several

Page 14

Paragraphs 31-33

3 9

FORD

25 24 23 22

Exploded view of steering gear

Fig. 21 early models

twenty

are used

I- Ore mmet

2 Dust Seal

Pushing

4 Steering column

per hearing race

6. RormsheR

7 Roller

column retaining nuts to a torque of

25-35 Ft.-Lbs.

31. ROCKER SHAFT END PLAY.

First, adjust

outlined in paragraph 30, then proceed as follows:

Be sure rocker shaft and ball nut are

in mid position and roller is in place as shown in Fig. 22, then install side cover (25-Fig. 21) without shims (23) or gaskets (24). Tighten the retaining

nuts and cap screws equally finger

tight, then measure gap between side cover and steering housing at several

points with feeler gage. Average gap

measurement is approximate thickness

of shims and gaskets required. Shims

are 0.005 thick. Use one gasket on each side of shim pack and, on final assem-

bly, apply a light coat of sealer to gas-

kets.

power steering

with

for steering shaft bearings and 14

Thirty

8 Ball nut

9. Steel balls (*-inl

Retainer

11. Tube

12. Lower bearing race

13. Spacer

14. Shims

15. Gasket

wormahaft end play as

unit of the

four Vrinch diameter steel balls

recirculating groove.

type used on all manual

are used In

IS. Steering arm

Past seal

17.

Is.

Oil Real

19.

Flushing

20.

Plug

21.

Bushing

22.

Rocker shaft

23.

Shims

32. R&R STEERING

SEMBLY. To remove the assembly, proceed as follows: Disconnect battery ground cable and remove the steering wheel.

metal covers

Remove screws retaining

gear ment panel

minal at left side of panel and rotate panel up out of opening in sheet metal.

Disconnect wiring from instrument

panel and remove the panel assembly.

Remove the light switch and choke or diesel shut-off cable. If equipped with Select-O-Speed transmission, refer to paragraphs 245 and 246 for removal of controls. Remove engine hood and the sheet metal surrounding fuel tank. Shut off the fuel supply, disconnect fuel supply line and diesel fuel return line from tank, then remove fuel tank assembly. Thoroughly clean the steering

and surrounding

gear

19 18 11 16

steering

are used in

ball nut(8) and tube (11)

the

at each side

, disconnect ground ter-

models and on

24- Gasket

25. Side cover

Gear housing

27.

Sealing washer

28.

Plug

29-

Gasket (Select-O-

Speed only)

GEAR AS-

steering gear

Remove

area.

the assembly;

of steering

Disconnect

the sheet

instru-

Fig. 22-View cover removed

Removing

Fig. 23-

assembly from gear housing.

of steering

Roller

the ball

gear assembly with

moves in slot In side

cover.

nut and steering

drag link or power steering cylinder from steering arm, then unbolt and remove steering gear assembly from the transmission housing. Drain lubricant from steering gear housing if unit

is to be disassembled. Note: On models with Select-O-Speed transmission,

take care that no dirt or foreign mate-

rial enters transmission housing while

removing steering gear assembly and

place a cover over opening in transmission housing while steering gear is removed.

To reinstall steering gear assembly,

place a new gasket on transmission

housing (Select-O-Speed transmission models only), then reinstall steering gear assembly by reversing removal procedure. Refill gear housing with SAE 90 E.P. gear lubricant (Ford speci-

fication M-2C53-A).

33. OVERHAUL STEERING

GEAR UNIT

. With

the steering gear assembly removed from tractor as outlined in paragraph 32, refer to exploded

side

shaft

Page 15

2000

Fig. ?,4-Installing upper bearing

Fig. 25

housing mine shim and aqd gasket thickness

housing

3000-4000

bearings.

Measuring

and

steering

asket

and side cover is

manner.

clearance

column housing

thickness required

between

determined

race

needed.

between gggj

view of unit in Fig. 21 and proceed as follows:

Ramove nut retaining steering arm (16) to rocker shaft (22) and, using suitable pullers, remove arm from shaft. Unbolt and remove the side cover (25), shims (23) and gaskets (24). Remove roller (7) from ball nut (8) and slide the rocker shaft from housing. Unbolt and

remove steering column (4), shims (14) and gaskets (15) from gear housing (26). Remove bushing (3) from upper end of steering column. Pull wormshaft (6) upward, then remove upper bearing

race (5) and the 10 loose bearing balls

(9). Remove the wormshaft and ball nut assembly from gear housing as shown*in Fig. 23, then remove the 10 loose bearing balls from gear housing. Unscrew the ball nut assembly from wormshaft and remove the 14 recirculating balls from the nut. Tube (11Fig. 21) can be removed from nut (8) if necessary. Remove lower bearing race

(12), spacer (13), bushings (19 and 21)

and oil seal (18) from gear housing (26).

and ball

gear

to deter-

Shim

similar

To reassemble, proceed as follows: Install new bushings (19 and 21) using piloted drift or bushing driver, then install new seal (18) with lip to inside of gear housing. install spacer (13) and lower bearing race (12) in gear housing, then stick the 10 bearing balls in race with grease. Assemble tube (11) to ball nut (8) if removed, then stick the

14 recirculating balls in tube and groove of nut with grease. Thread the ball nut assembly onto wormshaft, then install the shaft and nut assembly

in gear housing as in Fig. 23. Carefully

insert wormshaft into lower bearing to

avoid dislodging any of the bearing

balls, then while holding shaft in the

bearing, place upper bearing race over

shaft and invert the assembly allowing

gear housing to rest against end of

shaft. Stick the 10 bearing balls in

upper race with grease, then push

bearing assembly up into housing as

shown in Fig. 24. While holding

against upper bearing, turn the as-

sembly upright. Install new bushing (3

-Fig. 21) in steering column, then

refer to paragraph 30 for wormshaft

adjustment and column installation.

Insert rocker shaft. Install the steering

arm (a6) and tighten theretaining nut

to a torque of 125 Ft.-Lbs. Place roller

on end of ball nut (see Fig. 22) and in-

stall side cover with proper shims and

gaskets from rocker shaft adjustment

as outlined in paragraph 31.

Late Power Steering Models

34. Late power steering models use the integral power assist unit shown schematically in Fig. 26 and exploded in Fig. 27. A piston is built into the shaft ball nut and a pylinder machined into the gearcase housing; and the eqtire case unit is pressurized by the steering oil. Control is by means of a rotary valve which is built into piston and ball nut unit (12) and is not available separately. The, pressure passage to top of piston (P) is internal while lower end is pressurized by external flow through pressure tube (24). The piston and ball nut moves upward for a right-hand turn. Manual operation of

steering gear is made possible by a

check ball (7) located: in valve housing which recirculates oil within gear housing when pump is inoperative.

35. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. To remove the Steering gear assembly, first disconnect battery ground cable

and remove steering wheel. Remove sheet metal covers at each side of steering gear. Remove screws retaining inf ground teAninal (left side) and rotate panel up apd out ofopening in cowl. Disconnect wiring and remove instru-

ment panel. Remove light switch and

ftrument panel, disconnect

Paragraphs 34-36

Fig.

26-Schematic

gear unit inder is

used on some

built on

ized.Refer

choke (or diesel shut-off cable). On Select-O-Speed Models, refer tp paragraphs`245 and 246 for removal of controls. Remove engine hood and cowl.

Shut off fuel, disconnect and remove fuel tank. Clean steering gear unit. Disconnect drag link and pump pressure and return lines, then unbolt and lift off steering gear assembly.

NOTE: On Select-O-Speed Models,

make sure Into transmission during removal steering gear is off.

To install steering gear, reverse

removal procedure. Use a new transmission housing gasket on Select-OSpeed Models. Refill steering gear after complete assembly by cycling- power

steering

keeping pump reservoir filled.

36. OVERHAUL. Before blingthe removed steering gear, temporarily reinstall steering wheel and

disconnect external oil

Fig. 27): Turn

to _. lock

several

fluid as

housing.

Remove steering arm (15) using Special Tool -1001 or other suitable puller. Remove side cover. (23), gasket (20),

and rocker shaft end float shim (22). Turn steering shaft until rocker shaft

arm is centered in housing opening as

shown in Fig. 28, then withdraw rocker shaft.

Remove the four stud nuts securing steering column (1-Fig. 27) and lift off the column and shaft (2). Remove and save shim pack (5). Install the oil seal protecter sleeve (Tool SW 23/1) over

steering

shaft spline as shown in Fig. 29, gently tap valve housing (6) from bearing housing (9) and lift off valve housing, saving bearing-adjust-

ment shims

removed.

viewoflate power steering

models.

ball nut and

to Fig.27

no dirt or foreign

gear

for exploded view.

, engine running, while

feed pipe (24-

steering

wheel from lock

times until as much

possible is

pumped from

(8) as valve

unit is pressur.

material falls

housing is

Steering

or while

disassem-

away

cyl-

Page 16

Paragraph

36 Cont.

FORD

Fig. 28

Rocker

arm is centered in housing opening as shown.

Refer

shaft can

Fig

27 for parts identification.

be withdrawn when

Remove cap screws retaining

bearing housing

(

9-Fig

. 2

7); then, turning splined end of steering shaft counter-clockwise housing(9) and bearing

of ball nut and Shaft bearing ( 5'I6-inch diameter

force bearing

(

10) up and out

main gear housing.

10) contains fifteen loose steel balls

which are free to fall as the parts are

Fig. 27-Exploded

power

assist steering

1. !iteeringcolumn

2. Steering shaft

3. Housing seal

4. Bushing above

5. Shish peck

6. Valve housing

7. Check valve

6. Shim pack

9. Bear., housing

10. Bearing

I I. Piston ring

12. Bali at

13. Guide peg t4. nustseal

I5. Steering arm

16. Oil seal

17. over housing

Is. Wear pin

19. Backer shaft

20. Gasket

21. Spring

22. Float shim

23. Side cover

24. Pressure tube P. Piston

removed changeable in steering

Bearing balls are inter-

with the

28 steel balls used

nut (N-Fig. 30).

Working through side opening, care-

fully push ball nut (N), piston and associated parts out of main housing. Note that ball nut is prevented from turning

in housing by groove (G) which fits over guide peg (13). Be careful not to

damage piston rings

(

11) as piston is

withdrawn. Remove clamp bracket (B), transfer tube and the 28 bearing balls from

main nut.

Examine all parts

and make sure parts are

cleaned

Renew all seals

0-rings when unit

for wear

thoroughly

gaskets and

is disassembled, as

all parts are under system pressure. 0-

rings are

(13); and between

control valve

31. Carefully

end of housing

stalled from underside

of bushing

located

on piston guide peg

bushing sleeves in

housing as shown in Fig.

push bushings out top

Seal (3

must be in-

)

(chamfered) end

sleeve(4), using Special

Tool SW23/2 which applies pressure in

the groove between the two seal lips. Coat sealing 0-rings sparingly with a suitable lubricant and install carefully using Fig. 31 as a guide.

view of late

gear.

or scoring

Fig.

011

should be used as shown.Refe

parts

Fig. 30

gear.Refer to Fig

B. Clamp bracket aLocatinggroove

seal protector

identification except

Partially disassembled view of steering

except

27 for

for the following:

sleeve

for 0-ring seal (S):

parts

Assemble the steering gear as follows: Install piston rings hl-Fig. 30), if removed, and rotate rings until end gaps are 180° apart.; Align groove (G) with locating pin (13) and carefully install piston using a suitable ring compressor. Position bhll nut assembly so that rocker shaft arm slot is aligned with main housing side opening (Fig.

28) and install rocker shaft with spring (21) removed. Temporarily install main housing side cover (23-Fig. 27), using a new gasket (20) but omitting

end float shim (22) at this time. Install and tighten side cover retaining cap screws (35-45 Ft.-Lbs.); then using a dial indicator, measure and record rocker shaft end float. Remove side cover then reassemble; installing spring (21) and an end float shim (22) which most nearly equals measured end float minus 0.008. Shims (22) are available in thicknesses of 0.050,

(

SW 2311)

to Fig. 27 for

identification

N. Ball nut

R. Snap ring

Page 17

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs 37-39

Fig.

31-Control

bled, showing

3 Oil seal L. Lowersleove

4. Bushing sleeve M. Middle sleeve

6. valve housing S. 0-ring seal

valve housing partially

location of bushing

0-ring seals.

0.060, 0.070 and 0.080. Retighten side cover cap screws to 35-45 Ft.-Lbs.

Turn rocker shaft until ball nut and piston unit is at top of its stroke. Install worm shaft and lower half of transfer tube as shown in Fig. 32, then feed in the 28 bearing

balls using clean grease.

Install upper half of transfer tube and clamp bracket (B-Fig. 30).

Install bearing housing (9-Fig. 27)

and tighten retaining cap screws to a torque of 15-20 Ft.-Lbs. Slide lower race of bearing (10) into bearing housing bore, grooved side up, then

install the 15 steel balls in bearing

groove using clean grease.

Position Oil Seal Protecter Sleeve (SW 23/1) over shaft splines as shown in Fig. 33; then, omitting bearing ad-

justing shim pack (8-Fig. 27), install

control valve housing. Tap housing lightly into place until it bottoms and, using a feeler gage, measure the clearance between bearing housing and valve housing as shown in Fig. 33. Install a shim pack (8-Fig. 27) equal to the measured clearance minus 0.003. Shims (8) are available in thicknesses of 0.004, 0.005, 0.010 and 0.025. Shim pack must be accurate to within

0.0015. Shim pack (8) controls preload

of worm gear bearing (10).

With bearing pre-load correctly ad-

justed, assemble and install steering

column, upper steering shaft and bearing washer. Omit shim pack (5) on trial assembly. Make sure steering column is bottomed on steering shaft splines; then measure clearance between steering column flange and valve housing as shown in Fig. 34. Install shim pack (5-Fig 27) equal to the measured clearance PLUS 0.005.

Shim (5) is available in 0.005 thickness only. Tighten steering column stud nuts to a torque of 25-30 Ft.-Lbs. Complete the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure. Tighten ex-

disassem-

sleeves

and

32-With piston at top of

Fig.

(S) and lower halt

shaft

feed inthe 28 loose

Refer

stroke, install worm

of transfer tube (r), then

) using

balls

to text.

ternal feed line banjo bolts to 25-30 Ft.-

Lbs., steering arm nut to 200-250 Ft.Lbs. and Ft.-Lbs.

outlined

steering

Install steering gear unit as

in paragraph 35.

FLUID AND

wheel nut to 80-100

BLEEDING

All Models

CAUTION:

cleanliness of all parts Is of the utmost Importance In the operation and servicing of the hydraulic power steering system. Of equal Importance Is the avoidance of nicks or burrs on any of the working parts.

37. Recommended power steering fluid is Ford M-2C41A oil, Maintain fluid level to full mark on dipstick on early models with separate reservoir; or bottom of filler neck on late models with integral pump and reservoir. After each 600 hours of operation, it is recommended that filter element be changed and reservoir cleaned.

The power steering system is selfbleeding. When unit has been disassembled, refill reservoir to full level, start and idle engine, and refill if level lowers. Cycle steering gear by turning steering wheel at least five times from lock to lock, maintaining fluid level at or near full mark. System is fully bled when no more air bubbles appear in reservoir and fluid level ceases to lower.

38. SYSTEM PRESSURE AND FLOW. Power steering system pressure should be 850 psi for Model 4100 with linkage booster cylinder & valve unit; and 1100 psi for late Model 4100 with integral power assist gear unit.

NOTE

tors

initially adjusted to 1100 psi, but manufacturer recommended reducing the pressure to 850 psi when service was performed on unit.

The maintenance of absolute

On some early Model 4100 trac-

power steering system pressure was

clean

grease.

Fig. 33-Using protector

and bottom measure

shims

Fig.

steering shaft splines

ance

shims equal to measured clearance

valve

pack thickness as shown

shim

equal to measured clearance

34-

Make

sure steering column

for upper

sleeve(SW 23

housing without

shim

pack

then measure clear-

as shown.Install

1), install

shims;

then

Install

minus 0.003.

bottomed

0.005.

PLUS

Early models with separate steering system reservoir were equipped with a flow control valve which maintained a regulated fluid flow of 3.5 gpm at 1000 engine rpm. On late model pumps with integral reservoir, a flow control valve is not used and normal pump flow at

1000 engine rpm is 2.74 gpm.

On all models, pressure and flow can be checked by teeing into pump pressure line. On early models, pressure relief valve cap plug (7-Fig. 7) is externally located and pressure can be adjusted without disassembly. On late

models with integral pump reservoir, pump must be removed for relief valve adjustment, refer to paragraph 12.

HYDRAULIC PUMP

All Models

39. Except for relief valve pressure settings, power steering pumps are similar to those used on Models 2000 and 3000, and overhaul procedure is outlined in paragraph 12.

Page 18

Paragraphs 40-43

POWER CYLINDER AND

CONTROL VALVE

Early Model 4100

40. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. To remove the power cylinder and controt valve assembly, refer to Figs. 35 and 36, then proceed as follows:

Disconnect fluid lines (33 & 34 Fig. .45) from cylinder and allow fluid to drain. Disconnect drag link (35) from cylinder. Remove nut from front end of

piston rod and disconnect cylinder from steering gear arm. Then remove cylinder and valve assembly from tractor. To overhaul the unit, refer to paragraphs 41 through 44.

Reinstall power and valve assembly by reversing removal procedure. If removed, tighten cylinder rod bracket to front support cap screws to a torque of 200-250 Ft.Lbs. On later production units, tighten the connector Nylock nut (40-Fig. 36) to a torque of 80-100 Ft.-Lbs. Refill and bleed the system as outlined in paragraph 10.

I I. RENEW PISTON ROD SEALS. To renew the piston rod seals, refer to exploded view of the power cylinder and control valve unit in Fig. 37 and proceed as follows:

If not already removed, slide the in-

sulator (2) and rear anchor washer (3) from piston rod. Pry the scraper assembly (5) from end of cylinder and remove snap ring (6), washer (7), retainer (8), seal (9) and seal spreader (10).

Thoroughly clean and inspect the piston rod for scoring or burrs and inspect cylinder for any bore. If either

steering

damage in seal

are damaged

, the earn-

cylinder

Pig. 35

-Power

system tractor

steering linkage

fbr manual, In Fig' link (35)

tachesto steering instead of s

arm.

type cylinder rod mounting.

for

model

Froht

steering

21,

except that

Is shorter and

Refer to

4 Front support

15. Steering gear asey

7. Clamp

19. Steering

s6. Power steering reservoir

31. Pump In reservoir hypos l'.

32. Reservoir to pump line

33. Pressure line

34. Return line

35. Dreg link

36. Nut

37. Bracket

38. Powercylinder and control

teering gear

Fig. 36 for later

Diag link frontend

armi Rn.

valve assy.

plete assembly (11) must. be renewed; refer to paragraph 42 for installation procedure. Note: A new cylinder and piston rod assembly includes new seals and scraper.

Install new seal kit by reversing removal procedure. When installing seal (9), work lips of seal into cylinder with dull pointed tool. Drive scraper into cylinder after installing snap ring (6).

42. RENEW POWER CYLINDER UNIT. With power cylinder and control valve assembly removed from tractor as outlined in paragraph 40, proceed as follows:

Cap the openings in control valve

housing (27-Fig. 37) and thoroughly

clean outside of unit. Remove the four cap screws (48) and separate cylinder from control valve unit; be careful that valve housing (27) does not slide off of valve spool and lay the control valve and ball socket unit aside. Remove spacer (18), shims (17), spring (16) and outer ball seat (14). Slide the ball stud inward from rubber boot (4) and out open end of cylinder. Remove remaining ball seat (14), grease fitting (12) and pin (13) if pin remained with cylinder instead of staying in control valve housing. Clean and inspect the removed parts and renew any not suitable for further use.

To install the new power cylinder and reinstall removed parts, proceed as follows: Place boot (4) over cylinder so that hole in boot is aligned with ball stud hole. Insert one ball seat (14), then insert ball stud (15), threaded end first, into open end of cylinder and extend the threaded end out through hole in

steering

4100

axleand

is same as

shown

drag

cylinder

at-

Fig. 36-Views showing Installation power steering cylinder rod

The

above

37A. Bracket

39. cap 'crews Nyybock net

41. We her

parts may

duction tractors if desired.

be installed on

cylinder and boot. Insert second ball seat (14) and shims (17) that were re-

moved plus at least an additional two

0.010 thick shims. Insert spring housing (18) in end of cylinder, but do

not install spring (16) at this, time.

Assemble the cylinder to control valve unit and tighten the four cap screws (48) evenly. This should leave a gap

between end of cylinder dhd control valve housing; if not, remove control valve unit and spring housing from cylinder and add additional shims. Reas-

semble cylinder unit and spring

h iRing to control valve, then measure gap between cylinder and valve housing with feeler gage as shown in

Fig. 39. Record the gap measurement,

then remove control valve unit and

spring housing from cylinder and remove shim thickness equal to the gap measurement plus an additiorihl thickness of 0.008-0.010. Install remaining shims, spring housing and spring (16) in end of cylinder, then assemble control valve unit to cylinder with two new passage sealing "0" rings inserted in grooves of valve housing. tighten the four cap screws evenly and securely, then reinstall cylinder and valve as-

sembly on tractor as outlined in paragraph 40.

43. RENEW OR OVERHAUL

CONTROL VALVE. With power cyl-

inder and control valve unit removed

from tractor as outlined in paragraph

40, proceed as follows:

Thoroughly clean outside of unit and

remove the four cap screws (48-Fig.

FORD

latter

mounting bracket.

early pro-

42. Buffer pad

43. Connector

44. Washer

45. Castellated nut

46. Cotter pin

type

Page 19

2000

3000-4000

Fig. 38

spool

Valve

threaded end to facilitate

stalling

bolt has screwdriver

spool retaining nut.

Paragraph 44

LOTTED END OF BOLT!

RETAINING NUT `

ROC VALVE SPOOL

'0' RING

1NG

slot

removing and in-

Fig. 37-Exploded view

1. Front anchor washer

2. Insulators

3. Rear anchor washer

4. Rubber boot

5. Scraper

6. Snap ring

7. Washer

8. Retainer

9. Seal

I0. Seal spreader

12. Grease fittings

13. Dowels

and rod

Cylinder

rod assebly

ston&

of the

are

power cylinder and

serviced as a complete

14. Bell stud cup.

15. Ball stud

16. Spring

17. shim.(0.002&

0.010)

18Sp

19.

"o"

20.

"0" ring Check valve pi

21.

22.

Check valve bell

23.

24.

37). Separate the power cylinder from control valve and slide the valve

housing (27) from valve spool. Place the ball socket and valve spool unit upright in vise as shown in Fig. 38.

Remove cotter pin from valve spool bolt

(35-Fig. 37), hold bolt from turning with screwdriver and remove the castellated nut (23) and flat washer (24). Remove valve spool (28), washers (30), centering spring (31) and spacer disc (32) from bolt. Remove "0" ring (25) from valve housing and "0" ring (29) from valve spool. Remove check valve

pin (21) with a stiff wire, then remove check valve ball (22) from valve housing. Remove "0" ring (20) from valve pin.

Thoroughly clean and inspect the control valve parts. If either the spool or housing is damaged beyond further use, a new matched valve and valve housing must be installed.

Reassemble using all new "O" rings

as follows: Install "0" ring (20) on

check valve pin (21), drop ball (22) in

ring housing

ring

Castellated out

Washer

unit

(38-Fig.

control valve

unit (11) only

25. "0" ring

26. Tubingseats

27. Control valve 28, Control valve spool

29. "0" ring

30. Washers

31 Spring

32. S acing disc

33. Sleeve

34. Collar

35. Valve spool bolt

and

housing

cannot be

35).

disassembled.

hole in valve housing, lubricate "0" ring and insert pin, small end first, into hole. Place spacer disc (32), washers (30) and the centering spring (31) on

bolt. Place new "0" ring (29) in

spool

groove on rear end of valve spool and

place spool on bolt with small end inside washer and centering spring. Install flat washer (24) and nut (23), turn nut down tight (be sure valve spool enters second washer), then back nut off to first

castellation

taining cotter pin can be inserted. Be

sure

that the roll

pins

in each end of valve housing. Renew tubing

(26) in valve housing if

seats

necessary. Insert "0" ring (25) in groove in forward end of bore in valve housing, lubricate "0" rings and slide the valve housing over valve spool. Be sure pin in housing enters hole in spacer disc. Place new "0" rings (19) in grooves around oil passages in front end of control valve, then assemble valve and ball socket unit to power cylinder. Note: If a new control valve

Cylinder

tube,

36. Spring

37. Spacer

38. Ball stud cup

39. Bell stud

40. Ball stud cup

41. Cupholder

42. Retaining clip

43. Sleeve

44. Retaining in

45. Clamp

46. Rubber boot

47. Cover(cup)

48. Cap screws (4)

in which re-

(13) are in place

piston

Fig.

39-Method

shims

(17-Fig.

inder.Refer to text

housing and spool are being installed,

it may change requirements

thickness

Tighten the

evenly and securely. Reinstall power cylinder and control valve assembly as outlined in paragraph 40.

44. OVERHAUL BALL STUD ASSEMBLY trol valve spool

for determining

37) required for reassembly of cyl-

(

17); refer to paragraph 42. four retaining cap screws

thicknessof

for procedure.

ACTUATING

. With con-

(

28-Fig. 37

)

as outlined in paragraph 43 proceed as follows:

(

Remove boot

46) and pry lip of cup (47) from groove on rear end of outer sleeve

43). Using a punch

(

pin (44),Pry out retainer screw ball seat holder

(

42) and un-

(

41). Use a screwdriver to hold ball seat against spring (36) while removing ball stud

(39). Then, remove the seat

(

(37), spring

36), bolt

(

38), spacer

(

35) and collar (34) from inner sleeve, then separate inner and outer sleeves,

Clean and carefully inspect all parts

If there is considerable wear or dam-

age, the ball socket unit

through 47)

is available as a complete

(items 33

assembly.

for shim

removed

drive out

Page 20

Paragraphs 45-50

FORD

To reassemble, proceed as follows: Place clamp (45) on outer sleeve (43). Insert collar (34), bolt (35), spring (36), spacer (37), and ball seat (38) in inner sleeve and insert the assembly into

outer sleeve. Using a screwdriver to hold seat (38) against spring, insert ball stud (39) through large holes in sleeves. Insert ball seat (40) in holder (41), screw holder into inner sleeve

FRONT SYSTEM

(MODEL 4200)

45. Model 4200 Rowcrop tractors are equipped with a front pedestal adaptable to a wide adjustable front axle, a single front wheel or a dual wheel tri-

cycle type front end. All versions are equipped with a hydrostatic power

steering engine driven pump and separate fluid

reservoir steering unit steering cylinders mounted in the front pedestal.

Model 4200

46. R&R FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY. To remove the wide front axle assembly as a unit, proceed as fol-

lows: Straighten tabs of locking plate (7-Fig. 40) and remove the two cap screws retaining center steering arm (8) to steering shaft (34-Fig. 43). Support front of tractor, unbolt the front (4)

arl.nner pn,te

❑

'.I F

5. nt pivot b

]. Lo

system which

a Saginaw

and two

consists of an

Hydramotor

double acting

WIDE ADJUSTABLE FRONT

AXLE

wiung

t pnVn ,

rumber

o n

pivot

kinerer

k strip

acket

ront

etain

until tight, then back holder out approximately 5 turn and install new retainer (42). Drive pin (44) into hole

through rear end of outer sleeve and

install boot (46). Crimp edge of new end cap (47) into groove around outer sleeve. Reassemble control valve and housing onto bolt (35) as outlined in paragraph 43.

AND STEERING

and rear (16) pivot pin supports from front pedestal and roll the front axle and wheel assembly forward.

Reinstall front axle assembly by re-

versing removal procedure.

47. SPINDLE BUSHINGS. To renew the spindle bushing (24 and 26Fig. 40), proceed as follows: Support front of tractor and disconnect steering arms (21) from wheel spindles (28). Slide the wheel and spindle

(remove front wheels from hubs if desired for clearance) out of the front axle extension (25). Drive old bushings from front axle extensions and install new bushings with piloted drift or bushing driver. New bushings are final sized and should not require reaming if carefully installed. Renew thrust bearing (27) if worn or rough.

48. AXLE CENTER MEMBER, RADIUS ROD, PIVOT PINS AND BUSHINGS. To remove the axle center member (3-Fig. 40), support front of tractor, unbolt axle extensions

Fig. 40-Exploded view of model

4200

front axle assembly. Unit Is interchangeable with single front wheel spindle (Fig. 41) or dual wheel tricycle spindle (Fig.

the left

dle, steering

8. Center steering arm

9. Dust seal

16. Tie red inner and it. Lock nut

12. Thrust washers

13. Radios rod

14. Bushing

15. Retainer bolt

l6. hear pivot bracket

17. Roar pivot pin

8. Tic rod

In. oustseoi

20. Tie rod enter end 21 Steeringarm

22. waodrufTkey

23. Dust seal

24. Up er spindle bushing

25. Axle extension

26. Low er spindle bushing

27. Thrust bearing

28. Spindle

assemblies

wide adjustable

42) Note:

axle

extension, spin-

arm

are shown.

Only

and tie rod

from center member and swing the axle extension and wheel assemblies

aside. Remove retainer (1) and unbolt radius rod (13) from center member, then remove center member from pivot pin. Remove bushing (2) from center member.

With axle center member removed, radius rod can then be removed by removing bolt (15) and pin (17), then lowering radius rod from tractor. To remove radius rod with front axle in place, unbolt radius rod from center

member and unbolt rear pivot pin support (16) from front pedestal. Move the unit rearward until radius rod is free of

axle center member, then lower unit

from tractor. Remove bolt (15), pin (17) and support (16) from radius rod. Note: Be careful not to lose the thrust washers (12). Remove bushing (14) from radius rod.

To renew pivot pins and bushings, proceed as follows: Remove steering arm (8) from steering shaft (34-Fig.

43). Support front end of tractor so as to take weight from pivot pins and support front axle radius rod to keep unit from tipping. Remove retainers (1 and 6-Fig. 40) from front pivot pin and remove bolt (15) from rear pivot pin. Remove both pivot pins, raise tractor to

clear front axle and roll the unit forward. Remove bushings (2 and 14) and carefully install new bushings. Bushings are final sized and should not require reaming if not distorted during installation. Renew thrust washers (12) and pivot pins if worn and reassemble by reversing removal procedure.

49. DRAG LINKS AND TOE-IN. Drag link (10 and 20-Fig. 40) are of the non-adjustable automotive type and procedure for renewing same is evident.

Toe-in should be correct in each tread width adjustment when clamp bolt of drag link (18) is in proper notch

of outer end assembly (20). However, if toe-in is not V4 to t/z-inch, adjust as fol-

lows: Remove clamp bolt at outer end

and loosen lock nut at inner end of each tie-rod. Then, vary length of each tierod an equal amount to obtain correct toe-in when clamp bolts are installed. Retighten lock nuts and clamp bolts when adjustment is correct.

TRICYCLE FRONT SPINDLES

All Models So Equipped

50. Refer to Figs. 41 and 42 for exploded views of the single and dual front spindle assemblies. Either unit can be bolted to the steering shaft (34Fig. 43). Single wheel spindle must be installed with offset to left side of tractor as shown in Fig. 41 and dual

Page 21

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs 51-54

wheel spindle must be installed with

as shown in Fig. 42

knife edge to

front

so that proper caster will be obtained. Note: Be sure to deflate tire before attempting to disassemble the single wheel disc (38-Fig. 41) and flange

(39).

FRONT SUPPORT

Model 4200

51. R&R FRONT PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY. First, drain cooling system, then remove engine hood and radiator grille assembly. Disconnect radiator hoses and remove radiator from pedestal. Remove covers from top of pedestal and disconnect power steering

(17 and 18-Fig. 43) from mani-

lines

fold (39). Support front end of tractor

and remove wide front

as outlined in paragraph 52, or if a tri-

cycle model, unbolt and remove the spindle and wheel assembly from steering shaft. Attach a hoist to front

support, then unbolt and remove front support from engine cylinder block and oil pan. Note: Be careful not to lose or

damage shims, if any, located on front support to oil pan bolts.

52. Reinstall front pedestal by reversing removal procedure, then priming and refilling the power

steering system as outlined in paragraph 54. However, care should be

taken that the proper number (thick-

ness) of shims are installed between pedestal and oil pan when pedestal is being installed. The correct shimming procedure is as follows:

Check to be sure the oil pan to transmission bolts are tightened to a torque of 220-300 Ft.-Lbs. Attach pedestal to

engine

and tighten the four bolts to a torque of 200-240 Ft.-Lbs.; do not install the pedestal to oil pan bolts at this time. Using a feeler gage, determine clearance between pedestal and oil pan at the two bolting points, then install pedestal to oil pan bolts with this total

thickness of shims. Shims are available

in thicknesses of 0.014-0.015, 0.017-

0.018, 0.020-0.022, 0,023-0.025 and

0.026-0.028. Tighten the two pedestal to oil pan bolts to a torque of 200-240 Ft.-Lbs.

53. OVERHAUL PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY. With the pedestal removed from tractor as outlined in paragraph 51, proceed as follows:

Remove the nuts from power cyl-

inder rear end assemblies and bump

rear ends of cylinders from front sup-

port. Remove the cap screws (23-Fig.

43) clamping cylinder front end assemblies in steering shaft arm (22) and remove cylinder from arm. Unbolt

manifold (39) from pedestal and lift out manifold, lines and cylinders as a unit.

axle

assembly

Exploded view of tri-

Fig. 41 cycle spindle and wheel

Unit is Interchangeable on

model

front axle

and pedestal

30. spindle 31 Retainer

32. Bearing mne

33. Hearing cup

34. Wauler

35. Nut

36. Hub cap 38 Wheel disc

39. Wheel Range

Fig. 42-Exploded view of

wheel tricycle spindle

dual

and

wheel hub unit. Note that knife edge of spindle must be tractor.Unit is

able with wide adjustable front axle

30. Spindle

31. Retainer

32. Bearmgcone

33. 13euring cup

34. Washer

35. Nut

36. Hubcap

37. Huh

front wheel

single

wide

with

or dual

assembly.

towards front of

interchange.

or single front

wheel.

assembly.

ustable

front wheel

Refer to paragraph 65 for service information on the power cylinders.

Pry cap (25) from pedestal and re-

move cotter pin and castellated nut (26). Bump steering shaft (34) downward out of pedestal and lift out the upper bearing cone and roller assembly (27) and steering arm (22). Remove lower bearing cone and roller assembly (32) from steering shaft and remove bearing cups (28 and 31) and seals (29, 30 and 33) from the pedestal.

To reassemble, drive new bearing cups (28 and 31) into pedestal until firmly seated. Drive or press lower bearing cone and roller assembly (32) onto steering shaft until seated. Install lower seal (5.51 O.D.) (33) into pedestal with lip up. Install the 3.35 O.D. seal (30) with lip down and the 2.25 O.D. seal (29) with lip up. Pack the bearings with grease and while holding steering arm (22) in position, insert steering shaft up through pedestal. Insert upper cone and roller assembly (27) into cup and onto shaft and install nut (26).

Tighten nut so that all steering shaft end play is removed and bearings are slightly preloaded, then install cotter pin and cap (25). Reconnect steering cylinders to steering arm and pedestal and install manifold (39) to pedestal retaining cap screws- Reinstall pedestal as outlined in paragraph 52.

POWER STEERING SYSTEM

Model 4200

CAUTION: The maintenance

cleanliness of all parts importance in the operation and servicing of the hydraulic power steering system. Of equal Importance is the avoidance of nicks or burrs on any of the working parts.

54. FLUID AND BLEEDING. Recommended power steering fluid is Ford M-2C41A oil. Maintain fluid level to full mark on dipstick. After each 600 hours of operation, it is recommended that filter element be changed and reservoir cleaned.

of absolute

is of the utmost

Page 22

Paragraphs 55-59

FORD

The power steering system is self-

bleeding

When unit has been disassembled, refill reservoir to full level, start and idle engine

and refill if level

lowers. Cycle steering gear by turning

steering

al least five times at or near full mark

wheel fully in each direction

maintain fluid level

System is fully bled when no more air bubbles appear in reservoir

steering action is steady

and solid, and fluid level ceases to

lower.

55. SYSTEM PRESSURE AND

FLOW

The power steering pump assembly incorporates a pressure relief valve and a flow control valve. System relief pressure should be 1100 psi. All models are equipped with a flow con-

trol valve which maintains a regulated

flow of 3.5 gpm at 1000 engine rpm.

56. STEERING SYSTEM TROU-

BLESHOOTING

Refer to the fol-

lowing paragraphs for checking causes

of steering system malfunction:

HARD STEERING

Check column

hearings and bearings in Hydramotor

unit; renew if rough or damaged.

Check ring,

rotor and vanes for wear and renew the assembly if necessary. Check for sticking control valve spool or blocking spool in Hydramotor; clean valves or renew Hydramotor unit as required.

EXCESSIVE WHEEL DRIFT.

Check blocking spool spring and guide

assembly and renew if spring is broken.Check for leakage past blocking valve

;

if excessive, renew Hydramotor unit. Check seals on steering cylinder pistons and renew pistons and/or cylinder inner tubes as required.

STEERING WHEEL TURNING

UNAIDED.

Check the Hydramotor unit for sticking control valve spool, broken valve spool spring

acuator

Fig. 43-

Exploded view of

model

steering

cylinders.

18) lead to

4200

shaft

Fluid lines (17 and

Hydramotor"

Steering

17. Left turn nuid line IS. R, lit turn fluid line

19. Left turn need line

20. Right turn fluid line

21 Power 1,haden.

22. Steering arm

23. Clamp bolt,

24. Front pedestal

26. Cap

26. Castellated nut

27. Bearing cone

28. Bearingcuy

29. Grease sea

30. Grease seal

31. Bearing cone

33. Grease seal

34. Steering shaft

35. Drilled bolt

36. "0e rings

37. Right turn fluid line

38. Left turnnuid line

39. Manifold

shaft binding or torque shaft (inside

actuator shaft) broken. Clean spool and bore or renew Hydramotor unit as required.

STEERING WHEEL SLIPPAGE. Hydramotor control valve spool scored (renew Hydramotor unit) or rotor seals leaking (renew seals).

EXCESSIVE NOISE. Hydraulic lines vibrating against tractor frame or

broken control valve spool spring; insulate lines from tractor or renew Hydramotor unit if spring is broken.

ERRATIC MOVEMENT OF FRONT

WHEELS. Check Hydramotor ring, rotor or vanes for scoring, wear or binding condition; renew the ring and rotor assembly if necessary.

Fig. 44-View showing fluid line connections motor unit, reservoir and power

steering

(17 and 18)connect to

fold (39-Fig.

L Power steering pump

2. Fluid reservoir

3. Pump to reservoir by-pass line

4. Reservoir to pump suction line

5. Connector

6. Seal

7. "0" ring

8. Pump to Hydrometer pressure

lin

9. Hydramotor to reservoir return line

10. Pu me to Hydramotor rear I ins

11. Hydramotor to reservoirrear

him

12. Adapter connection

13, steering motor and support

unit

i 4. Right turn

5. Izn turn rear fluid Ime

16. Support hrarket 17_ lieght turn nand

ls. lIn. turn nand hne

Hydra-

pump.

mani-

43).

rear nuid line

Lines

pedestal,

and steering

unit.

WILL NOT STEER IN EITHER DIRECTION. The manual steer check ball between pump return and pressure

passages

in Hydramotor unit may not be seating. Disassemble unit and clean passage with solvent and dry with compressed air. Renew Hydramotor

unit if check ball cannot be made to seat.

FRONT WHEELS JERK OR TURN WITHOUT MOVING STEERING WHEEL. Check for sticking rotor vanes, rotor

ken, scored

ring, scored housing, in pressure plate leaking

springs out

pressure

of place or bro-

plate, scored rotor

ball check valves

, improper

assembly causing gap between rotor components.Disassemble

motor unit, carefully clean

all parts and

renew components or

the Hydra-

and inspect

complete Hydramotor unit if necessary.

57. R&R AND OVERHAUL PUMP. Except for relief valve pressure setting, pumps are similar to early

power steering pump used on Models 2000 and 3000, and overhaul procedures are outlined in paragraph 12.

58. HYDRAMOTOR STEERING UNIT. Refer to following paragraphs for information on removal, overhaul and reinstalling the Saginaw Hydramotor power steering unit. Refer to paragraph 56 for troubleshooting information.

59. R&R HYDRAMOTOR UNIT. To

remove the steering unit, first remove

fuel tank. Then, proceed as follows:

Unbolt and remove the steering

wheel and shaft assembly from fuel

Page 23

2000

3000-4000

tank and steering support. Disconnect the two cylinder lines and the pump pressure: and fluid return lines from steering motor (21-Fig. 45). Unbolt the bracket and motor (21), then remove bracket and motor from support

(18).

Reverse removal procedure to rein-

stall the steering motor unit "0" rings when reconnecting fluid

Before reinstalling

lines.

fuel tank, run engine on nurse tank to fill and bleed the power steering system as outlined in paragraph 54. After being sure no fluid leakage is occuring, reinstall fuel tank. CAUTION: The blocking, (reaction) valve adjuster (1-Fig. 48) must be irl position shown in Fig. 50 before

reinstalling fuel tank.

60. R&R BLOCKING SPOOL (REACTION) VALVE. The blocking spool valve and related parts can be removed

and reinstalled after the Hydramotor steering unit has been removed as outlined in paragraph 59. Refer to Fig. 48

and proceed as follows:

Remove the lockout adjuster nut (1).

Plug (3),and spool valve (4) may new be removed by pushing the plug into bore

against spring pressure with `screw-

driver t then quickly releasing the plug to alldw spring to pop it out of bore.

Remove plug- and, if Spool sticks in

bore, invert the unit and tap housing

(12) with soft faced mallet to jar spool

out. Invert unit and allow spring (5)

and spring and guide assembly (6) to

drop from bore.

Spool is not serviced separately from complete Hydramotor unit. Renew other parts as necessary, or install new Hydramotor unit if spool and/or spool bore in housing are not serviceable.

To reassemble, install parts in bore of housing (12) as shown in exploded view, renewing the "O" ring (2) on plug (3) and tightening adjuster nut to a torque of 10-15 Ft.-Lbs. Note: The ad-

juster (1) is not accessible after tractor

is fully assembled; thus, the adjuster must be in position shown in Fig. 50 when unit is being reinstalled.

61. R&R COVER RETAINING SNAP RING. To remove snap ring (7Fig. 46) used to retain cover (30) to housing (12), proceed as follows:

With unit removed from tractor as outlined in paragraph 59, check to set that end gap of snap ring is near hole ih cover as shown in Fig. 49; if not, bump snap ring into this position with hammer and punch. Insert a pin punch into hole and drive punch inward to dislodge snap ring from groove. Hold punch under snap ring and pry ring from cover with screwdriver. Usually, the coil spring (27-Fig. 46) will push housing from cover; if not, bump cover

using new

Fig. 45-Exploded view of steering

support and

bracket.

exploded

inaw Hydremotor

1. Steering wheel nut

2. Flat washer

3. Dust .eel

4. Bearing retaining ring

5 Washer

6. Spring

7. Beeringeeat

e. Bearing assembly

9. Steering eh.ftjacktt

10. Bearing assembly

11. Bearing seat

12. s

arer

13. Upper steering shaft

14. Universal joint assembly

15, luwerateeringshaft

16. Connecting flange

17. Special bolt

18. Fuel tank and steering motor support

19. steering motor cover

20. Steering motor bracket

21. Steering motor

Fig. 46-Exploded

Saginaw Hydramotor

steering unit

48 to 61

Figs.

Showing disassembly and

reassembly

1. Blocking valve adjuster

2. 0"ring

3. Plug

4. Blocking valve

5. Spring

6. Spring and guide assembly

7. Snap ring

8. Snapring

9. Dual seas

10. Oil said

11. Needle bearing

12. Housing

13. Dowel pine (2)

14. Actuator shaft assembly

15. Bearing support

16. 0" rin

17. Needle bearing

18. "0" ring

19. Rotoraealdng

20. Ring, rotor & vane easy.

21. Snap ring

22. Needle bearing

23. Pressure plate assembly

24. Check valve ball. (2)

25. Check valve springs (2)

26. Retaining

27. Pressure pl to spring

28. Back-up ring

30. Cover

31. capecrewa

shaft

motor mounting

Refer to

view ,of

unit (21).

Also refer

for photos

techniques.

lugs (2)

assembly,

Fig.

the Sag-

steering

Hydramotor)

(

view of the

Paragraphs 60-61

46 for

r-------1

25 31--^

14 26 A

I 29

Page 24

Paragraph 62

FORD

47-Pressure

Fig.

heads must

Fig. 40-Exploded view of Hydramotor

and blocking

can be removed

I Lockout

3 Plug - 12. 4 Blocking valve

plate retaining

be positioned as shown

stallation of cover.

components

valve

without disassembly

motor.

5. Spring

6. Spring & guide assy.

cap screw

Blocking valve

Housing

allow in-

housing

of Hydra-

loose by tapping around edge with mallet as shown in Fig. 50.

To reinstall the cover retaining snap

ring, housing must be held in cover

against pressure :Innl:ended that the unit be placed in

nn arbor press and the housing he pushed into cover with

shown in Fig. 5]. CAUTION: Do not

push against end of shaft Place snap ring over housing before placing unit in press. Carefully apply

force on housing with sleeve until

flange on housing is below snap ring groove in cover. Note that lug on housing must enter slot in cover. If

housing binds in cover, do not apply

heavy pressure

and bump cover loose with mallet as

shown in Fig. 50. When housing has

been pushed far enough into cover, in-

stall snap ring in groove with end gap

near hole in the cover as shown in Fig.

49.

from spring. It is rec-

a sleeve as

(14-Fig. 46).

remove unit from press

;

To remove cover retaining

Fig.49-

drive pin punch

Fig.

50-In event

not push mounting lugs

snap ring from

gage

cover from housing

on cover with soft

hole

through

pressure

coil

shown above.

in cover

groove.

plate spring

lap alternate

face

62. OVERHAUL HYDRAMOTOR STEERING UNIT. With the unit removed from tractor as outlined in paragraph 59 and the cover retaining snap ring removed as outlined in paragraph 61, proceed as follows:

Clamp flat portion of hydramotor

housing in a vise and remove cover (30

-Fig. 46) by pulling upward with a twisting motion. Remove the pressure

plate spring (27), then remove cap

screws (51) and lift off the pressure

plate (23) as shown in Fig. 52. Remove the dowel pins (Fig. 53), then remove

snap ring (21) from shaft (14) with suit-

able snap ring pliers and screwdriver;

discard the snap ring. Pull pump ring

and rotor assembly (20) up off of shaft as shown in Fig. 54. Tap outer end of shaft with soft faced mallet as shown in Fig. 55 until bearing support (15) can be removed, then carefully remove the actuator shaft assembly from housing as shown in Fig. 57. Note: As the actuator shaft and control valve spool assembly is a factory balanced unit and is not serviceable except by renewing

snap ring,

disen-

does

mallet as

Fig. 51-Using

housing

Into

cover retaining

Fig.

52-Lifting

sleeve and

cover

pressure

arbor press

allow installation

snap ring (7).

plate

pins (13).

(23) from

the complete Hydramotor steering unit, it is recommended that this unit not be disassembled.

Carefully clean and inspect the re-

moved units. Refer to paragraph 60 for

information on the blocking valve assembly. If the housing control valve bore or blocking valve bore are deeply scored or worn, or if the blocking valve spool or the actuator shaft and control

valve spool assembly are damaged in

any

making the unit unfit for fur-

way

ther service, a complete new Hydra-

motor steering unit must be installed. If these components (housing, blocking valve and actuator assembly) are serviceable, proceed with overhaul as follows:

Remove the check valve retainers (26-Fig. 46), springs (25) and check valve balls (24) from pressure plate (23) and blow passages clear with compressed air. Renew the pressure plate assembly if check valve seats or face of plate are deeply scored or damaged.

push

of the

dowel

Page 25

2000

Fig.

53-Removing

ring

and housing

(

21)retaining

3000-4000

dowel pins

Then

rotor to

remove

actuator

from motor

(13)

the snap

shaft(14).

ring

Tap on

Fig. 55

bump bearing

outer

support

actuator shaft (14) to

end of

(

15)

from

the housing (12).

Fig. 67-

Removing

from housing

valve

Paragraph

actuator shaft

the

Be careful

spoolln

not

bore

62 Cont.

to cock

of housing.

assembly

control

ring,

Fig. 54-Lilting assembly

the motor

20) from actuator shaft

(

housing (12).

rotor

Renew needle bearing (22), springs (25)

and/or check valve balls (24) if damaged and pressure plate is otherwise serviceable. Note: Drive or press on lettered (trademark) end of bearing cage when installing new needle bearing.

If bearing support (15) is otherwise serviceable, a new needle bearing (17) may be installed; drive or press only on lettered end of bearing cage.

Remove snap ring (8), dust seal (9) and oil seal (10) and inspect the needle bearing (11); renew needle bearing if worn or damaged. Press only on lettered (trademark) end of bearing cage when installing new bearing. Install oil seal with lip towards inside (needle bearing), then install dust seal and retaining snap ring.

If the rotor ring, rotor or vanes are worn, scored or damaged beyond further use, or if any of the vane springs are broken, renew the unit as a complete assembly (20). If unit was disassembled and is usable, reassemble as

and

(

14)

Fig. 56

tilting the

from bearing support

) (

17) is serviced

Groove

used

vane

and

ring (18

bearing

support ring (16-Fig.46).

follows: Place ring on flat surface and place rotor inside ring. Insert vanes

with rounded edges out in the rotor

slots aligned eter of ring,

turn the rotor 1/4-turn and

insert remaining vanes. springs behind the vanes driver as shown the assembly over and hook springs behind the vanes on opposite side of rotor.

To reassemble the Hydramotor unit, place housing seals and snap ring installed

with flat (bottom) sure that with

pin in actuator is engaged

hole in valve spool

pulled away from actuator as shown in Fig. 58, push the spool back into actuator and be sure one of the holes in spool. Then, lubri-

cate spool

and shaft and carefully insert the assembly into bore of housing. Place bearing support, with outside "0" ring and needle bearing installed,

(

19)

Teflon

rotor seal

separately

for support sealing "0"

(

G) is

Identical seals(18 and 19) are

in pressure plate.

and "G"

(

15). Needle

from bearing

with large inside diam-

Hook the

with

a screw-

in Fig. 60, then turn

(with needle

bearing,

) in a vise

side

up. Check to be

;

if spool can be

pin is engaged in

Fig. 58-Pin in actuator sleeve must be

In hole In end of control valve tuator

assembly

pulled out

is Installed.If

of sleeve,pin is

spool spool cannot be

engaged.

on shaft and carefully push the support

into housing as shown in Fig. 59. Insert rotor sealing "O" ring and rotor seal into bearing support. Place ring and rotor assembly on shaft and housing with chamfered

(away from housing

outer edge

of ring up

Install a new rotor retaining snap ring and insert the dowel pins through ring into housing.

stick the "0" ring

Using heavy grease

and rotor sealing ring into pressure plate, then install the pressure plate assembly over shaft, pump ring and rotor assembly and the two dowel pins. Install the two pressure plate retaining

cap screws to 96-120 In

off the

two cap screws 1/2 to % sure bolt head meter

of cover as shown in Fig. 47.

(

31-Fig

Lbs. of torque,

46), tighten them

then back

corners are within peri-

NOTE: A minimum torque of 10 In.Lbs. must remain on each cap screw

after

have been backed off. Place

they

the coil spring on top of pressure plate. Install new "0" ring and backup ring

engaged

before

turn. Be

ac-

Page 26

Paragraphs 63-65

10 11 1

FORD

EN---17

Fig. 59-When pushing bearing

housing

ring on

Fig.

60-Be sure

behind

the

place with screwdriver

Fig.61-" installed in outside(open side

careful not to damage the "O"

(

12), be

outside

groove of

all

rotor

cover(30);besure back

cover

vane

vanes.

ring

(

29) and back

)ofcover.Groove

retaining

Springs

support(15) into

support.

springs

can be

as shown.

-upring

ring.

snap

are engaged

pried into

29)

(

-upring Is to

G) is for

(

18 19

x"-17

Fig. 62

Exploded

mounting of the power cylinders in front pedestal

1. Snap ring

2. Washer

3. Outer seal 9 I've 16. f.ock out 20. Cylinder

4. Washer 10. Back

5. Washer 11. "O"ring assembly 22. Cylinderreerend

6. Back-up ring 12. Piston rod 17. Oust cover assembly

in second

view of a model

groove of

cover(See Fig. 61),

lubricate the rings and push cover down over the pressure plate and ring. While holding the cover on bly, place the unit in an arbor press and insert the- cover retaining snap ring as outlined in paragraph 61.

63. POWER CYLINDERS. Two double-acting power cylinders are located in front pedestal on Model 4200.

Refer to Fig. 43 for view showing cylinder location and to Fig. 62 for exploded view of the cylinder. Refer to following paragraphs for servicing information.

64. R&R POWER CYLINDERS.

Drain cooling system and grille and radiator

from front

Disconnect the power steering lines (17

and 18-Fig. 43). f;pm the manifold (39). Place a support under front end of tractor so that weight is taken from front wheels, attach a hoist to front pedestal, then unbolt pedestal from oil pan and engine and roll the front assembly forward. Remove any cover plates necessary to gain ders and disconnect lines (19, 20, 37 and 38) from cylinders. Remove the nuts retaining cylinder rear end assemblies in'each side of pedestal and remove the cap screws (23) clamping cylinder front ends

are

(22). Then, bump the cylinder ends out

of pedestal and the steering arm and

remove cylinders from pedestal.

4200

7. "0" ties

6. Snappring 14. Cylinder inner tube 19. Retaining plate up ring 16. Cylinder front end 21. Clamp

the assem-

remove hood,

pedestal.

access

to cylin-

in steering arm

power

steering cylinder.Refer

Plate(19) and snap ring (B) retain

(9) in

cyllnder.

13. Piston & seat stay

the removal procedure. Fill and bleed the power steering system as outlined

in paragraph 54.

DERS. With the cylinders removed as outlined in paragraph 64, refer to exploded view in Fig. 62 and proceed as follows:

cylinder front end assembly (16) from piston rod. Remove the screws retaining plate (19) to packing gland (9) and remove retaining plate. Push packing gland inward to expose snap ring (8), remove snap ring and bump the packing gland out of the cylinder with piston rod and piston. Remove cylinder inner tube (14) from cylinder or

piston as

(15)'and'piston (13) from inner end of piston rod and slide packing gland from rear end of rod. Remove snap ring (1),

washers

back-up ring (6) and "0" ring (7) from packing gland inside diameter and remove the back-up ring (10) and "0" ring (11) from outside groove on gland.

and/or the cylinder inner tube (14) if excessively worn or scored. Reassemble cylinder using new piston and seal assembly (13) and cylinder gland seal kit (includes items 1 through 11, except gland, which are not serviced separately). To reassemble, proceed' as fol-

lows:

to Fig

for view showing

packing gland

18. Clamp

To reinstall power cylinders, reverse

65. OVERHAUL POWER CYLIN-

Remove clamp (18) bolt and unscrew

case may be. Unscrew nut

(2, 4 and 5), outer seal (3),

Renew piston rod (12), gland (9)

Page 27

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs 66-69

Lubricate the piston rod and slide the seal kit components on rod from rear

1), large O

snap ring outer seal (3

snap ring

(

)

large O.D. washer

as 2), small O

6) and

ring

(

9) onto rear end of piston rod

(

gland over

the "0"

retaining snap ring

Install new piston and lock nut

gland

ENGINES

with scraper lip towards

D. washer

0" ring

ring

D. washer (2),

(

5), back-up

7). Slide the

(

etc., and install the

1) in front end of

(

4) (same

AND COMPONENTS

end in following order:

)

(

piston

R&R ENGINE WITH CLUTCH

All Models

66. To remove engine and clutch assembly, first remove the front axle, front support or pedestal, radiator and radiator shell assembly as outlined in paragraph 77 or 80. Then, proceed as follows:

Remove battery, battery tray and support brackets. If engine is to be disassembled, drain oil pan. Disconnect wiring from starting motor, generator,

ignition distributor or diesel thermo-

start unit,

and temperature

oil pressure

gage unit

sender switch

. Shut off fuel supply valve, remove fuel supply line and the

line. Disconnect

diesel excess

throttle linkage, choke

fuel return

wire or diesel stop wire and the proofmeter drive cable. On models with piston type hydraulic pump, remove panel from below left side of fuel tank,

from pump

disconnect hydraulic

lines

and remove pump from engine. Remove any engine

accessories as re-

quired for indicated engine overhaul, attach hoist to engine, then unbolt and remove engine and clutch assembly from transmission.

To reinstall engine, reverse removal procedure. Refer to Fig. 63 for engine to transmission bolt tightening torques. Bleed the diesel fuel system as outlined in paragraph 129 or 131, fill and bleed the power steering

system as in para-

graph 10, 37 or 54 and piston type hydraulic pump as outlined in paragraph

361.

ENGINE COMPRESSION

PRESSURES

All Models

67. The Ford Motor Company recommends that compression pressures be checked only at cranking speeds. Non-

on piston rod. Install new back-up ring (10) and "0" ring (11) on gland, slide

the cylinder inner tube (14) over piston

and rear (inner) end of gland, then insert the assembly into cylinder outer tube (20) and retain with snap ring (8). Install retainer plate (19) and tighten the three plates to gland screws securely. Install new cylinder end assemblies (16 and/or 22) if required and reinstall cylinder(s) in pedestal as outlined in paragraph 64.

63-When

Fig, housing

drawing

3. 220-300 Ft: Lbs. 4. 220

2. 125-140 Ft

3. 35-50 Ft-Lbs. iron

(engines with stamped steel oil pan)

reinstalling engine to

tighten bolts

following torque specifications:

to the

Lbs. (engines with cast

shown at locations in

transmission

-300 Ft-Lbs.

oil pans)

diesel engine compression pressures should be checked with all spark plugs removed, the throttle in wide open position and with the choke knob in. Note: Insufficient cranking speed can cause low compression pressure read-

For this reason, the battery

ings.

should be well charged and the starting system functioning properly to

assure a

cranking speed of 150 to 200 RPM.

The following table gives compres-

sion pressure

ranges and maximum allowable cylinder-to-cylinder variation for a cranking speed of approximately 200 RPM:

Non-Diesel Engines:

Compression Pressure

Range ................ 115-150 psi

Max. Allowable Variation ..... 25 psi

Diesel Engines:

Compression Pressure

Range ................ 420-510 psi

Max. Allowable Variation ..... 50 psi

R&R CYLINDER HEAD

All Models

68. To remove cylinder head, proceed

as follows: Remove vertical exhaus, muffler, if so equipped, and remove thi engine hood. On models with hori

zontal exhaust system, disconnect ex-

haust pipe from exhaust manifold.

Remove the exhaust manifold, battery, battery tray and the battery support

brackets. Drain cooling system and

remove the upper radiator hose.

On diesel models, disconnect the air intake hose from intake manifold, shut off the fuel supply valve and remove the fuel filter assembly from intake manifold. Remove the fuel injectors as outlined in paragraph 149. Remove the intake manifold.

On gasoline models, Shut off fuel supply valve, disconnect the air inlet hose, fuel line and throttle rod from carburetor, disconnect the vacuum line from intake manifold and distributor and remove the intake manifold and carburetor as a unit. Remove the spark plugs.

Disconnect ventilation tube from rocker arm cover and remove rocker arm cover, rocker arms assembly and push rods. Remove remaining cylinder head bolts and remove cylinder head from engine block.

has occured, check cylinder head and

block mating surfaces for flatness. Maximum allowable deviation from flatness is

0.006 overall or 0.003 In any six Inches. If cylinder head is not within flatness specified or is rough remachined.If the cylinder block is not within flatness specified chined providing the distance between top of pistons at top dead center and top

surface of cylinder block is not less than

0.002 after machining. Also, install cylinder head to block without gasket rocker arm supports, washers and all

head bolts finger tight. Then using feeler gage

side of bolt heads and cylinder head or rocker arm supports. If clearance is 0.010 or more block with a %-Inch

head gaskets have been used. On tractors built before mid 1969, the head gasket has a compressed thickness of

0.029. Later gaskets have a compressed thickness of 0.037. Because of construction differences, the earlier gasket should not be used on later engines.

NOTE

If cylinder head gasket failure

the surface may be lightly

it may be ma-

measure clearance between under-

cut threads of bolt hole deeper In

13 UNC-2A tap.

69. Two different thickness cylinder

install

Page 28

Paragraphs 70-73

FORD

U7) 4

1, o) CJ (c^ I7

'e Na

Fig.

64-Drawing

tightening

When reassembling, do not use gasket sealer or compound and be sure that gasket is properly positioned on the two dowel pins. Using the sequence in Fig. 64, tighten cylinder head bolts in three steps as follows:

First Step ............. 50-60 Ft.-Lbs.

Second Step ........... 80-90 Ft.-Lbs.

Final Step .......... 105-115 Ft.-Lbs.

Note: Torque values given are for

Iuhricated threads; tighten cylinder

head bolts only when engine is cold.

Adjust valve gap as indicated in para-

graph 72. Complete the reassembly of

engine by reversing disassembly proce-

(lure. Tighten the intake manifold bolts to a torque of 23-28 Ft.-Lbs. the exhaust manifold bolts to a torque of 2530 Ft.-Lbs. With reassembly complete, bleed the diesel fuel system as outlined in paragraph 129 or 131, start engine and bring to normal operating temperature. With engine running at slow idle speed, readjust valve gap to 0.015 on intake valves and 0.018 on exhaust valves. The cylinder head bolts should be retorqued and the valve gap read-

justed after 50 hours of operation.

VALVES,

All Models

70. Exhaust valves are equipped

with positive type rotators and an "0"

ring type seal is used between valve stein and rotator body. Intake valve

stems are fitted with umbrella type oil seals. Both the intake and exhaust valves seat on renewable type valve seat inserts that are a shrink fit in cylinder head. oversizes of 0.010, 0.020 and 0.030 as well as standard size.

Intake and exhaust valve face angle is 44 degrees and valve seat angle is 45 degrees resulting in a 1 degree interference angle. Renew valve less than 1/32-inch after valve is re-

faced. Desired valve seat width is

0.080-0.102 for intake valves and

0.084-0.106 for exhaust valves. Seats can he narrowed and centered by using 30 and 60 degree stones. Total seat runout should not exceed 0.0015.

showing cylinder

sequence

for three cylinder engines.

STEM SEALS AND

SEATS

Inserts

are available in

if margin is

head bolt

Fig.

66-Valve tegral head. Reamers in 0.003,

0.015 and 0.

available

SW-502)

guidestofit oversize valve

stems.

Desired stem to guide clearance is

0.001-0.0024 for intake valves and

0.002-0.0034 for exhaust valves. New (standard) stem diameter is 0.3711-

0.3718 for intake valves and 0.3701-

0.3708 for exhaust valves. Valves with

0.003, 0.015 and 0.030 oversize stems are available as well as reamers (Nuday tool No. SW502) for enlarging valve guide bore to 0.003, 0.015 or

0.030 oversize.

NOTE:Although valves for gasoline and diesel engines are dimensionally the same,exhaust valve material Is different. For this reason,gasoline and diesel exhaust valves should not be Interchanged. Exhaust valves for gasoline engines may be Identified by an 0 sion In center of top face of valve head whereas exhaust valves for diesel engines have a flattop face on valve head.

guides

with

the

cylinder

030 oversize are

(Nuday tool No.

for repairing worn

Refer to

text.

are in-

18 diameter depres-

VALVE GUIDES AND SPRINGS

All Models

71. Intake and exhaust valve guides

are an integral part of the cylinder

head and are non-renewable. Standard valve guide diameter is 0.3728-0.3735.

Valve guides may be reamed to 0.003,

0.015 or 0.030 oversize and valves with

oversize stems guide clearance is excessive

stem to guide for intake

exhaust valves

reamer kit (Nuday tool No. SW502 as shown in Fig.

Intake and exhaust valve springs are

interchangeable. Valve spring free length should be 2.15 inches. Springs should exert a force of 61 to 69 pounds when compressed to a length of 1.74

inches, and a force of 125-139 pounds

when compressed to a length of 1.32

inches. Valve springs should also be

installed if stem to

clearance

valves

and 0.002-0.0034 for

. A valve stem guide

66) is available.

. Desired

is 0.001-0.0024

checked for squareness by setting spring on flat surface and checking with a square; renew spring if clearance between top end of spring and square is more than 1/16-inch with bottom end of spring against square. Also, renew any spring showing signs

of rust or erosion.

ADJUSTMENT

All Models

72. TAPPET GAP ADJUST-

MENT

tappet gap adjustment is 0.017 for intake valves and 0.021 for exhaust. Recommended setting at operating temperature is 0.015 for intake valves and

0.018 for exhaust valves.

using the two-position method and Figs. 67 and 68 as a guide, proceed as follows: Turn crankshaft until "TDC" flywheel timing mark is aligned with timing pointer, then check the two front (No. 1 Cylinder) rocker arms. If rocker arms are loose, No. 1 cylinder is on compression stroke; adjust the valves shown in Fig. 67. If front rocker arms are tight, No. 1 cylinder is on exhaust stroke; adjust valves shown in Fig. 68. In either event, complete the adjustment by turning the crankshaft

one complete revolution and using the

appropriate alternate diagram.

All Models

require no maintenance, but each exhaust valve should be observed while engine is running to be sure the valve rotates slightly. Renew the rotator on any exhaust valve that fails to turn.

. Recommended initial (cold)

Valves can be statically adjusted

EXHAUST VALVE ROTATORS

73. The positive type valve rotators

Page 29

2000-3000-4000

Paragraphs 74-76

I E I E I E

timing mark aligned and No. 1

67-With

TDC

I E I E I E

68-With

TDC

compression

timing mark again aligns and refer

TDC timing mark

crankshaft one complete

Turn

to Fig. 68.

adjusted

adjust the four

stroke

aligned and

the two Indicated

Refer

also

to Fig. 67.

Fig.

piston

Indicated valves

turn until

Fig.

piston on exhaust stroke

valves may

VALVE TAPPETS

(CAM FOLLOWERS)

Gasoline Engines

74. The tappets used in gasoline en-

gines are fabricated cylindrical or cast

of furnace

webbed cylindrical

type

hardened iron. Desired tappet to bore

clearance for fabricated tappets is

0.0006-0.0021. Desired clearance for cast tappets is 0.0005-0.0023. Tappet bore diameter is 0.990-0.991. Tappets may be removed from above with magnet after removing cylinder head as outlined in paragraph 68.

Diesel Engines

75. On early production diesel engines, barrel type tappets were used; late production engines are equipped

with semi-mushroom type tappets.

Refer to Fig. 71. Tappet bore diameter

in cylinder block is 0.990-0.991. Tappet diameter is 0.9887-0.9895; desired tappet to bore clearance is 0.0005-

0.0023.

The early barrel type tappets can be removed from above with a magnet after removing cylinder head as outlined in paragraph 68. To remove the late semi-mushroom type tappets, first

No. 1

4 PUSH ROD

Fig. 71

and current

vious

push rods,

shafts for

tappets

types of

cam-

and

diesel engines.

showing pre-

-Views

PREVIOUS TYPE

remove camshaft as outlined in paragraph 87.

Lobe width on camshaft used with

early barrel type tappets is 0.545-

0.575; if renewing early camshaft with later type having lobe width of 0.825-

0.855, the late semi-mushroom type tappets and longer push rods should also be installed. Early type barrel tappets require push rods of 10.63-

10.67 inches in length; push rods used with the late semi-mushroom type tappets are 12.15-12.19 inches long.

ROCKER ARMS

All Models

76. To remove rocker arms, lift hood, swing battery tray out, remove rocker arm cover and unscrew, but do not remove, the four cylinder head bolts that retain rocker arm assembly to cylinder head. Lift out the rocker arm assembly and head bolts as a unit.

To disassemble, withdraw the cylinder head bolts. Rocker arm to shaft clearance should be 0.002-0.004: Shaft diameter is 1.000-1.001; rocker arm inside diameter is 1.003-1.004. Renew rocker arm if clearance is excessive or

1 8 N

2 4 5 6 4

Fig. 72-Exploded arm

supports

N. Notch 3. Rocker arm supports

1. Cylinder head bolts 4. Rocker arm,

view of rocker

Notch(N) in

2. Flat washers

arm assembly

end of shaft must

note in text

Cylinder head

be Installed upward and to front of engine

concerning

FRONT

TAPPET -

+- CAMSHAFT -

CURRENT TYPE

if valve contact pad is worn more than

0.002. Torque required to turn valve adjustment screw in rocker arm should be 9 to 26 Ft.-Lbs.; renew rocker arm and/or screw if torque required to turn screw is less than 9 Ft.-Lbs.

When reassembling, be sure notch

(N-Fig. 72) in one end of rocker arm shaft is up and towards front end of engine; this will correctly place the

rocker arm oiling holes. Back each

rocker arm adjusting screw out two

turns, then tighten all retaining bolts

evenly until valve springs are com-

pressed and rocker arm supports are

snug against the cylinder head; then,

tighten all bolts to a torque of 95-105

Ft.-Lbs.

NOTE two thin hardened washers under the valve rocker arm shaft support bolt heads Instead of the simple 0.16-0 washer(2-Fig. 72

Ford Tractor Parts Catalog for this location. When one of these engines is serviced

bling, that either the correct washer is in-

stalled or both the thinner washers are

reinstalled.

A few engines were built with

which Is listed In the

)

it is very Important when reassem-

bolts(1) are used to

washers (2).

5. Adjustingacrewe

6. Springs 8. Shaftendplugs

7. Spacer 9

retain the

Rocker arm shaft

17 thick

rocker

Refer to

Page 30

Paragraphs 77-80

FORD

After rocker arm

adjust valve clearance intake valves and 0 valves.

and bring

engine is assembled, start

After

to normal operating temper-

ature and adjust valve

shaft is installed,

cold, to 0.017 on

021 on exhaust

clearance as

outlined in paragraph 72.

Reinstall rocker arm cover with new gasket and tighten retaining bolts to a torque of 10-12 Ft.-Lbs.

R&R TIMING GEAR COVER

Models 2100, 2110

, 3100, 4110 &

4140SU

77. To remove timing gear cover, remove hood, drain cooling system and disconnect radiator and front mounted air cleaner hose. On models with trans-

mission oil cooler, remove grille and disconnect cooler tubes from radiator lower tank. Disconnect battery ground

Fig. 73-View of timing gear cover and Installation engines is used instead

steering

r 2. Gask t^

cable and headlight wires. Unbolt radiator shell upper support bracket from shell. Support front end of tractor under front of transmission housing. Disconnect drag links from spindle arms and unbolt radius rods from axle. Support front ends of radius rods and drag links on power steering models.

Drive wedges between front support and axle, then unbolt front support from engine and roll the front assembly away from tractor.

78. With radiator and front support removed, proceed as follows: Remove gasoline engine fuel pump, fuel pump push rod and on all models, remove fan belt and generator front mounting bolt. Disconnect non-diesel governor linkage. Drain and remove engine oil pan. Remove cap screw and washers

from front end of crankshaft. Using suitable pullers and shaft protector,

lash can be checked

dial indicator or with feeler

gage as check

FUEL PUMP

DRIVE SHAFT

engine front

On non-diesel

governor assembly

On models without

holeinengine

Fig. 74-

plate

front

3. I'ming gear cover 4 Gasket

5. Engine front. plate

5. Gasket ], a g

8. Cove' plate

9. Dowel in

to. Oil gallery plug

Timing

shown

backlash

points around the gear.

of plate (1).

power

8) covers

(

plate (5).

gear back-

Be sure

at several

plate

with

Fig.

75-Camshaft

removed from front end of cylinder

for

bushing

I. Retainer bolt

2. Adapter shaft

drive gear and adapter

(3) is

not available

gear

remove the crankshaft pulley. Then, unbolt and remove the timing gear cover along with non-diesel governor cover and lever assembly or diesel fuel injection pump drive gear cover.

With timing gear cover removed, the crankshaft front oil seal and dust seal can be renewed as outlined in paragraph 97.

To reinstall timing gear cover, reverse removal procedure. Tighten timing gear cover retaining cap screws to a torque of 13-18 Ft.-Lbs. Tighten crankshaft pulley retaining cap screw to a torque of 130-145 Ft.-Lbs. Install oil pan as outlined in paragraph 101 or

102.

79. Reattach front axle and radiator assembly to engine and tighten the retaining bolts to a torque of 200-240 Ft.-Lbs. Tighten radius rod foot bolts to a torque of 130-160 Ft.-Lbs.

Models 4100 and 4200

80. To remove the timing gear cover, remove engine hood, drain cooling system and disconnect radiator and air cleaner hoses. On model 4100, disconnect battery ground strap and the headlight wires. On models so equipped, remove grille and disconnect transmission oil cooler tubes from radiator lower tank.

On model 4200, disconnect power steering fluid lines at manifold in front pedestal. On model 4100, disconnect steering drag link from left spindle arm and unbolt power steering cylinder bracket from front support on models so equipped.

Adequately support front unit with chain and hoist and support tractor under front end of transmission

housing. Unbolt pedestal or front axle support from engine and move unit away from tractor.

With the front unit removed, refer to paragraph 78 for removal and installation procedure for timing gear cover. With timing gear cover reinstalled, reverse removal procedure for reinstalling model 4100 front axle support and tighten the retaining support to

block.

separately.

3. Camshaft drive gear

shaft

The

Page 31

2000

3000-4000

Fig. 76-View

marks on

camshaft

gear and distributor

drive drivegear

Identic

alon

showing

crankshaft gear,

camshaft

gear

marks

timing

;

diesel

engines.

timing

are

Paragraphs 81-87

marks; small burrs can be removed with fine carborundum stone.

To reinstall the camshaft drive gear, turn crankshaft so that No. 1 piston is at top dead center on compression stroke and turn camshaft and fuel injection pump drive gear or distrib-

utor drive gear so that timing marks point to center of camshaft drive gear location. Place the camshaft drive gear within the other three gears so that all timing marks are aligned as shown in Fig. 76, then install the adapter (shaft) and tighten the self-locking cap screw to a torque of 100-105 Ft:-Lbs.

Fig. 77-Drawing

to camshaft

gear diesel

engines

1. Cap screw 5. Cap screws(2)

2. Inckwaeher 6. Thrust plate

3. Flat washer (diesel) 7. Spacer

3A. Eccentric Shaft 9. Camshaft

4. Camshaft gear 10. Woodruff key

showing

; fuel pump eccentric (3A) is

on gasoline engines.

assembly

(

Fiat

washer

3) is used on

engine bolts to a torque of 200-240 Ft.Lbs., drag link nut to a torque of 55-65 Ft.-Lbs. and the power steering cylinder bracket bolts to a torque of 200250 Ft.-Lbs. On model 4200, refer to paragraph 52 for shimming procedure when reinstalling front pedestal.

TIMING GEARS

All Models

81. Before removing any gears in the

timing gear train, first remove rocker

arms assembly to avoid the possibility

of camshaft

used

of damage to piston or valve train if either the camshaft or crankshaft

should be turned independently of the other.

The timing gear train consists of the crankshaft gear, camshaft gear, injection pump drive gear or distributor drive gear and a camshaft drive gear (idler gear) connecting the other three

of the train. Refer to Fig. 76.

gears

Timing gear

crankshaft

, or between camshaft drive gear

gear

and camshaft

0.006 on gasoline

0.009 on diesel engines.

backlash between

gear and camshaft drive

'llhould be 0.001-

gear

engines and 0.001-

Backlash between camshaft drive gear injection pump drive gear or distributordrive

gear should

If backlash is hot within

limits,

renew the camshaft drive gear,

be-0.001-0.012.

recommended

camshaft drive gear shaft and/or any other gears concerned.

83. CAMSHAFT' DRIVE GEAR AND SHAFT. To remove; unscrew the self locking cap screw and remove the camshaft drivpgear and shaft

(adapter) from front face of cylinder block. Renew shaft and/or gear if bushing to shaft clearance

is excessive,

or if gearing surfaces are scored. In-

spect gear

teeth for wear or score

and fuel

84. CAMSHAFT GEAR. To remove , retngye cap screw (1

the camshaft

gear

-Fig. 77), lockwasher (2) and washer (3) on diesel models or fuel pump eccentric (3A) on gasoline models; then, pull gear from shaft. Gear should be a hand push fit on shaft. With gear removed,

inspect drive key (10), thrust plate (6) and spacer (7) and renew if damaged in any way.

To reinstall gear, first install spacer, thrust plate and drive key, then install gear, washer or gasoline fuel pump eccentric, lock washer and gear retaining cap screw, Tighten the cap screw to a torque of 40-45 Ft.-Lbs.

85. CRANKSHAFT GEAR. If not

removed with timing gear cover and

seal assembly

, slide the spacer (5-Fig.

78) from crankshaft; then, using remover-replacer (Nuday tool No. SW-

501) and insert (Nuday tool No. SW501-1) or equivalenttool, pull gear from crankshaft. Inspect the gear and crankshaft pulley drive key (3) and

renew if damaged

To reinstall

in any way.

gear,

first drive the key

(3) into crankshaft keyway until fully seated, then install the gear with timing mark outward using removerreplacer tools as used in removal procedure, or push gear onto shaft with bolt threaded into front end of crankshaft

and using nut, large washer and a sleeve.

86. FUEL INJECTION PUMP OR

DISTRIBUTOR DRIVE GEAR. For diesel models, refer to paragraph 157.

On gasoline models,

refer to paragraph

167 for information concerning distributor drive unit and governor.

1. Capscrew

2. Flat washer

3. Drive key

4. Crankshaft pulley

5. Spacer

6. Dust seal

7. Oil seal.

8. Oil clinger

9. Crankshaft gear

12. Crankshaft

Fig.

76-Crankshaft

staliqtlon is shown for all models.Dust teal

5041 (7) are pressed groin ,gear cover

side and ride

production tractors;

late

on on

early

units, dust seal

oil seal

ride on

pulley hub.

(6)

on spacer (5)

crankshaft

gear

and pit

into

from In-

and

in-

CAMSHAFT AND BEARINGS

All Models

87. To remove camshaft, first remove engine as outlined in paragraph 66 and timing gear cover as outlined in paragraph 78. On gasoline engines and on diesel engines with early barrel type tappets, remove cylinder head as in

paragraph 68, then lift tappets (cam

followers) from openings in top of cyl-

inder block with a magnet. On diesel

Page 32

Paragraph

Fig. 80-Exploded view drawing of camshaft,

controlled by thrust plate (6).

camshaft

3A. Fuel pump eccentric

journals.

1. Cap'crew 5.

2 Lockwaeher

3. Flat washer 7. Spacer 11

4 Camshaft gear

87 Cont.

used on

gasoline models.

camshaft

diesel

Washer (3) Is

Renewablecamshaft

Cap screws(2) 9. Camshaft

6. Thruetplate 10. Woodrufrkey

8. Camshaft bearing 12. Hydraulic lift pump

gear and hydraulic pump drive

bearings (8) are

models;

fuel pump

. Dowel pin

drive gear

engines with late semi-mushroom type Using a feeler gage or dial indicator,

tappets, remove rocker arm assembly measure camshaft end play. Desired and push rods, then invert engine as- end play is 0.001-0.007. If end sembly to allow cam followers to fall excessive, renew thrust plate during away from camshaft. Note: On diesel

engines, measure push rods before

removing cylinder head; if push rods are approximately 10'/2 inches long,

engine is equipped with early barrel

type

tappets. If diesel engine push rods

are approximately 12 5/32 inches long,

engine is equipped

with

semi-mush-

room type tappets. Remove clutch, flywheel

and engine rear plate

the hydraulic pump drive from rear end of cylinder block ( not equipped

with piston

and push the camshaft rear cover plate from cylinder

block with punch (Fig.

Remove

gear cover

models

type pump)

Fig.

81-Camshaft

plate can be

punch

after

wheel

rear engine

hydraulic pump.

removed with a

removing fly-

81). Remove the oil filter and oil pump drive gear (Fig. 95); on diesel engine, the oil pump drive shaft should be removed with gear on engine inverted in stand.

Fig. 79

remover-replacer tool No.SW501

crankshaft gear

gear

tector(SP)

threaded shaft Is

Into end

nut (N7

used in

rear

plate and

Using special

nut (N2)and shaft pro-

of crankshaft and

)

is turned to push

gearontoshaft.

cylinder block for all

eccentric (3A) Is used

13. Cuscrew

14. "0

15. Hydraulic pump

cover

(Nuday

)

remove

To install

are removed,

screwed

End play

gear

m(early)

drive gear cover

play

FORb

reassembly. Remove the cap screw (1Fig. 80), lock washer (2) and flat washer (3) (diesel models) or the fuel pump eccentric (3A) (gasoline models) and pull the camshaft gear from shaft. Remove the Woodruff key (10); thrust plate (6) and spacer (7). Withdraw

camshaft and hydraulic pump drive

gear from rear of cylinder block, then

remove pump drive gear if necessary.

The camshaft is supported in four bushing type bearings. Check camshaft and bearings against.the following values:

Camshaft journal

diameter Desired journal

clearance

Camshaft end play ....... 0.001-0.007

If excessive bearing wear is indicated, the bearings can be removed and new bearings installed with bearing driver (Nuday tool No. SW 506) and handle (Nuday tool No. N6261-A) or equivalent tools. Note: It will be necessary to invert engine and remove oil pan to remove and ihistall bearings. Pay particular attention that the oil holes in bearings are aligned with the

oil passages in cylinder block. New bearings are pre-sized and should not require reaming if carefully installed.

Reinstall camshaft by reversing removal procedure. Tighten the hydraulic pump drive gear retaining cap

screw to a torque of 40-45 Ft.-Lbs., tighten thrust plate cap screws to a torque of 12-15 Ft.-Lbs. and tighten the camshaft gear retaining cap screw to a torque of 40-45 Ft.-Lbs. Place hydraulic drive gear cover "0" ring (models prior 8-67) in groove in cylinder block, lubricate the "0" ring and push cover into place as shown in Fig.

83. Note: Be sure that camshaft gear is timed as shown in Fig. 76.

........... 2.3895-2.3905

to bearing

..............0.001-0.003

Page 33

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs 88-91

Fig.82-

View showing

and installing bearings are installed

Fig. 83-Installing the hydraulic pump drive

cover plate

CONNECTING

ROD AND CAP

Fig. 84

of piston to connecting rod;

necting numbers facing either

stalled with notch or number

oil holes In

15-Fig

(

NUMNENS

View showing recommended

rod can be Installed

camshaft

longer

special

bearings

with

cylinder

80). Note

used.

way.Piston must be In-

gine.

for removing

tool

Be sure that

oil holes aligned

block.

0" ring is no

: "

NOTCH ON e,'

NuMUtR oN

PINT 9

however, con-

on crankshaft with

to the

front of

with

gear

assembly

en-

-diesel

showing

(gaso-

pistons.

85-Views

Fig.

proper Installation of piston

rings on non

tine) and diesel

CONNECTING ROD AND

PISTON UNITS

All Models

88. Connecting rod and piston units

are removed from above after removing

the cylinder head and oil pan. Be sure

to remove top ridge from cylinder bores before attempting to withdraw the as-

semblies.

Connecting rod and bearing cap are numbered to correspond to their respective cylinder bores. When renewing the connecting rod, be sure to stamp the cylinder number on new rod

and cap.

When reassembling, it is important that the identification number or notch

in top face of piston is towards the front

end of engine. It is standard practice to

assemble connecting rod to piston with

cylinder numbers to right side of en-

gine (away from camshaft); however, the rod is symmetrical and rod can be installed with numbers in either direction (away from or towards camshaft) without affecting performance or durability of engine.

When installing connecting rod cap, be sure that bearing liner tangs, and the cylinder identification number, of rod and cap are towards same side of engine. Tighten the connecting rod

nuts to a torque of 60-65 Ft.-Lbs.

PISTON RINGS

Non-Diesel Engines

89. Each cam ground piston is fitted

with two compression rings and one oil

control ring. Top compression ring and oil control ring are chrome plated. Top compression ring is barrel face type and must be installed with identifica-

tion mark up. Second compression ring

has straight face with inner bevel and

must be installed with groove on inside diameter up. The oil control ring and oil ring expander may be installed either side up,

Piston ring sets are available in

oversizes of 0.020, 0.030 and 0.040 as

well as standard size. The standard size

rings are to be used with both grades of

standard size pistons and with 0.004

e*SOtIN

:XPANOfR--'

vrl„

DIESEL

oversize pistons. Refer to the following specifications for checking piston ring

fit:

Ring End Gap:

Top compression ring ..... 0.012-0.038

Second compression ring ..0.012-0.035

Oil control ring ..........0.013-0.038

Ring Side Clearance In Groove:

Top compression ring .. 0.0029-0.0046

Second compression

ring 0.0025-0.0045

Oil control ring ....... 0.0024-0.0041

Diesel Engines

90. Pistons are fitted with three

compression rings and one oil control

ring. The two top compression rings and the oil control ring are chrome plated. Top compression ring is barrel face type and must be installed with identification mark up. Second and third compression rings have straight face with bevel on inside diameter and must be installed with beveled side up. The oil control ring and expander may be installed with either side up.

Piston ring

oversizes

well as standard

rings

are to be used with both grades of

standard

sets

are available in

of 0.020, 0.030 and 0.040 as

. The standard size

size

pistons and also with

0.004 oversize pistons. Refer to the following specifications for checking piston ring fit:

Ring End Gap:

Top compression ring ..... 0.012-0.038

Second & third compression

rings .................. 0.012-0.035

Oil control ring .......... 0.013-0.038

Ring Side

Clearance In Groove:

Top compression ring .. 0.0044-0.0061

Second & third compression

rings ............... 0.0039-0.0056

Oil control ring ....... 0.0024-0.0041

PISTONS AND CYLINDERS

All Models

91. Non-diesel ground aluminum alloy pistons with a cast iron insert containing the top ring

groove. Diesel engines have trunk aluminum alloy pistons with a continuous skirt and a Ni-Resist insert con-

taining the top ring groove. Early design pistons were straight in the upper

engines

have cam

type

Page 34

Paragraphs 92-94

099. 10 100'

Fig. 86

Top of installed sleeve flange should be

flush

to 0

002 above gasket surface

shown.

land area; whereas, later production and service platens are tapered in the upper land area.

Cylinder

normally

bores in engine block are

unsleeved;however,repair sleeves have been factory installed in engines with 4.2 inch diameter cylin-

ders. In factory

installation

ders are, sleeved, and block is stamped "SB" on left side

Series 4000

available for

oil pan flange.

(

tractors

4.4 bore) have

service a thin wall cast

sleeve which is not used in production and which cannot be overbored.

Pistons, pins and rings are available in standard size and 0.004 oversize for use in standard

0.020, 0.030

bored

blocks.

bores, and oversizes of

and 0.040 for use in re-

92. INSTALLING SLEEVES. To install sleeves in unsleeved 4.2 inch bore engines, finish-bore the block to an inside diameter of 4.358. Selectively fit the sleeves to provide, as nearly as possible the optimum 0.004 interfer-

ence fit for all sleeves.

Thoroughly clean and dry the sleeve

and bore and carefully apply a 3-inch

hand of LOCTITE Sleeve Retainer

rgreen) to top of bore. Install sleeve, outside chamfered edge down and press into position until top of sleeve is flush to 0.001 above block surface. Allow

block to cure overnight before com-

pleting the assembly. Re-examine the installation and mill the block if necessary, to provide correct sleeve height. NOTE: DO NOT remove more than

0.005 from top surface. Finish bore and hone the sleeve after milling, to 4.200-

4.2024 for standard piston or to the appropriate oversize if oversize piston is installed. Refer also to paragraph 93 for additional data on piston and ring installation.

The flanged, thin-wall cast sleeves used in 4.4 inch diameter bore engines can be used only with standard size or

0.004 oversize pistons, and cannot be

re-hored. Thin wall sleeves are a light press fit in engine block and should be installed as follows:

First make sure that sleeve and

all cylin-

block as

Fig.

87-Three

been and two different crown bore diesel

height to

block bore are clean and

dry.

sleeves for 15 minutes in dry ice and

used

In 4.4 Inch

engines

Chill the

different Crown h

sure correct

bore gat bline, engines;

heights

If In

doubt,measure

pistdn Is being In-

stalled.

piston by honing, rebore cylinder to

0.020 oversize. push the sleeve as far as possible into block bore. Seat the sleeve, if necessary, using'a puller and suitable in-

stalling plate. Top of installed sleeve flange 'hould be flush to O.Od2 above gasket surface of block as shown in Fig.

86. Machining dimensions for installing sleeves in unbored block are shown in Fig. 86.

NOTE:

Indpr

wafer and detergent until a white cloth

calf be rubbed against cylinder wall

wlthdbt smudging,then rinse

water, dry

rusting.

All pistons used in 4.4 inch bore en-

93. FITTING PISTONS. Recom-

mended method follows: glaze cy

. Before checkingpiston fit, de-

inder wall using a hone or deglazing.tool sure

pdton diameter

for fitting

Using a micrometer, mea-

Oistons is as

at centerline of

and at right angle to the piston pin bore. Then,

using an inside microme-

ter, measure cylinder bore diameter at

a distance of 2'4 inches from top of cyl-

gines are not interchangeable. In April,1968,Series 4000 gasoline en-

gine strdke was increased from 4.2 to

4.4 iches.

height(measured from top of piston pin as shown at H-Fig

from 1 wrong piston could result in piston to cylinder head contact or decreased

compression.

inder block crosswise with the block. Subtract the piston diameter from the

cylinder bore diameter; the resulting piston to cylinder bore clearance should be Within the following specification for proper piston fit:

All Models

94. The 1.4997-1.5000 diameter floating type piston pins are retained in the piston pin bosses by snap rings

Non-Diesel Engines:

4.2 Inch Bore ......... 0.0027-0.0037

4.4 Inch Bore ......... 0.0032-0.0042

Diesel Engines:

4.2 Inch Bore ......... 0.0075-0.0085

4.4 Inch Bore ......... 0.0080-0.0090

and are available in standard size only. Piston pin should have a clearance of

0.0005-0.0007 in connecting rod bushing and a clearance of 0.0003-

0.0005 in piston bosses. After installing new piston pin bushings in

connecting rods, the oil hole in bushing must be drilled as shown in Fig. 88 and the.,bushings final sized with a spiral

Note:

Two grades of standard pistons

are available.Grade "D

standard size

pistons(color coded blue) are larger in diameter

piston (color coded

than grade

"B" standard size

red). If grade "D"

piston fits too loosely in standard cylinder bore, try a 0.004

oversize piston.

If not possible to fit the 0.004 oversize

expansion reamer to obtain the speci-

fied pin to bushing clearance. Bushing

inside diameter should then be 1.5003-

1.5006. When assembling, identification notch or number in top face of

piston must be to front end of engine and the identification, number oh rod and cap towards right side of engine

H) have

Ights

(

ee,,

4.4 Inch

used on

bore,wash bore

crown

After honing or deglazing cyl.

thoroughly

thoroughly and oil to prevent

At that time piston crown

992 to 1.774

87) was decreased

Installation of the

PISTON PINS

FORD

with hot

with cold

Page 35

2000

(away from camshaft); however, the rod is symmetrical and can be installed either way without affecting engine

performance or durability.

All Models

cision type, renewable from below after removing the oil pan and connecting rod bearing caps. When removing

bearing caps, note which way that cyl-

inder identification numbers are

placed on each rod assembly. It is stan-

dard practice that the numbers face away from the camshaft side of engine; however, the connecting rods are symmetrical and may be placed with iden-

tification numbers to either side of en-

gine. It is very important that the pistons be placed in cylinder bore with the identification number or notch in top face of piston towards front end of engine; therefore, do not attempt to realign rod identification numbers if they are to camshaft side of engine.

two different materials, copper-lead or aluminum-tin alloy. The bearings will have an identification marking as follows:

Copper-lead

Aluminum-tin ............. G and AL

material are available in two different thicknesses and are color coded to indicate as follows:

Copper-lead bearing thickness:

Red .................. 0.0943-0.0948

Blue ................. 0.0947-0.0952

Aluminum-tin alloy bearing thickness:

Red .................. 0.0939-0.0944

Blue ................. 0.0943-0.0948

crankshaft crankpin journals are color coded to indicate bore and journal di-

ameters as

bore diameter:

Red .................. 2.9412-2.9416

Blue .................. 2

Crankpin journal diameter:

Red .................. 2.7500-2.7504

Blue ................. 2

When installing a new crankshaft and the color code marks are visible on connecting rods, the crankpin bearing

liners may be fit as follows: If the color code markings on both rod and crankshaft crankpin journal are red, install two red bearing liners; if both color

3000-4000

CONNECTING RODS AND

BEARINGS

95. Connecting rod bearings are pre-

Crankpin bearing liners may be of

................ PV or G

Standard

In production, connecting rods and

size

bearing liners of each

follows: Connecting rod

.9416-2.9420

.7496-2.7500

Fig.88necting rod bushing drilled after bushing Is in-

stalled

or honing bushing

code markings are blue, install two blue coded

marks on rod

match ( install one red and one blue bearing liner. Note:. Be sure that both bearing liners are of the same material; that is, either both are copper-lead or both are aluminum-tin alloy. If color code mark is not visible on connecting rod or crankshaft, bearing fit should be checked with plasti-gage for the proper clearance according to bearing material as follows:

Crankpin journal to bearing liner clearance:

red-coded or blue-coded standard size, bearing liners are also available in

undersizes

and 0.040. When installing undersize

crankpin bearing liners

must be reground to one of the following exact undersizes:

Bearing Crankpin

Undersize Journal Dia.

NOTE: When regrinding crankpin

journals

radius and

journal is ground to size.

connecting

Ft.-Lbs.

All Models

main bearings. Crankshaft end thrust is controlled by the flanged main bearing liner which is used on the

second main journal from front. Before removing main bearing caps, check to

hole in con-

Oil

but before reaming

one is red

Copper-lead bearings 0.0017-0.0038

Aluminum-tin

bearings ......... 0.0025-0.0046

As well as being available in either

0.002

0.010

0.020

0.030

0.040

, maintain a 0.12-0.14 fillet

When reassembling

must be

fit pin.

bearing liners

and crankpin do not

and the other is blue)

of 0.002, 0.010, 0.020, 0.030

. If color code

, the crankpin

2.7476-2.7484

2.7396-2.7404

2.7296-2.7304

2.7196-2.7204

2.7096-2.7104

chamfer oil hole after

, tighten the

rod nuts to a torque of 60-65

CRANKSHAFT AND MAIN

BEARINGS

96. Crankshaft is supported in four

Paragraphs 95-96

see that they have an identification number so that they can be installed in same position from which they are removed.

Main bearing liners may be of two different materials, copper aluminum-tin alloy. The bearings will

have an identification marking to indicate bearing material as follows: Copper-lead Aluminum-tin

Standard size bearing liners are available in two different thicknesses and are color-coded to indicate follows:

Red .................. 0.1245

Blue ................. 0.1249-0.1254

In production,main bearing bores in

block and main bearing journals on crankshaft are color coded to indicate bore and journal diameter as follows: Main bearing bore diameter:

................ PV or G

alloy ........ G and AL

Red ................ 3.6242-3.6246

Blue ............... 3

Main journal diameter:

Red ................ 3

Blue ............... 3.3713-3.3718

When installing a new crankshaft and the color code marks are visible in crankcase at main bearing bores, new main bearing liners may be fit as follows: If the color code marks on bore and journal are both red, install two

red coded bearing liners; if both marks

are blue, install two blue coded bearing liners. If color code mark on bore is not

the same as color code on journal (one is blue and the other is red), install one red coded bearing liner and one blue

coded bearing liners used same material

bearing liners may be used on one or more journals with aluminum-t}n alloy

liners on the color code marks are not visible at the main bearing bores in block, check bearing fit with plastired or blue, or one red and one blue liner to obtain a bearing journal to

liner clearance of 0.0022-0.0045. Note:

Recommended clearance is for either copper-lead or aluminum-tin alloy bearing material.

liner. Note: Be sure both

at one journal are of the,

however, copper-lead

remaining

gage

lead or

thickness as

-0.1250

6246-3.6250

3718-3.3723

journals. If

and install

Page 36

Paragraphs 97-98

ENGINE

FRONT

COVER

630-16 STEP PLATE

Fig. 90-Installing the crankshaft front oil seal in

engine timing

gear cover.

Fig.89showing ings and related

three

I. Cap screw

2. Flat schr,

3. Drive key

4 Crankshaft pulley

5. Spacer

6. Dust seal

7. Oil seal

S. 0' 1 Olin

9. Crankshaft gear

10. Main bearing liners

11. Thrust

12. Crankshaft

13. Rear it seal

14. Flywheel assembly

15. Rear bearing cap scale

As well as being

available

red-coded or blue-coded new main bearing

liners are also avail-

able in undersizes of 0.002, 0.010,

0.020, 0.030 and 0.040. When installing undersize main bearing liners, the crankshaft journals must be reground to one of the following exact undersizes:

Bearing

Undersize

0.002 3.3694-3.3702

0.010 3.3614-3.3622

0.020 3.3514-3.3522

0.030 3.3414-3.3422

0.040 3.3314-3.3322

211

NOTE: When regrinding crankshaft

main bearing journals, maintain a fillet radius of 0.12-0.14 and chamfer oil holes after journal is ground to size.

When reinstalling main bearing

caps, proceed as follows: Be sure the

Exploded

crankshaft,bear-

cylinder engine.

parts

bearing liners

in either

standard size,

Main

Journal Diameter

bearing bores and rear main bearing

oil seal area fore installing bearing liners tangs on bearing inserts are in the slots

provided

in cylinder block and bearing

caps. Refer to paragraph 99 for rear cap

view

side seals

a torque of 115-125 Ft.-Lbs.

for

Tighten bearing

CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS

All Models

97. FRONT OIL SEAL. Crankshaft front oil seal is mounted in timing gear cover and cover must be removed to renew seal. Timing gear cover removal

procedure is outlined in paragraph 77 or 80. To renew seal, drive dust seal and oil seal out towards inside of timing gear cover. Install new dust seal in timing gear cover first, then using a seal driver (OTC No. 630-16 step plate or equivalent), install new oil seal in cover with spring loaded lip towards inside of cover. Refer to Fig. 90.

On early production engines, the

crankshaft front seal rides on the crankshaft pulley hub; later production engines are fitted with a revised crankshaft pulley and pulley spacer so that the oil seal rides on the spacer instead of pulley hub. Carefully inspect pulley hub (early production) or pulley spacer (later production) for wear at seal contact surface and renew pulley or spacer if wear or scoring is evident. Note: later

production crankshaft pulley and

spacer can be installed on early produc-

tion engine if desired.

98. REAR

rear

oil seal can

moving clutch assembly, flywheel and

engine rear

bore in cylinder block and rear main bearing cap and thoroughly clean crankshaft seal journal. Apply a light coat of high temperature

bore, crankshaft

and the outside diameter of seal. Install new seal with a 43'a inch I.D. sleeve so that rear face of seal is 0.060

plate. Pry old seal from

are thoroughly

cap bolts to

OIL SEAL. Crankshaft

be renewed after re-

grease to seal

seal journal

, lip of seal

FORD

clean be-

Be sure

Fig. 91-

Installing rear oil

stallation tool.

seal

using

special

Fig. 92-Installing rear main

bearing cap and side seals.

in-

Page 37

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs 99-102

Fig. 95-Removing the oil pump drive gear and

shaft assembly drive gear and shaft assembly

can be

Floating

removed et this time

shaft connecting the

oil pump

Refer

Fig. 96.

below flush with rear face of block. Using a dial indicator, check runout of

; runout should not ex-

rear face ceed 0.015. A tool (Nuday tool No. SW 520) able; using three flywheel

of seal

special seal installation

is avail-

bolts, press

seal in with tool until flange on tool bottoms and tighten the bolts to 25 Ft.Lbs. Then, remove bolts and seal installation tool. Note: Some early

models may have a stop installed in front of seal; if so remove and discard stop before

99. To install cap side ceed as follows:• Place side grooves of inch from top

installing new seal.

new rear main

remove the cap and pro-

seals,

they extend about S -

cap so

surface

bearing

seals in

(see Fig. 92). Apply sealing compound to top face of cap making sure chamfers

cap are

the bearing

covered.

Insert and

, then install cap and

liner

on edge of

lubricate

tighten retaining bolts to torque of 115-

into block so

125 Ft.-Lbs. Tap side

seals

that they extend about 0.005-0.15 from block and cap. With rear cap and side

rotor

Fig. 93-Bottom

Iron oil pan dustrial

models.Engine port attaching a definite shimming

dure

appropriate front support

rowcrop

which

removal

points

is outlined in

paragraph.

seals installed, soak side seals with penetrating oil and install rear oil seal as in paragraph 98.

FLYWHEEL

All Models

100. The flywheel can be removed

after splitting tractbr between engine

and transmission and removing the

clutch or Select-O-Speed torque limiting clutch. Flywheel can be installed in one position only. On models with clutch, the flywheel retaining cap screws also retain the clutch shaft pilot bearing retainer. When reinstalling flywheel, tighten the retaining cap screws to a torque of 100-110 Ft.-Lbs.

Starter ring gear is installed from front face of flywheel; therefore, the flywheel must be removed to renew the ring gear. Heat the gear to be removed

with a torch from front side of gear and knock gear off of flywheel. Heat new gear evenly until gear expands enough to slip onto flywheel. Tap gear all the way around to be sure it is properly seated and allow it to cool. Note: Be sure to heat gear evenly; if any portion of gear is heated to a temperature higher than 500° F., rapid wear will result. Ring gears for diesel engines have 128 teeth; those for gasoline engines have 162 teeth.

OIL PAN (SUMP)

Models 2100

4110

removed without removing other components. Be sure that gasket surfaces of engine block, timing gear cover and pan are clean and that pan rim is flat. If removed, reinstall timing gear cover prior to reinstalling oil pan. Cement gasket to pan rim with thin film of

4140SU

101. The oil pan can be unbolted and

2110,3100, 4100,

of cast

view

used on In-

and utility

front sup-

require

proce-

118

-®

17A ---qGP

Fig. 96-Exploded view of oil pump and drive gear assembly

Refer to FIg.95

(18), drive gear

shah

(13) may be

1. Retainer clip

2. Screen 12

3. Screen cover 13. Floating shaft

4. Pump cover

5. Rotor at 15. Drive gear

6. Plug 16. Pin

9. Relief valve spring 17. Gasket

8. Relief valve

9. Capserevt

10. Retainer washer

for removal of early type

15) and shaft

(

removed

above.

gasket sealer. Tighten retaining cap

screws finger tight and, if engine is removed, be sure that pan does not extend beyond rear face of block. Starting from middle of pan, tighten cap screws to a torque of 20-25 Ft.-Lbs.

Model 4200

102. On models with cast iron pan

(see Fig. 93), the front support assembly must be removed prior to re

moving oil pan. Refer to paragraph 80 for model 4200. With front support off, remove the two oil pan to transmission bolts, place a floor jack under oil pan, unbolt pan from engine and lower pan to floor.

To reinstall pan, proceed as follows: If removed, reinstall timing gear cover prior to reinstalling oil pan. Be sure all

gasket surfaces are clean and cement gasket to pan with thin film of gasket

sealer. Lift pan into place with floor

on all models.

used

assembly.Floating

either

from

t1. Pump body

. Gasket

l4. Drive shaft

17A. Shaft stop (late)

175. Cup plug (late)

18. Shaft stop

=12

floating

18 16

shaft

stop

below or

Page 38

Paragraphs

103-105

jack and reinstall pan to engine re-

taining cap screws finger tight only. Tighten, then loosen the two oil pan to transmission bolts. Then, starting from center of oil pan, tighten pan to engine cap screws to a torque of 30-35 Ft.-Lbs. Tighten the oil pan to

transmission

bolts to a torque of 220-300 Ft.-Lbs., then reinstall front support, front axle and radiator assembly as outlined in paragraph 80.

OIL PUMP AND RELIEF VALVE

All Models

103. To remove oil pump, first re-

move oil pan as outlined in paragraph

101 or 102, then remove the two retaining cap screws and remove pump from cylinder block. Refer to Fig. 96 for exploded view of oil pump and the oil pump drive gear assembly. The floating drive shaft (13) will usually be removed with the pump.

Fig.

cover to rotor

pump body

ance

fications

0.001-0.006

Fig.

98-Checking

renew rotor set It clearance

pump rotor to rotor clearance;

Refer also to Fig. 97.

97-Checking pump

clearance and

rotor clear-

Refer

to text for speci-

Refer

also

98.

exceeds 0.006.

to Fig.

To disassemble pump, remove clip (1)

and oil screen (2), then remove screws

retaining screen cover (3) and pump

cover (4) to pump body (11). Remove

the covers and pump rotor set (5),

noting which direction outer rotor was placed in pump body. Remove retainer screw (9) and if necessary, thread a self-tapping screw into plug (6) and pull plug from pump body. Remove the spring (7) and oil pressure relief valve (8).

Check the pump for wear as shown in

97 and 98. Pump cover to rotor

Figs. clearance

(rotor end play) should be

0.001-0.0035; pump body to rotor clear-

ance should clearance measured

the rotor

ances are

be 0.006-0.011; and rotor

should be 0.001-0.006 when

as shown

set and

excessive

in Fig.98. Renew

/or pump body jf clear-

. Renew pump cover plate if excessively worn or scored. Relief valve spring should exert a force of

10.7 to 11.9 pounds when compressed to a length of 1.07 inches. Engine oil pressure should be 60-70 psi at 1000 engine RPM.

Assemble the oil pump and reinstall by reversing removal and disassembly procedure. Tighten the oil pump retaining cap screws to a torque of 23-28 Ft.-Lbs. Note: Prime the oil pump by immersing in clean oil and turning the rotor shaft prior to installing pump in engine.

FORD

I. Fuel cap

2. Sealing sleeve

3. ( Fsuel, tank

4. Filter

5. Fuel supply valve

heat

6 "0" ring

7. Valve needle 8 Reteiningclip

9. Clamp assembly

Fig. 99-Drawing

pump

only by

element

only)

type

showing typical

Fig.

filter in line

and

removing fuel supply valve

101 for

between

tap) (5). An accessory kit Is also

(

tank

fuel

gasoline

exploded view of carburetor assembly

GASOLINE FUEL SYSTEM

All Models

porates four separate fuel screens and filters. A filter screen (4-Fig. 99) in the fuel tank is accessible by disconnecting fuel supply line (18) and unscrewing the fuel supply valve (5) from tank. A second screen (3- Fig. 100) is located in the fuel pump assembly and is accessible after removing cover (1). A disc type filter element (11-Fig. 99) is located in the sediment bowl; when reinstalling element, tighten finger tight only. A screen is incorporated in the carburetor inlet fitting (41-Fig.

101). An accessory kit is also available for installing an additional renewable elment type filter in line (18-Fig. 99) between fuel tank and fuel pump.

All Models

view of the diaphragm type fuel pump used on all models. Fuel pump assembly may be removed after disconnecting lines and unbolting lower body

fuel system.Refer to

and fuel pump

fuel gage only.

Cap (C)

9. clamp sensibly

10. Filter bowl

11. Filterelement

12. Filter body

13. Gasket

14. Line,m

15. Line, c

arburetor

16. Fuel lift pump

17. Carburetor

100 for exploded view of fuel

Fig

Note filter

available

which Is accessible

(

Install a renewable

used on model

p p to filter alter to

2000

without

FILTERS AND SCREENS

104. The gasoline fuel system incor-

FUEL PUMP

105. Refer to Fig. 100 for exploded

Page 39

2000

®-2

3000-4000

:ems :e

ism"' 'D x 75

Paragraph 106

1. Cover

2. Gasket

3. Scre

4 Body, upper

5. Diaphragm

6. Pin

7. Pump red

9 Body,lower

10. Spring

11. Spring east

12. Retainer clip

11-

,2--.m

Fig. 100-Exploded sembly.

Note

eccentric

from engine timing gear cover. Fuel pump push rod can be withdrawn from timing gear cover after removing fuel pump. Valves are serviced by renewing upper body assembly (4); all other parts are serviced separately.

All Models

106. Holley carburetors are used on all gasoline engines. Refer to Fig. 101 for carburetor exploded view and component parts for different models.

Very early production carburetors were equipped with a metering cluster cover (5A) having a ball check valve (6) and valve retainer (7). When servicing

one of these units, be sure that valve and retainer are reinstalled in the cluster cover. -

Early production carburetors were equipped with a metering cluster cover (5A) having main jet (8) installed on top side of cover. If flooding during hillside operation is encountered with one of these units, a kit that includes new type cover (5C) with main jet on lower

side and a float spring (18) should be

installed. Note: Kit does not include

main jet (8); main jet from old cover can

view of fuel lift pump

screen(3). Pump Is actuated

filter

attached

camshaft

to front

via a push rod.

CARBURETOR

end of

as-

engine

4____^IB

C1,

of the

Holley

Fig. 101-Exploded view assembly

2000,3000

retainer only.

4A. Metering cluster

4C. Metering cluster

6A Cluster cover (

5C. Cluster cover (late)

Metering

(

1) Is filter

Note

1. Drain plug

2. Floatbowl

.say. (

early)

ey (late)

6. Check hot I (early

is only)

7. Retainer

8. Mainjet

12. Gasket

13. Accelerating pump

pia n

14. Link

to. Spring

16. Spring seat

17. Vacuum piston

18. Float spring

19. Floatanembly

20. Inlet needle

21. Float hinge i

22. Carburetor body

cluster cover

and 4000;check valve ball (6) and

used on

screen

to Fig. 102.

also

early)

early production units

In Inlet fitting

23. Idle fuel needle

24. Spring

26. Bushing

26. Plug

27. Throttle plate

26. Gasket

29. Mounting studs

30. Bushing

31. Seal

32. Seal retainer

33. Throttle shaft

34. Spring

35. Idle speed screw

36. Choke disc easy.

37.

38.

39.

40.

41. Inlet fitting

42.

43.

44.

46.

carburetor

(

41). Refer

(

Choke cable bracket

Packing

Spi g

Choke shaft

Gasket

Air horn plug

Sintered bronze plug Retainer spring

Retainer screw

be installed in new cover. Spring (18) is installed to

assist float

lift; refer to Fig.

103 for spring installation. Later production carburetors include these changes.

Float level is measured as shown in Fig. 104, For early production units not having float spring (18-Fig. 101),

measurement should be 61/64 to 1 1/64

inch. For models having hillside

flooding correction kit installed, or on

used on

&screen

22B

accelerating pump cyl-

Fig. 102-On late

inder Is in metering valve body

8. Mainjet

12. Gasket or diaphragm

13. Accelerating pump iston

14. Link

15 . Spring

Fig. 103-View showing

float spring (18);float lever Is

late production units, measurement should be from 27/32 to 29/32-inch. Adjust float level by bending lever that contacts float valve (20).

Float valve

integral part

(22). As the body is not serviced separately,

stalled if seat

aged beyond further use.

models

carburetor body(22-Fig. 101).

inlet needle)seat is an

(

16,Springseat

17.

Vacuum piston

Meteringbody

220.

47. Pump valve

- Gasket

correct

(

228) Instead of

of the carburetor body

a new

carburetor

or body

must be in-

is worn or dam-

installation of

(19).

Page 40

Paragraphs

AIR HORN PLUG,.

107-115

Fig. 104-Measuring float ting on Holley carburetor;

bend float

Fig. 105-11 is

that the air horn

sintered bronze plug (44) are

properly Installed

dust

tang If necessary

to correct float

entry

Into engine

Drain

intake

very

plug Is (1).

level.

Important

plug and

prevent

set-

air

FORD

TROUBLE SHOOTING

108. When malfunction of the LP-

Gas fuel system is encountered, refer to

the following paragraphs for possible

causes of trouble.

109. NO FUEL TO CAR-

BURETOR. First, check fuel tank to

be sure it is not empty, then close and

slowly open the fuel tank shut-off valve

to be sure the safety excess flow valve

is not closed. If gas does not flow after

shut-off valve is opened, loosen the fuel

line at converter inlet. If no fuel is pres-

ent, malfunctioning filter-fuelock is

indicated; refer to paragraph 118. If fuel escapes, malfunctioning converter is indicated; refer to paragraph 119.

110. FAULTY FILTER-FUELOCK.

Trouble may be caused by:

1. Fuel filter plugged.

2. Fuelock not opening; check for: A. No electricity to coil.

B. Defective coil.

111. FAULTY CONVERTER.

Trouble may be caused by:

1. Primary regulator not working because of:

A. Primary orifice plugged from

excessive amount of thread sealer used on assembly.

B. Primary regulator assembled

without spring.

2. Secondary regulator not working because of.

4. Valve seat stuck to orifice. B. Lever far out of adjustment.

C. Primer plunger too short to

open valve.

D. Inoperative primer due to defec-

tive push button switch, defective coil or incorrect wiring.

LP-GAS FUEL SYSTEMS

(Model 4000 So Equipped)

107. A factory installed Century LPGas fuel system is available on some model 4000 tractors; refer to Fig. 106 for exploded view of the system. A Century model STF filter-fuelock assembly (13), model H converter (vaporizerregulator) (35) and model 3C-705-WD carburetor (31) are used.

The model STF filter-fuelock is a solenoid operated fuel shut-off device which closes off the fuel supply to the converter when ignition switch is in "OFF" position. Turning the ignition switch to "ON" position energizes the

solenoid and opens the fuelock.

The model H converter is equipped

with a solenoid coil operated plunger which opens the secondary valve al-

lowing fuel to flow to the carburetor

when the solenoid is energized. A push button switch located near the instrument panel (primer button) energizes the solenoid and is used instead of a conventional choke valve within the carburetor.

NOTE: Do not push primer button except prior to starting engine button only the one or two seconds required to fill vapor hose to carburetor with fuel. Be sure throttle is open before operating primer button starting purposes as the carburetor Is not equipped with a conventional choke mechanism.

The primer Is used for

then depress

The model 3C Carburetor is

equipped with idle speed, idle fuel mix-

ture and power fuel mixture adjustments.

112. FUEL LEAKING THROUGH CONVERTER. Check the primary regulator pressure. If normal, leakage

is through secondary regulator. If primary regulator pressure is excessive, leakage is due to primary regulator.

Overhaul of converter is given in para-

graph 119.

113. FAULTY PRIMARY REGULATOR. Trouble may be caused by:

seat

1. Valve

dirty or defective.

2. Diaphragm broken.

3. Valve lever distorted.

4. Spring or washers incorrectly in-

stalled.

114. FAULTY SECONDARY REG-

ULATOR, If primary

mal, leakage

through secondary regu-

lator could be caused by:

1. Dirt on valve seat.

2. Spring missing.

3. Lever incorrectly adjusted.

4. Primer plunger too long.

5. Primer actuated at all times.

115. CONVERTER

Note: Repeated converter freezing can

loosen back screws or distort back

pressure is nor-

FREEZING.

Page 41

2000-3000-4000

cover. Converter freezing could be caused by:

1. Water lines restricted.

2. Internal fuel leak.

3. Low engine coolant level.

4. Defective engine water pump.

5. Loose engine fan belt.

6. Defective hose or fittings.

7. Air lock; remove top water hose from the converter and bleed system.

8. Engine head gasket leaking.

CARBURETOR ADJUSTMENT

116. First, adjust slow idle fuel mix-

ture and idle speed as follows: Refer to

Fig. 108 and loosen the drag link locknuts (18L and 18R). With the engine running and throttle control lever in slow idle position, adjust idle fuel mixture by rotating the knurled barrel (16) to lengthen or shorten the drag link. When smoothest engine idle operation is obtained, adjust engine idle speed by turning the idle speed set screw (13Fig. 107) in or out to obtain engine slow idle speed of 600-650 RPM. Then, read-

justdrag link as necessary to obtain

smoothest speed and tighten the drag link locknuts. Note that one locknut (18L-Fig.

108) has left hand threads and the

other (18R) has right hand threads.

Power (load) adjustment is made by rotating the spray bar (1-Fig. 107). The end of the spray bar is marked "R" for rich and "L" for lean mixture. Ad-

justment must be made with tractor

connected to a PTO dynamometer or using an exhaust analyzer. When using dynamometer, rotate spray bar to obtain maximum horsepower. When using an exhaust analyzer, rotate spray bar to obtain a wide open throttle reading of 14.3 on LP-Gas scale; be sure to closely follow analyzer oper-

ating instructions. It will not be necessary to readjust idle speed and fuel mixture as they are not affected by spray bar adjustment.

operation at slow idle

engine

Fig. 106-Exploded view exploded view of filter

1. Fuel gage

2. Gasket

3. Reliefvalve

4. Raincap

6. 80% fill valve

6. Fueltank

7. Supply valve

8. supply valve

9. Tube

10. Elbow

11. Tube

Fig. 110 for exploded view

of the LP-Gat system used on

assembly

fuelock

12. 'Tea'

13. Filterduelock

14. Elbow

16. Tube, fuel

16. "Tee"

17. Gasket

18. Cap

19. Liquid-vaporvalve

20. Vapor return-fill

21. Elbow

alve

(

13); to of converter

Paragraphs 116-117

4000 tractor

model

107 for exploded view of carburetor

Fig

(

vaporizer-regulator)

22. Tube

23. Elbow

24. Tube, water

25. Elbow

26. Adapter

27. s cers

28. Mounting bracket

29.Spacer

30. Gaskets

31. Carburetor

32. Fitting

Refer to Fig.109 for

(35).

(

31) and

33. Fuel hose

34. Elbow

35. Converter

36. Tube, fuel

37. Elbow

38. Elbow

39. Tube, water

40. Connector

41. Radiator hose

42. Adapter 43 Radiator hose

R&R AND OVERHAUL

117. CARBURETOR. To remove the carburetor, disconnect the vapor hose, air cleaner hose and governor rod, then unbolt and remove carburetor from intake manifold.

Prior to disassembling, note position of throttle lever and drag link assemblies; it is possible to reassemble the carburetor with components reversed. Exploded view of carburetor in Fig. 107 shows correct assembly; however, unit is shown upside down. Refer to Fig. 108 for completely exploded view of the drag link assembly.

Completely disassemble the carburetor and clean all parts in a suitable

Fig. 107-Exploded view

and with air horn removed.Refer

down

1. Spray bar

2. Throttle shaft

3. Throttle disc

4. Seal retainer

Shaft seals

Bushings

7. Throttle body

of Century LP-Gas

8. Stop pin

9. Retaining screw

10. Metering

11. Spring

12. Ball etude

13. Idle.peed screw

14. Throttle lever

valve lever

carburetor assembly

Fig.108 for fully exploded view of drag link assembly.

15. Clamp screw

16. Drag link body

17. Spring

18. Jam nut

19. Dr

20. Baocket beatings

21. Metering valve lever

View is with unit turned upside

22 Washer 23- Metering valve body

24 Metering valve seal

25. Metering valve

link end

26. Spring

27. Plug

28. Gasket

Page 42

Paragraphs

118-119

FORD

20 19R IN 16 17 18L 12 20

12--^

I2. hall 1oda 17. Spring III.

❑

rag fish body 18 . Jam out,

END IS LEFT HAND THREAD

KNURLED

solvent. Blow out passages with compressed air. Thoroughly inspect all parts and renew any that are damaged or excessively worn. Always renew gaskets and throttle shaft seals when

reassembling and reinstalling carburetor. Readjust carburetor as outlined in paragraph 116.

118. FUELOCK AND FILTER.

With engine running; shut off the fuel

supply valve at fuel tank and run engine until fuel is exhausted from lines. Then, turn ignition switch to "OFF" position, disconnect solenoid lead wire and the fuel lines, then unbolt and remove the fuelock and filter unit.

Refer to exploded view of unit in Fig.

109. To clean the filter, remove the screws retaining bowl (12) to housing (8), then remove bowl and filter.

Remove the screw (1), then lift cover (2) and coil (3) from plunger guide (4) and separate coil from cover. Remove the screws retaining plunger guide to housing and remove the guide, plunger

spring (5) and plunger (6). Discard the '0' ring (7). Renew the plunger and, if

--I

=^i 9

10. Retainer

12.

12.❑aae anmmbly

GROOVES INDICATE L

. Ground wire

S. Solenoid lead

P. Plug

I Screw

2 ('over

3. Solenoid Call

4. Plunger body sy

6. Plun

ring

8. Filter cover

9 Filter

Gasket

19. Drag link ends

20 Ball stud bearings

Fig.

109-Exploded

assembly.

plunger body(4) by

view of fuel filter

Ground wire

(G) is connected to

screw (1).

fuel-lock

Fig. 108

Exploded view of

. "

1." suffix on call-

; "

A" Indicates right

(16).

p'19L

/ 8

EFT HAND THREAD

carburetor metering valve

drag link out Indicates thread hand thread fuel mixture,loosen (181. and 1811)and turn body

distorted or damaged in any way, also renew the spring. Place new "0" ring in housing, then place the spring in

plunger and slide plunger upward into guide and install the guide and plunger assembly on housing. Reinstall filter element and bowl, attach air hose to bowl inlet and check unit for leaks

using a soap solution.

If necessary to renew coil, pull old coil from cover and then

install coil and cover

insert new coil,

guide. Reinstall fuelock and filter as-

Fig.

110

Century

(vaporizer-regulator) used

on modal 4000 LP-Gas system.Diaphragm

blies are riveted together and are serviced

plete assembly

valve assembly

Into

solenoid

viced

Exploded

model H converter

cover(8)

(

1 through6)

as complete assembly

only.

CV. Check valve port

1. cover

2. solenoid coil

2G. Ground wire

25. solenoid lead

3. "O" ring

4. Plunger 5

rin

6. Plat

7. Gasket

8. Cov 9to 13, secondary

diaphragm assembly

14. Gasket 15

Secondary valve

lever

Valve

Spring

Converter body

Geaket

Cover

Plu

.24g

Primary valve lever

2.5.

26.

Valve

27.

Gasket

28.

Valve body

29.

Retainer

30W36. Primary diaphragm

assembly

37. spring

38. Cover

39. Check valve

assembly

view of

assem-

as a com-

only.

Check

screws

at (CV).Primer

is ser-

left hand

To adjust idle

jam

nuts

on plunger

sembly on tractor and check connec-

tions for leaks with soap solution.

119. CONVERTER. With engine running, shut off fuel supply valve at tank and run engine until fuel is ex-

hausted from system. Then, shut off ignition switch and proceed as follows:

Drain the cooling system and disconnect coolant lines from converter. Disconnect primer solenoid lead and the

fuel lines from converter, then unbolt and remove converter unit from spacers on mounting bracket.

To disassemble converter, refer to exploded view in Fig. 110 and proceed as follows: Remove the primer solenoid unit (1 through 7) from front cover (8) as an assembly, then unscrew check

valve (39). Remove front cover (8), then lift off secondary diaphragm (11) assembly, remove-the two screws re-

taining valve lever pin (16) and remove

lever (15) and spring (19). Remove the two screws retaining inlet valve housing (28) to converter and remove

Page 43

2000

3000-4000

Paragraph

119 Cont.

34 36

30 20

Fig. I11-When installing primary

assembly Into converter

spring

(31) must touch

Fig. 112-When installing primary diaphragm

cover, remove

Fig. 113-Checking primary regulator

Fig.

114-Checking secondary

ment

method

one alignment pin

retaining

with

Century

to use straight edge and

refer to Fig. 115.

body,

against sides

body

(20).

screw

refer to text.

gage No

legs

and install one

at a time.

valve

. 2V-01.

diaphragm

lever adjust-

of damper

of cavity In

pressure;

Alternate

rule;

steel

Fig. 115-Cross-sectional drawing of

valve

assembly

Inchasshown.Hot engine coolant

Distance between

marked "G". Refer to

the housing and inlet valve as an assembly. Remove the square diaphragm cover (38) and primary diaphragm (34) assembly. Remove the back cover (22) and discard gasket (21).

Do not disassemble the diaphragm

units as

they are

serviced as complete assemblies only. Remove primary valve lever pin (25), remove clip (29) and discard the valve seat (26) and

gasket (27). Thoroughly clean all metal parts in a suitable solvent and air dry. Inspect all parts for wear, damage or distortion able items.

are flat

warped or

To reassemble,

and discard

Be sure all mating joints

;

lap, machine

uneven castings.

any question-

or renew any

proceed as

Lay converter body face down, screw

allignment

into back cover re-

pins

taining holes and install new gasket and cover over the pins (Borg Warner part No. M-501). Install cover retaining screws in holes not having alignment pins, then remove the pins

and install remaining screws. Tighten the center screws first, then alternate

from side to side whep tightening outer

screws. Tighten the screws securely, then turn converter body face up.

Place the primary diaphragm as-

sembly over

opening in

making sure the dpmper

contact the

flat sides as shown in Fig.

111, then install

(Borg Warner

part No. M-501) through

holes in diaphragm

Fig. 110)

stall cover

alignment pins

on diaphragm plate

(38) over the

. Hold the cover down

securely, remove an

install a retaining screws are

installed and securely tight-

ened, then release

converter body

spring legs

four alignment pins

. Place spring (37-

springs and

alignment pin and

screw until all four

pressure

from cover.

Install a new valve seat (26) in primary valve lever (24) and secure with clip (29). Place new gasket (27) on valve body (28), install lever with pin (25), then carefully install the valve

converter

machined

passages

follows:

, then in-

body, primary regulator and secondary regulator

faceof body(20)

marked "W" vaporizes. the

Fig.

110 for

parts

and valve lever

Identification.

(15)

LP-

assembly on converter body making sure lever straddles the diaphragm link (30) and tighten retaining screws securely.

Connect an air hose to converter inlet and regulate air pressure to 130180 psi. Hold a pressure gage (Borg Warner part No. M-508 or equivalent)

against secondary valve venturi in

converter body as shown in Fig. 113. Pressure gage reading should read 4 to

6 psi. If pressure creeps upward, the

primary valve is leaking and must be reworked. Lift gage slightly allowing

some air to escape; pressure should drop slightly, then return to original

reading when gage is pressed back against venturi.

Install new secondary valve seat (17

-Fig. 110) on lever (15) with pin (18), bend pin liver (do not hammer) and clip

off excess length of pin. The seat should

fit loose enough to be self-aligning against venturi. Place spring (19) in

pocket in converter body, then install

pin (16) through lever and install the assembly with the two retaining screws. Open valve by hand and allow it to snap closed several times to align seat with orifice, then using special gage (Borg Warner part No. 2V-01) ur

straight edge and rule, measure lever heightas shown in Fig. 114. Bend lever as necessary to obtain the 5/16-inch distance between lever and machined face of converter body.

Reconnect air supply to converter inlet. Plug one water fitting opening and apply soap bubble to other water opening; any continuous growth of bubble will indicate leakage past back cover gasket. Immerse entire unit in water or check all joints including the secondary valve with soap solution and correct any leakage noted before proceeding further.

Install three alignment pins (M-501) in alternate holes in converter body

and slide gasket (14-Fig. 110) down

should be 5/16-

Gas

passages

Page 44

Paragraphs 120-128

Fig.

116-Use

gasket, secondary

over the pins with gasket ears over the primary cover(38) mounting screws. Mount the secondary diaphragm assembly on pins with button against valve lever that it will be right side up when mounted on tractor and install three

retaining screws. Remove the alignment pins and install the other three screws. Refer to Fig. 117 and tighten cover retaining screws while pulling up on diaphragm screw pliers. Reinstall primer coil assembly

and connect to 12-volt battery to check

alignment pinswhen Installing

diaphragm assembly and

cover.

Place cover(8) on pins so

(9-Fig. 110) with

DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM

The diesel fuel system consists of three

basic components

tion pump and Injection nozzles. When

servicing any unit associated with the fuel

system cleanliness is of utmost Importance. Of equal Importance is the avoidance of nicks or burrs on any of the working parts.

that service personnel can Impart to owners of diesel powered tractors is to urge them to use an approved fuel that is absolutely clean and free from foreign

material

taken to make certain that no water enters the fuel storage tanks.

the maintenance of absolute

Probably the most important precaution

Extra precaution should be

TROUBLESHOOTING

All Diesel Models

120. If the engine will not start, or does not run properly after starting, refer to the following paragraphs for possible causes of trouble.

121. FUEL NOT REACHING INJECTION PUMP. If no fuel will run from line when disconnected from

the fuel filters, injec-

Fig. 117-

Pull

up on

tightening cover retaining screws.

primer operation. Apply air pressure to

converter inlet and check for leakage

at vapor outlet with soap bubble. Actuate primer either manually or electrically to check for fuel flow out of vapor outlet; volume will not be great

but escaping air should be audible.

Reinstall converter by reversing removal procedure. Be sure to bleed any trapped air from the converter by loos-

ening top water hose.

diaphragm with pliers while

pump, check the following:

Be sure fuel supply valve is open. Check the filters for being clogged

(Including filter screen in fuel supply valve).

Bleed the fuel filters.

Check lines and connectors for

damage.

122. FUEL REACHING NOZZLES BUT ENGINE WILL NOT START. If, when lines are disconnected at fuel nozzles and engine is cranked, fuel will flow from connections, but engine will not start, check the following:

Check cranking speed.

Check throttle control rod adjust-

ment. Check pump timing. Check fuel lines and connections for

pressure leakage. Check engine compression.

123. ENGINE HARD TO START.

If the engine is hard to start, check the following:

Check cranking speed. Bleed the fuel filters.

FORD

Check for clogged fuel filters. Check for water in fuel or improper

fuel.

Check for air leaks on suction side of

transfer pump.

Check engine compression.

124. ENGINE STARTS; THEN

STOPS. If the engine will start, but

then stops, check the following:

Check for clogged or restricted fuel

lines or fuel filters.

Check for water in fuel.

Check for restrictions in air intake.

Check engine for overheating. Check for air leaks in lines on suc-

tion side of transfer pump.

125. ENGINE SURGES, MISFIRES OR POOR GOVERNOR REGULATION. Make the following checks:

Bleed the fuel system. Check for clogged filters or lines or

restricted fuel lines.

Check for water in fuel.. Check pump timing. Cheek injector lines and connections

for leakage.

Check for faulty or sticking injector

nozzles.

Check for faulty or sticking engine

valves.

NOTE:On models with O.A.V. fuel Injec-

tion pump, refer also to paragraph 152.

126. LOSS OF POWER. If engine

does not develop full power or speed, check the following:

Check throttle control rod adjust-

ment.

Check maximum no-load speed ad-

justment,

Check for clogged or restricted fuel

lines or clogged fuel filters.

Check for air leaks in auction line of

transfer pump. Check pump timing. Check engine compression.

Check for improper engine valve gap

adjustment or faulty valves,

127. EXCESSIVE BLACK SMOKE AT EXHAUST. If th'e engine emits excessive black smoke from exhaust, check the following.

Check for restricted air intake such

as clogged air cleaner. Check pump timing. Check for faulty injectors. Check engine compression.

FILTERS AND BLEEDING

Model 3000 With Simms Fuel Injection Pump

128. MAINTENANCE. On models produced prior to 12-68, the fuel filter head is fitted with two renewable type elements as shown in Fig. 118. On models produced after 11-68, only one filter assembly is used. Water drain plug (cap) should be removed each 50

Page 45

2000

3000-4000

hours of operation and any water in sediment bowl be drained; remove cap

and drain more often than each 50 hours if excessive condensation is noted.

After each 1200 hours (dual element), or 600 hours (single element) of operation, the fuel filter elements should be renewed. Refer to Fig. 119. Unscrew the cap screw at top side of filter head and remove the filter element and sediment bowl as shown. Clean the sediment bowl and reinstall with new element and rubber sealing rings; be sure rings are placed as shown in Fig. 119. Bleed the diesel fuel

system as outlined in paragraph 129.

129. BLEEDING. Bleeding procedure will remain basically the same regardless of whether dual or single filters are used. The following is based on the tractor being equipped with dual filters and when bleeding models with single filter ignore reference to rear and front filter bleed screws.

Refer to Fig. 120. Open rear bleed screw on filter head and actuate hand (priming) lever on fuel lift pump until fuel flowing from bleed screw is free of

bubbles. Close the rear bleed screw and open front bleed screw on filter head and actuate primer lever until bubble free fuel flows from opening. Then, close the fuel filter bleed screw, open

FIg. 120-Side

priming lever on fuel lift

Injection pump

plunger pump Instead

connectedatfitting

front bleed screw on fuel injection

pump and actuate primer lever until fuel flowing from bleed screw is free of bubbles. Close the pump bleed screw while actuating primer lever. Loosen the fuel injector lines at the injectors

view

Simms

typical engine showing filter and the Simms fuel

of a

(transfer

Injection

plunger unit shown

of four

(

0). Breather Is

) pump and

pump used on some

located at

bleed screw location on fuel

model

Although

filler

B),

plug at (F),

(

plug at (D).

Paragraphs 129-131

IDLE SPEED

STOP SCREW

Injection

filter

head

3000 tractors Is similar

not shown

an outlet (overflow

oil level plug of (L) and drain

except

pump.

and on

for

)

tube Is

Note

fuel

three

Fig. 119-To renew filter

screw at top side

Iment bowl and filter sealing

of filter head, then

rings

are placed as shown when In-

stalling new element.

elements,unscrew cap

element.Be sure

remove sed-

rubber

Fig.

118-After each 50 noun

operation

drain plugs from bottom of

each

drain until only clean fuel flows

The filters used with Simms

injection

at left; used

remove water

fuel filter

then

withC.

and allow

reinstall plugs.

pumps are shown

filters at right are

pumps.

V. Injection

and crank engine until fuel appears at all injectors, then tighten the fuel injector line connections and start engine.

Models With C.A.V. Fuel Injection Pump

130. MAINTENANCE. Filter maintenance is the same as outlined for models with Simms fuel injection

pump; refer

131. BLEEDING. Turn on the fuel supply valve at fuel tank and open the

bleed screw

filter head; when fuel is flowing freely

with no bubbles, close the bleed

screw

bleed screw (See Fig. 122) on fuel injec-

tion pump. Crank the engine until fuel flows from injection pump bleed screw on C.

to paragraph 128.

(

s) (See Fig

(s) on filter head and open the

. 121) on fuel

Fig. 121

filter head refer to Fig

Fig. 122-View

Bleed

A.V.

are located as

screws

with C.A.V. fuel

used

bleed screw location on the

122 for

C.A.V. pump assembly.

showing

fuel Injection pump assembly.

location

Injection

bleed

shown on

pump;

screw

Page 46

Paragraphs 132-146

FORD

Fig. 123-A

shown is necessary

fuel

injector

check

fuel injector

assemblies.Nozzle seat leakage

illustrated

tester such

for checking and adjusting

;

paragraph 147.

refer

and is free of bubbles, then close the

bleed screw. Loosen the

fuel injection

line connections at fuel injectors and

crank

the engine until fuel flows at all

three connections

. Then,

tighten the

fuel line connections and start engine.

INJECTION NOZZLES

CAUTION: Fuel leaves the injection

nozzles with sufficient force to pene-

trate the skin, When testing, keep your

person clear of the nozzle spray.

All Diesel Models

132. Diesel engines are fitted with

either Simms or C.A.V. fuel injector

assemblies. The injector nozzles have four spray holes spaced in a pattern at 90 degrees apart around the tip of the nozzle.

All 2006 models are fitted with a

C.A.V. distributor type fuel injection

pump and C.A.V. injectors.

Model 3000 is fitted with either a C.A.V. distributor type fuel injection pump or a Simms multiple plunger type pump.', On models with C.A.V. pump, C.A.V. fuel injector assemblies

are used; nozzle (C.A.V. part No. BDLL15OS6443) has four 0.0114-

0.0122 diameter spray holes. On models with Simms pump, Simms fuel injector (Simms part No. NL413) has four

0.0102-0.0110 inch diameter spray holes.

C.A.V. distributor type fuel injection pump; however, either C.A.V. or Simms injector assemblies may be installed in production. Some early production 4000 engines may have C.A.V.

injectors with nozzles (C.A.V. part No. BDLL150S6443) having 0.0114-0.0122

inch diameter spray holes; later en-

gines will have either C.A.V. fuel injector (C.A.V. part No. BDLL150S6476)

assemblies are used; nozzle

All 4000 models are fitted with a

assemblies

with nozzles

as the one

':SPRING:

Ad7US11N4

S.CREW...:..

Fig. 124-

refer

Adjusting nozzle opening

paragraph

145

for specifications and

procedure.

pressure;

having four 0:0122-0.0130 inch diameter spray holes or Simms fuel injector assemblies with nozzles (Simms,part No. NL461) having four 0.0122-0.0130 inch diameter spray holes. The Simms nozzles (part No. NL461) are not available for service; however, the C.A.V.

nozzles

are completely interchangdable and may be installed in the Simms injector holder. When servicing early units with C.A. V.,, part No. BDLL15OS6443

nozzles,be sure to use

the same part An service individual units; however, if all three

nozzles are

being installed, the C.A.V.

BDLL15OS6476 nozzles with larger spray hole diameter may be installed.

The C.A.V. or Simms part number is etched on the larger diameter of the fuel injector nozzle. Corresponding Ford part numbers and model usage

are as folldws:

Trac- C.A.V.

tor or Simme Ford Part

Model Part Number Number 2000,

3000 B1)LL150S6443 C5NE-9E527-A 4000 BDLL150S6476 C5NE-9E527-C 3000

W/Simms pump NL413 C5NE-9E527-A

133. TESTING AND LOCATING A FAULTY NOZZLE. If engine does not run properly and a faulty injection

nozzle is indicated, such a faulty nozzle can be located as follows: With engine

Fig.

125-

Left;

leak off line

Right view;Removing the

fuel injector

also

luelinjector

connections.

assembly.

to paragraph 149.

Refer

running, loosen the high pressure line fitting on each nozzle holder in turn, thereby allowing fuel to escape at the

union rather than enter the injector.

As in checking for faulty spark plugs in

a spark ignition engine, the faulty unit

is the one which, when its line is loos-

ened, least affects the running of the

engine.

144. NOZZLE TESTER. A complete

job of testing and adjusting the fuel

injection nozzle requires use of a spe-

cial tester such as shown in Fig. 123. The nozzle should be tested for opening pressure, spray pattern, seat leakage

and leak back.

Operate the tester until oil flows and then connect injector nozzle to tester. Close the tester valve to shut off pas-

sage to tester gage and operate tester level to be sure nozzle is in operating condition and not plugged. If oil does

not spray from all four spray holes in nozzle, if tester lever is hard to operate or other obvious defects are noted, remove nozzle from tester and service as outlined in paragraph 150. If nozzle operates without undue pressure on tester lever and fuel is sprayed from all fourapray holes, proceed with following tests:'

145. OPENING PRESSURE. While slowly, operating tester lever with valve to tester gage open, note gage pressure at which nozzle spray occurs. This, gage pressure should be 27202794 psi. If gage pressure is not within these limits, remove cap nut and turn

adjusting screw (See Fig. 124) as required to' bring opening pressure

within specified limits. If opening pres-

sure is erratic or cannot be properly adjusted, remove nozzle from tester

and overhaul nozzle as outlined in paragraph 150. If opening pressure is within limits, check spray pattern as outlined in following paragraph.

146. SPRAY PATTERN. Operate the

tester lever slowly and observe nozzle

spray pattern. All four (4) sprays must be similar and spaced at approximately

90° to each other in a nearly horizontal plane. Eabh spray must be well atom-

ized and should spread to a 3 inch di-

ameter cone at approximately 8 inches

from nozzle tip. If spray pattern. does

Page 47

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs

147-150

not meet these conditions, remove nozzle from tester and overhaul nozzle

as outlined in paragraph 150. If nozzle spray is satisfactory, proceed with seat leakage test as outlined in following paragraph:

147. SEAT LEAKAGE. Close valve

to tester gage and operate tester lever

quickly for several strokes. Then, wipe nozzle tip dry with clean blotting paper, open valve to tester gage and push tester lever down slowly to bring gage

pressure to 200 psi. below nozzle opening pressure and hold this pres-

sure for one minute. Apply a piece of

clean blotting paper (see Fig. 123) to tip of nozzle; the resulting oil blot

should not be greater than one-half

inch in diameter. If nozzle tip drips oil

or blot is excessively large, remove

nozzle from tester and overhaul nozzle

as outlined in paragraph 150. If nozzle

seat leakage is not excessive, proceed

with nozzle leak back test as outlined

in following paragraph.

148. NOZZLE LEAK BACK. Operate tester lever to bring gage pressure to approximately 2300 psi., release lever and note time required for

gage pressure to drop from 2200 psi. to

1500 psi. Time required should be from 10 to 40 seconds. If time required is less

than ten seconds, nozzle is worn or

there are dirt particles between mating surfaces of nozzle and holder. If time required is greater than forty seconds, needle may be too tight a fit in nozzle bore. Refer to paragraph 150 for disassembly, cleaning and overhaul information.

NOTE:

A leaking tester connection, check valve or pressure gage will show up In this test as excessively fast leak back. If, In testing a number of Injectors, all show excessively fast leak back, the

tester should be suspected as faulty

rather than the Injectors.

149. REMOVE AND REINSTALL INJECTORS. Before removing injectors, carefully clean all dirt and other foreign material from lines, injectors and cylinder head area around the injectors. Disconnect the injector leakoff line (Fig. 125) at each injector and at the fuel return line. Disconnect the

injector line at the pump and at the

injector. Cap all lines and openings. Remove the two retaining nuts and

carefully remove the injector from cylinder head.

Prior to reinstalling injectors, check the injector seats in cylinder head to see that they are clean and free from

any carbon deposit. Install a new copper washer in the seat and a new cork dust sealing washer around the body of the injector. Insert the injector in cylinder head bore, install retaining

washers and nuts and tighten the nuts evenly and alternately to a torque of

10-15 Ft.-Lbs. Position new leak-off fit-

ting gaskets

below and above each

banjo fitting and install the banjo fit-

ting bolts

to a torque of 8-10 Ft.-Lbs.

Reconnect leak-off line to return line.

Check the

fuel injector line connections to be sure they are clean and reinstall lines tightening connections at pump

end only.

Crank engine until a stream

of fuel is pumped out of each line at injector connection, then tighten the

connections. Start and

run engine to be

sure that injector is properly sealed

and that injector line and leak-off line

connections are not leaking.

150. OVERHAUL INJECTORS. Unless complete and proper equipment is available, do not attempt to overhaul diesel nozzles. Equipment recom-

mended by Ford is Kent-Moore J8666 Injector Nozzle Tester and J8537 Injector Nozzle Service Tool Set. This equipment is available from the Kent-

Moore Organization, Inc., 28635 Mound Road, Warren, Michigan.

Refer to Fig. 126 and proceed as fol-

lows: Secure

(J8537-11)

injector holding fixture

in a vise and

mount injector

assembly in fixture. Never clamp the

injector body in vise. Remove. the cap

nut and back-off adjusting screw, then lift off the upper spring disc, injector spring and spindle. Remove the nozzle retaining nut using nozzle nut socket (J8537-14), or equivalent, and remove the nozzle and valve. Nozzles and valves are a lapped fit and must never be interchanged. Place all parts in clean fuel oil or calibrating fluid as

they are disassembled. Clean injector

assembly exterior as follows: Soften hard carbon deposits formed in the spray holes and on needle tip by soaking in a suitable carbon solvent, then use a soft wire (brass) brush to remove carbon from needle and nozzle exterior. Rinse the nozzle and needle immediately after cleaning to prevent the carbon solvent from corroding the highly finished surfaces. Clean the pressure chamber of the nozzle with a

0.043 reamer (J8537-4) as shown in Fig. 127. Clean the spray holes with the proper size wire probe held in a pin vise (34298-1) as shown in Fig. 128. To prevent breakage of wire probe, the wire should protrude from pin vise only far enough to pass through the pin holes. Rotate pin vise without applying undue pressure. Use a 0.011 wire probe (Kent-Moore part No. J8537-2) with

C.A.V. nozzle having part No. BDLL150S6443 etched on large diameter, a 0.012 inch diameter wire probe

(Kent-Moore No. 38537-3) with a

C.A.V. nozzle having part No.

Fig. 126-View showing injector assembly mountedon holding fixture;

is being

tightened

PRESSURE

with

nozzle

torque

retaining nut

wrench.

NOZZLE

CHAMBER PRESSURE

DRILL

Cleaning

Fig. 127

Fig. 126-

chamber drill.

Cleaning nozzle

probe held

BDLL150S6476

having part

No. NL461, or a 0.009 inch

diameter wire probe

J8537-

1) with Simms nozzle having

nozzle

or Simms nozzle

CHAMBER

tip cavity with pressure

wire

spray holes

In pin vise.

with

(Kent-Moore No.

part No. NL413.

The valve seats

in nozzle are

cleaned by inserting the valve seat scraper (J8537-18) into the nozzle and rotating

scraper

groove

. Refer to Fig. 129. The annular

in top of nozzle and

the pressure chamber are cleaned by using (rotating) the pressure chamber carbon remover tool (J-8537-15) as shown in Fig. 130.

When above cleaning is accom-

plished, back flush nozzle and needle

by installing reverse

(38537-6)

on the nozzle tester and in-

flushing adapter

serting nozzle and needle assembly tip

Page 48

Paragraph 151

VALVE

SEAT

SCRAPER NOZZLE

Fig.

129-Use scraper to clean

Fig.

130-

used to

carbon

Fig. 131-

nozzle fluid;

note

seat In

Pressure

clean annular groove as well

tester to clean nozzle

chamber

from

pressure

flush

back

proper Installation of nozzle In the

attachment Is

adapter

end first into the adapter with knurled nut. Rotate the needle in nozzle while operating tester lever.

After nozzle is back flushed, can be polished by using a small amount of tallow (J8537-28) on the end of a polishing stick (J8537-21) and rotating stick

in nozzle as

132. If the leak-back test time was

greater than 40 seconds (refer graph 148),

bore of

by lapping

sembly.

or if needle is sticking in

nozzle, correction can be made

the needle and nozzle as-

This

is accomplished by using a polishing compound 66-0655 is suggested) as follows: Place small diameter of nozzle in a chuck of a drill having a maximum speed of less than

450 RPM.

Apply a small amount

nozzle body.

carbon remover is

chamber

by reverse flow of

unit.

(

Bacharach No.

carbon

In nozzle.

Installed

and secure

shown in Fig.

from valve

as clean

the seat

to para-

Fig. 132-Polishing

Fig. 133-Chuck

speed

back time Is excessive

Hold

Fig.

134-

electric

pin endofneedle

body

needle

and polishing

small

diameter of

drill to lap needle to nozzle If leak

sure

dowel

enter mating holes in

of polishing compound on barrel of needle taking care not to allow any compound on tip or beveled seat portion, and insert needle in rotating nozzle body. Refer to Fig. 133. Note: It is usually necessary to hold upper pin end of needle with vise-grip pliers to keep the needle from turning with the nozzle. Work the needle in and out a

few times taking care not to put any pressure against seat, then withdraw the needle, remove nozzle from chuck

and thoroughly clean the nozzle and

needle assembly using back flush

adapter and tester pump.

Prior to reassembly, clean fuel oil or calibrating fluid and assemble while still wet. The injector inlet adapter (Simms only) normally

valve

seat

stick.

nozzle

or needle

sticks in nozzle.

with vise grip pliers.

pins In

nozzle nozzle.

rinse all parts in

with tallow

In slow

holder

FORD

NOZZLE

HOLDER

BODY

NOZZLE

NOZZLE RETAINING

NUT

SHIM

WASHER

(2701 E -9K548)

Fig.

135-Cross-

washer Installed

sectional

between nozzleand nozzle re-

taining nut.

does not need to be removed. However, if the adapter is removed,

copper sealing stalling. Position the nozzle and needle

valve on injector body and be sure dowel pins in body are correctly located in nozzle as shown in Fig. 134. Install the %a-inch shim washer (see Fig. 135) and nozzle retaining nut and tighten nut to a torque of 50 Ft.-Lbs. Note: Place injector in holding fixture (J8537-11) and tighten nut with socket (J8537-14). Install the spindle, spring, upper spring disc and spring adjusting

screw

. Connect the injector to tester

and adjust

opening pressure as in para-

graph 145. Use a new copper washer

and install

cap nut.

opening pressure

stalling nut did not change adjustment.

Retest injector

graphs 146 through 148; renew nozzle and needle if still faulty. If the injectors are to be stored after overhaul, it is recommended that they be thoroughly flushed with calibrating fluid prior to storage.

FUEL INJECTION PUMP

Models 2000

4000

With C.

151. PUMP TIMING. Refer to Fig.

136. The C.A.V. fuel injection pump is correctly timed when installed with scribe line on pump body aligned with the "0" mark on engine front plate.

NOTE:Some mechanics may prefer to set Injection pump timing to obtain maximum engine horsepower on a dynamometer.If following this procedure, do not loosen pump mounting bolts when engine is running. Stop engine to make change In

timing,then restart and recheck horse-

power output on dynamometer.

A.V. Pump

view showing shim

washer when rein-

Recheck nozzle

to be

sure

as outlined in para-

3000 and

use a new

that in-

Page 49

2000

3000-4000

Fig.

136-View

timing marks on C.A.V. fuel Injection pump body and engine front

correct

when scribe line on

pump Is aligned with "0"

mark on

engine

plate.

showing

Timing Is

front plate.

,.,PUMP IIMWG

(EAk

Paragraphs 152-156

152. FUEL INJECTION PRESSURIZATION VALVES. Fuel injection pressurization (delivery) valves

are available for installation

on models

equipped with C.A.V. fuel injection pumps. These valves diesel

experienced

engine flutter

. To install the

will eliminate

problem where

valves, pro-

ceed as follows:

Thoroughly clean the fuel injection

pump and injector

lines.

Remove the No. 1 cylinder fuel injection line from injection pump, then remove and discard the line connector. Install the straight pressurization valve (Ford part No. C5NN-9N022-A)

using a new

gasket, tighten valve to torque of 22.7 Ft.-Lbs. (262 inch-pounds) and reconnect the injector line. Remove the No. 2 and No. 3 injector lines from pump, remove and discard line connectors, then install the remaining two pressurization valves (Ford part No. C5NN9N022-B) and tighten to a torque of

22.7 Ft.-Lbs. Reconnect injector lines to pressurization valves and bleed the lines as outlined in paragraph 131.

153. R&R FUEL INJECTION

PUMP. Thoroughly

clean the pump,

lines and connections and area around

pump. Remove the pump to injector

lines,

disconnect the fuel inlet and

outlet (return)

lines

from injection

pump and immediately cap all open-

ings.

Disconnect the throttle control rod and fuel shut-off cable. Remove cover plate

from engine timing gear

cover and remove the three cap screws retaining pump drive gear to pump drive hub; refer to Fig. 137. Unbolt the injection pump from

engine

front plate and remove the pump assembly. The pump drive gear will remain in the engine timing cover and cannot become out of time; however, the engine should not be turned when the pump is removed.

To reinstall fuel injection pump, reverse removal procedures. Align scribe mark on pump body with "0" mark on

engine

front plate as shown in Fig. 136

and tighten pump retaining bolts to a torque of 26-30 Ft.-Lbs. Tighten injection pump drive gear retaining bolts to a torque of 20-25 Ft.-Lbs. Bleed the diesel fuel system as outlined in paragraph 131.

Model 3000 With Simms Pump

154. LUBRICATION. The Simms

fuel injection pump is lubricated by oil sump in the pump cambox. After each 300 hours of operation, the pump should be drained, the cambox breather cleaned and the cambox refilled to proper level with new, clean engine oil. Use same weight and oil as for engine crankcase; refer to Fig.

120 for location of breather (B), drain plug (D), oil level plug (L), and filler plug (F).

Whenever installing a new or rebuilt

fuel injection pump, be sure the

cambox is filled with engine oil to level of the oil level plug (L) before attempting to start engine. There will be some oil dilution with diesel fuel during engine operation and after engine is stopped, some of the fuel-oil mixture may run from outlet tube (0).

155. PUMP TIMING. To check and

adjust pump timing, proceed as follows:

Fig. 138-View with drive

gear from show Simms pump

bolts and timing

set,

of timing

cover removed

timing

gear cover to

gear, retaining

drive

top right,shows location

hole

timing marks.

pump

fuel Injection

marks.

for flywheel

In-

type

Fig. 137

moved fuel

injection pump

View with pump drive

from

timing gear cover showing C.A.V.

drive gear,

and dowel pin.

gear

attaching

Drain coolant from radiator and remove lower radiator hose. Open the hood, swing battery out and remove the

rocker arm cover. Remove cover plate from front side of engine timing gear cover and remove the flywheel timing hole cover plate from right rear side of engine. Turn engine until intake valve on No. 1 cylinder closes, then continue to turn engine slowly until the 19 degree BTDC timing mark on flywheel is aligned with arrow at edge of timing hole. The timing marks on fuel injection pump should then be exactly aligned as shown in Fig. 138, if not, loosen the three cap screws that retain gear to fuel injection pump drive hub and rotate the pump camshaft until marks are aligned. Tighten the cap screws to a torque of 20-25 Ft.-Lbs. Recheck timing marks and if aligned, reinstall the engine timing gear cover, lower radiator hose and timing hule cover. Refill cooling system.

156. R&R FUEL INJECTION

PUMP. Thoroughly clean the pump,

lines

and connections and the area around the pump. Proceed as outlined in paragraph 155 to bring the flywheel and pump timing marks into alignment and shut-off the fuel. Remove the

cover re

bolts

Page 50

Paragraphs

AXIMUM SPEED

STOP SCREW

Fig. 139-View

(maximum

speed

pump to injector lines, disconnect the

fuel inlet and outlet lines from fuel lift

pump and the filter to injection pump line and immediately cap all openings. Disconnect the throttle and fuel shutoff controls. Remove the three cap

screws retaining gear to injection pump drive hub and remove the gear clamping plate. Remove the cap screws retaining pump to engine front plate and remove the pump assembly. The

pump drive gear will remain in the engine timing gear cover and cannot become out-of-time; however, the engine should not be turned with pump removed. Remove excess fuel leak-off line from pump and plug the opening.

reverse the removal procedures and

time the pump as outlined in paragraph 155. Tighten the fuel injection pump retaining cap screws to a torque of 26-30 Ft -Lbs. and the gear to drive huh retaining cap screws to a torque of 20-25 Ft.-Lbs. Bleed fuel injection pump as outlined in paragraph 129.

INJECTION PUMP DRIVE GEAR

All Diesel Models

pump drive gear, first remove the engine timing gear cover as outlined in

paragraph 77 or 80. Then, remove the three cap screws, retainer plate (models with Simms injection pump only) and the fuel injection pump drive gear.

crankshaft so that timing marks on crankshaft gear and camshaft gear point towards center of idler (camshaft

drive) gear. Then, remove the self-

locking cap screw retaining idler gear to front face of cylinder block, remove the idler gear and reinstall with timing marks aligned with marks on crank-

shaft gear and camshaft gear. Tighten idler gear cap screw to a torque of 100-

105 Ft.-Lbs.

)

speed stop screw

stop

screw

To reinstall the fuel injection pump,

157. To remove the fuel injection

Prior to installing gear, turn engine

157-159

showing location of high idle

on C.A.V.

and

fuel Injection pump.

(

slow) Idle

fruEI OUf[ET

5 LINE STOP SCREW

Fig. 140

(maximum

speed stop screw on Simms

pump shaft so that pump drive gear

can be installed on dowel pin in pump drive adapter with timing marks on pump drive gear aligned with timing mark on idler (camshaft drive) gear. Install and tighten the three pump drive gear retaining cap screws to a

torque of 20-25 Ft.-Lbs.

the pump drive gear on adapter hub with timing mark aligned with timing mark on idler gear. Place retainer plate on gear, install socket wrench on nut on front end of pump camshaft and

turn pump camshaft until timing mark on adapter is aligned with timing mark (pointer) on pump front plate. Then, turn the pump slowly in a counterclockwise direction (as viewed from front of engine), if necessary, so that the cap screws can be installed through

retainer plate and drive gear into the pump drive adapter. Turn the engine until No. 1 piston is at 19 degrees

View showing

)

speed stop

On models with C.A.V. pump, turn

On models with Simms pump, place

IDLE SPEED

location

screw and(slow)

fuel Injection pump.

10 tion pump

Fig. 141-Exploded view of typical hand lever and linkage

washerlnstead of coil spring

;

some models

of high idle

12 arm

throttle

have spring

(6).

BTDC on compression stroke. With pump drive gear retaining cap screws loose, turn the pump camshaft with

socket wrench so that pump timing marks are aligned (see Fig. 138), then tighten the drive gear retaining cap screws to a torque of 20-25 Ft.-Lbs.

Reinstall timing gear cover as per

appropriate paragraph.

DIESEL GOVERNOR

ADJUSTMENTS

Models With C.A.V. Pump

158. To check idle speed adjustment, proceed as follows: Start engine and bring to a normal operating temperature. Disconnect throttle linkage from governor arm on fuel injection pump.

Hold the governor arm against the slow idle speed stop screw; slow idle

Idle

speed should then be 650 RPM. If it is not, loosen the lock nut on the slow idle speed stop screw (Fig. 139) and turn

the screw in or out to obtain proper slow idle speed, then tighten the lock nut. Hold the injection pump governor arm against the high idle (maximum)

speed stop screw; engine speed should then be 2175-2225 RPM on models 2000 and 3000 or 2395-2445 on model

4000. If not within specified speed range, the high idle speed stop screw

should be adjusted. CAUTION: The high idle speed stop screw is sealed at the factory with a sealing wire and cover tube; this seal should not be broken on tractors within factory warranty by other than Ford authorized diesel service personnel. To adjust high idle speed, break the wire seal, remove the cover tube and loosen the lock nut on adjusting screw; then, turn screw in or out to obtain specified high idle speed, tighten lock nut and reseal the

screw. When reconnecting throttle

linkage, refer to paragraph 160 or 161

and adjust linkage if necessary..

Models With Simms Injection Pump

159. Start engine and bring to normal operating temperature. Disconnect throttle linkage from fuel injec-

governor arm and hold the

so that stop lever contacts the slow

idle speed stop screw (see Fig

engine speed is not then approximately 650 RPM, loosen the lock nut on stop screw and turn screw in or out until proper slow idle speed is obtained and tighten lock nut. Hold the arm so that stop lever is against the high idle (maximum) speed stop screw; engine high idle speed should then be 2175-2225 RPM. If high idle speed is not within the specified range, the stop screw

should be adjusted. CAUTION: The high idle (maximum) speed stop screw

adjustment is sealed with a sealing

FORD

140). If

Page 51

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs

160-162

wire at the factory; this seal should not be broken by anyone other than Ford authorized diesel service personnel if tractor is within factory warranty.. To adjust high idle speed, break wire seal, loosen lock nut and turn adjusting screw in or out until proper speed is obtained; then, tighten lock nut and reseal adjusting screw. When reconnecting throttle linkage, refer to paragraph 160 or 161 and adjust linkage if necessary.

THROTTLE

LINKAGE

ADJUSTMENTS

Models With Hand Operated

Throttle Only

160. Refer to exploded view of typical

hand operated throttle linkage in Fig.

141. With the throttle link (11) disconnected from injection pump governor

arm and with engine governed speed adjusted as outlined in paragraph 15§ or 159, proceed as follows: Move, hand lever (1)to.rear against slow idle stop and hold pump- goverhor arm against slow idle speed stop screw;* forward end of link .,(11) should then enter hole' in governor arm without binding. If not,

loosen lock nut(10)'and turn link in or out of end assembly (9) as required.

With link length properly adjusted, reconnect link to pump governor arm with retainer (12) and tighten lock nut (10). With engine running, check oper-

ation of throttle; there should be sufficient tension on spring (6) (some

models have spring washer instead of coil spring) so that hand lever will

remain in any desired position, yet move without excessive binding.

Fig. 142

foot operated

sembly

able on some models. Bell crank

lever

pedal

(6) without

lever.

Exploded view of

typical of those avail-

3) pivots on throttle

(

shaft

(1)allowing

control throttle link

moving

Refer also to

1. Hand lever

2. Lock;

callar

3. Bell clank

4. Endaesembly

5. Lock nut

6. Throttle link

7. Washer

8. Frictionpplate

9. Friction d' c

10 8

Washer

12. Adjdstingnut

13. Support bracket 14 Footpedal...y.

15. Tenmon spring

16. Washer

17. Jam nut

is. Adjusting nut

19. Adjusting bolt

26. swot bracket

21. Bellcrank 22 Link end

23. Lock nuts

24. Link

25. Clevin pin

26. End assembly

throttle as-

Tighten or loosen -spring adjusting nut (8) as required. Recheck engine governed speed '(paragraph 158 or 159) with throttle linkage connected.

Models With Foot

Operated Throttle

161. Refer to Fig. .142 for exploded view of typigal foot operated throttle linkage. With:the throttle link (6) disconnected ftom fuel injection pump governor arm and engine governed speed adjusted as outlined in para-

graph 158or 159, proceed as follows:

Disconnect link (24) by removing clevis pin (25) and move hand throttle lever (1) to rear against slow idle stop. Hold fuel injection pump governor lever

against slow idle speed stop screw and

push link (6) to rear; forward end of link should then enter hole in pump governor arm without binding. If not,

loosen lock nut (5) and turn link in or

out of end assembly (4) so that correct

link length is obtained, connect link to pump governor arm with retainer and tighten lock nut. With hand throttle lever to tear against slow idle stop, pull link (24) to tear. It should then" be necessary to depress foot pedal slightly so that clevis pin (25) can be inserted through link end (22) and bell crank

(21). If not, loosen lock nuts (23) and

lengthen the link (24). With clevis pin

installed, slowly depress foot throttle pedal; pedal should contact downward

stop at some time fuel injection pump

governor lever contacts high idle (max-

imum) speed stop screw. If not, shorten

or lengthen the link (24) as required

and tighten the lock nuts (23). When

hand lever is against Year (slow idle)

stop, spring (15) should return linkage

hand

Fig. 153.

foot

Fig. 143-Cross

start unit

Ifold. Refer to Figs

F. Fuel inlet VB

HC. Heatercoll

IC. Ignition coil

S. Shield

sectional view of diesel Thermo-

)

(optional

that is

144 and 145 for fuel reservoir

and fuel line

to slow idle position. If not, loosen jam nut (17)

and tighten

to increase spring tension

running, check operation of hand

throttle lever

there should be suffi-

;

cient tension on spring hand lever will remain in any desired

position

yet move without excessive

binding.Tighten or loosen spring ad-

12) as required. Recheck

justing nut

(

engine governed speed or 159

with all throttle linkage con-

)

nected.

THERMOSTART COLD

WEATHER STARTING AID

All Diesel Models So Equipped

162. Refer to Fig. 143 for crosssectional view of the Thermostart unit which is located in the engine intake

manifold. The fuel inlet (F) is con-

nected to a small reservoir (see Firs

144 and 145). In operation, turning the

switch to either "HEAT" or

key

"HEAT-START"

Thermostart

tery heating the heater- -coil (HC) and

ignition pull the valve

valve ball (VB) allowing ball to unseat and fuel to

where it is heated and

the intake

To operate the unit in cold weather, turn the key-starter switch to "HEAT" position for 15 seconds, then turn switch to "HEAT-START... position to start engine. If engine does not start after 10 seconds, return switch to "HEAT" position for 10 seconds, then back to "HEAT-START". After engine is started, turn switch to "ON" posi-

tion.

CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to us-v

ether starting fluid and Thermostart

unit at same

wire (W-Fig. 143) to bat-

coil (IC). The hot coils react to

stem (V$) away from

flow th

manifold.

time; use ether starting

located in Intake man-

connections.

Val-ball

VS Valve stem

W Wire to key switch

adjusting nut (1H;

, With engine

(

10) so that

(

paragraph 158

position

connects

rough the unit,

ignited, and into

Page 52

Paragraph 163

FORD

Fig. 144-View showing and fuel line

I. Reservoir assembly

!. Injerler excess fuel return line

9 Rehm line to fuel tank

4 Plug (replaces fuel pump to reservoir line used on

5. Flexible connector tube

0. Li ne to Thermostart fuel inlet

Fig. 145-View showing Thermostart reservoir and fuel line

I. Reservoir assembly

2. Injector excess fuel return has

3. Return line to fuel tank

4. Line to pressure valve

5 . Flexible connector tube

e. Line to Therniootart fuel i met

v Co,npre sleeve

p tune ertor, tube to valve assembly

10. Valve spring ll Valve hall 12 Valvebody

13 . line from pressure outlet of fuel Nter assembly

early models

connections

rontprc tut

connections

fuel injection pump.

Thermostart

for models with C.A.V.

for models with Simms

reservoir

Fig. 146-Exploded view of fuel Hit pump assembly injection pump.Fuel lift(transfer)pump

1. (lever

2 Pulsator diaphragm

3. Outer body

4. Valves

5. Pump diaphragm

C.A.V. pump

is not used

has an

Internal vane type transfer pump.

Diaphragm spring

Inner

Cam lever spring

Cam lever

10.

Pivot pin

fluid only if Thermostart unit and intake manifold are cold.

For connecting fuel lines to Thermo-

start unit and reservoir, refer to Fig.

144 for models with C.A.V. fuel injection pump or to Fig. 145 for models with Simms fuel injection pump.

NOTE: When diesel fuel lines have been disconnected, always make certain that fuel is present at the Ther-

mostart fuel inlet (F-Fig. 143) before tightening the connection at that point.

Any attempt to operate the Thermostart unit without fuel available may cause failure of the unit allowing fuel oil to leak into the intake manifold.

Service of the Thermostart unit and/or fuel reservoir consists of renewing the defective unit.

FUEL LIFT PUMP Models With Simms Fuel Injection Pump

163. The fuel lift pump is mounted on the outside of the fuel injection pump and is driven from a cam on the injection pump camshaft. The fuel pump is of the diaphragm type, and component parts are available for service. Refer to exploded view of the fuel pump assembly in Fig. 146. The inlet and outlet

valves (4) are staked into the outer body (3); when renewing valves, insert in body as shown and carefully stake in position. The primer lever retaining pin (12) must be installed with outer end below flush with the machined surface of inner body (7). After inserting

that Is

mounted on Simms multiple plunger

body

models

with C.A.Y.

fuel

Injection

I I.

Diaphragm lever

12.

Retaining pin

13.

Return spring

14. Primer lever

l5.

pump as the

pivot pin (10) in inner body, securely stake pin in place.

To test pump, operate the primer

lever with lines disconnected and with fingers closing the inlet port; pump should hold vacuum after releasing primer lever. With finger closing outlet port, there should be a well defined

surge of pressure when operating primer lever. Note: On models with Thermostart, check the pressure valve in filter to Thermostart reservoir line if loss of fuel pump pressure is suspected, but pump appears in good condition. Refer to Fig. 146.

ASSEss SLY

Fig. 147-The governor driver

accessible

outer race from also

after removing governor

front of timing

148. Retaining nut has left hand

Fig

thread.

flybali assembly is

(

housing

cover; refer

gear

fuel

and

Page 53

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs 164-165

GOVERNOR (

Non-diesel engines are equipped with a variable speed centrifugal fiyball type governor that is mounted on front end of the Ignition distributor drive shaft

Fig. 147.

SPEED ADJUSTMENT

Early Series 2000

164. Refer to Fig. 149 for assembled

view of governor linkage and to Fig.

150 for exploded view. Before attempting any adjustments, first check to be sure that linkage moves freely without binding or excessive looseness.

With engine not running, disconnect governor rod (27) at forward end. Move hand throttle lever to wide open position and carburetor throttle arm against high speed stop. Loosen jam nut (28) if necessary and adjust governor rod until front end easily enters hole in governor arm. Lengthen governor rod one more turn to assure com-

plete opening of carburetor throttle, reconnect governor rod and tighten jam nut (28).

3000-4000

;

refer to

Fig. 150-Exploded view of

throttle and governor linkage typical

1. Throttle lever

2. Grommet

3. spring

4. Washer

5. Nut

6. Throttle lever arm

12. End assembly

13. Jam nut

14. Throttle control rod

15. Retaining clip

16. Bellcrank

21. Pivot bolt

22. Lockout

23. High idle adjustment screw

24. Counterbalance spring

25. Front throttle

25A. Washers

26. Retainingclip

27. Governor rod

28. Jam nut

29. End assembly

Fig. 151-Drawing showing typical throttle and governor linkage

2000, 3000 and 4000.

3000

and 4000.

used on late

of early

control rod

Non-Diesel)

2000,

model

Fig. 148-View

outer race cover.

Pin (P) in

showing

removed

governor housing and

from front of timing

keeps

housing

turning.

outer race

L. Length or rod

1. Throttle control rod

2. High idle adjustment screw

3. Throttle bellcrank

4. Governor rod

5. Governor arm

6. Throttle rod & governor spring assembly

Move hand throttle lever to slow idle

position and check to be sure car-

buretor throttle arm is firmly held

against slow speed stop screw. Remove right hand steering gear sheet metal cover, if necessary; disconnect end as-

sembly (12) from throttle lever arm (6)

and adjust length of control rod (14) as

gear from

required.

Start and run engine until normal operating temperature is attained. Turn idle speed adjusting screw on carburetor throttle arm to obtain the rec-

Fig. 149ernor typical of early

View showing gov-

and throttle linkage

and

2000, 3000

4000.

ommended 600-650 RPM slow idle speed.

Move hand throttle lever to wide

open position and adjust high idle

screw (23), if necessary, to the following:

Tractor Maximum

Model No

Load Speed

2000 ............ ....... 2200-2300

3000 ...................2285-2335

4000 ............... ...2395-2445

Move the hand throttle control lever to slow idle position and, if necessary, readjust slow idle speed to 600-650 RPM. Stop engine and reinstall steering gear cover.

Late 2000

3000-4000

165. Refer to Fig. 151 for schematic view of linkage and to Fig. 152 for alternate bellcranks which may be used on 3 cylinder units. First make sure linkage is free without excessive looseness. Move hand throttle to high speed position and adjust governor rod (4) if necessary, to fully open carburetor throttle. Adjust length of throttle rod (L) to 11 25/32 inches if bellcrank is

Page 54

Paragraphs 166-167

Fig.

153-

ated throttle and related linkage.Refer to exploded view. Refer to

View of foot

for adjustment

Fig

. 142 for

procedure.

FORD

oper-

text

Fig. 152-

been used on

throttle

Two different

late

rod to

used;to12 25132

11 25/32

shape bellcranks

three

cylinder engines. Adjust

inchesitbellcrank (A) Is

inches for

bellcrank (9).

have

shaped like that shov in (A-Fig.

152); or 12 25/32 if bellcrank (B) is used.

Start and warm engine and adjust slow idle speed to 650-700 RPM. Adjust high idle speed as follows, by turning adjustment screw (2).

Tractor Model High Idle Speed

2000 ................... 2200-2300

3000 ................... 2285-2385

4000 ................... 2395-2495

166. ACCELERATOR (FOOT) PEDAL ADJUSTMENT. To adjust the foot operated throttle linkage on models so equipped, first disconnect the accelerator rod (see Fig. 153) from hand operated throttle lever arm and adjust the throttle linkage as outlined in paragraph 164 or 165. Then, adjust

the length of the accelerator rod as fol-

lows: Move the hand throttle lever to

wide open position and hold the foot pedal down against the step plate (foot rest). Adjust the length of the accelerator rod so that it can be reconnected with hand and foot operated throttle controls in this position. Tighten the accelerator rod adjustment lock nuts after reconnecting rod, then recheck

both high no-load and slow idle speeds.

Readjust linkage if necessary, then reinstall the cover on right side of

steering gear. Note: If foot pedal will

not return throttle to slow idle position when released, tighten the return

spring (see inset in Fig. 153).

R&R AND OVERHAUL

167. Refer to Fig. 154 for an exploded view of engine governor; plus governor drive which also includes distributor drive shaft and housing.

Governor housing (20 or 26) can be removed after disconnecting linkage and removing the retaining cap screws. Outer race (15) can be withdrawn after

removing governor housing. Remove drive shaft nut (14) if indicated, and

Fig. 154-Exploded view and lever assembly

1. Rear cover plate 7. Distributor drive

2. Gasket

3. Gear, washer&shaft

.say.

4. Woodrunkey

5. Oil line

6. Fittings

of non-diesel

(26) is used on late

connected between throttle

8. Gasket

9. Thrust washer

M Engine front plate 18, Outer washer

11. Drive gear

12.

13. Driver assembly

governor and distributor drive

3 cylinder

housing

Timing gear cover

withdraw governor driver assembly (13).

Governor driver (weight) unit is only

available as an assembly. Lever (21) and arm (23) are available for early governors but not available

for late

units.

With governor driver removed, dis-

tributor drive housing,

shaft and asso-

ciated parts can be removed after re-

moving ignition coil, distributor, oil feed line and

attaching cap screws.

Drive gear (11) can only be removed

units.

On early 3 cylinder

)

arm (21

and governor arm (19).

14. Nut(L.H. thread

15. Outer race

16. Gasket

17. ana g

19. Governor lever

20. Governor housing

assembly

governor spring

)

21. Throttle arm

22. Governor spring

23. Governor arm

2C I'm

25. Plug

26. Governor housing

after removing timing gear coyer as outlined in paragraph 77 or 80.

Distributor drive shaft (3) can be

removed from housing (7) after re-

moving rear

and thrust

Renew'parts

cover (1), Woodruff key (4)

washer (9).

which are wprn, damaged or questionable, and assemble by reversing the disassembly procedure.

Time the ignition

as outlined

graph 175 and adjust governor linkage if necessary, as in paragraph 164 or

165.

Governor

(

late)

housing

(22) is

in para-

Page 55

2000

-3000-4000

Paragraphs 168-171

COOLING SYSTEM

Fig. 156-View showing sembly being

Fig. 157-Flange

inch

from

pressed

of water stinger

edge of outer

housing.

above.

and bearing as-

shaft

from

bearing

Impeller and

should be 0.55

race as shown

RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP AND

THERMOSTAT

All Models

168. A 7 psi radiator pressure cap is

used on all models.

On nonlocated in front end of engine intake manifold. Thermostat

is located in front end of cylinder head. On all models, thermostat is accessible after draining coolant from radiator and removing water outlet connection from intake manifold or cylinder head.

Standard thermostat for all models should start to open at 188° F., and be fully open at 212° F. Optional thermostats with opening temperatures of 160° F., 168° F., and 178° F. are available; however, use of the standard thermostat is recommended for all conditions.

diesel

engines, thermostat is

in diesel engines

Fig. 155-Exploded view of water

pump assembly used

engines.Seal (5) seats

all

Fig. 158-Press

I.D. pipe so

Fig.

159-press

from center of belt

that

pulley

from rear

against hub

1. Pulley

2. Housing

9. Shaft & bearing asay.

4. Water sling r

5. Seal assembly

6. Impeller

7. Gasket

8. Rear cover

9. Mounting gasket

Impeller

Impeller Is flush with rear of

housing

as shown.

onto shaft so

groove

face of housing.

of impeller (6).

onto shaft

in pulley

RADIATOR

All Models

169. R&R RADIATOR. To remove the radiator, drain the cooling system, disconnect front mounted air cleaner hose and the headlight wires and remove the grille and radiator shell from

tractor. Disconnect the hoses and if so

equipped, disconnect transmission oil cooler tubes from radiator lower tank. Disconnect the engine breather tube from rocker arm cover and from the fan shroud and remove tube. Then, unbolt

with

3o-inch

that distance

is 2 V Inches

and remove radiator and fan shroud assembly from tractor. Remove shroud from radiator if necessary.

On models with transmission oil cooler, the radiator lower tank assembly contains a heat exchanger and,

on some models, lower tank is avail-

able separately from the radiator as-

sembly.

To reinstall radiator, reverse re-

moval procedure.

WATER PUMP

All Models

170. Water pump can be removed after removing radiator as outlined in paragraph 169. Refer to exploded view of water pump in Fig. 155 and disassemble pump as follows:

Remove fan from pulley and using standard two-bolt puller, remove pulley from shaft. Remove rear cover

(8) and press shaft and bearing assembly (3) out towards front of housing

as shown in Fig. 156. Drive the seal (5

-Fig. 155) out towards rear of housing.

Using a length of 1 5/16 inch I.D. pipe, press new seal into housing. Check to see that flange on water slinger (4) is located 0.55 from edge of bearing race as shown in Fig. 157, then press shaft into front of housing until outer bearing race is flush with front end of housing. Using a length of 3/4inch I.D. pipe, press impeller onto shaft as shown in Fig. 158 so that impeller is flush with rear end of housing. Press pulley onto shaft so that center of belt groove in pulley is 2'/ inches from

rear face of housing as shown in Fig. 159. Install rear cover with new gasket and tighten retaining cap screws to a

torque of 18-22 Ft.-Lbs.

Reinstall water pump assembly by

reversing removal procedure and

tighten retaining cap screws to a

torque of 23-28 Ft.-Lbs.

ELECTRICAL

SYSTEM

GENERATOR AND REGULATOR

All Models

171. Ford generators and regulators are used. The generator is a two-pole shunt wound type with type "B" circuit; that is, one field coil terminal is grounded to generator frame and the

Page 56

Paragraphs 172-173

GROUND

OIL P

RE SWITCH

STABILIIERG

'E OPTIONAL

THE

LIGHT

SWITCH SWITCH

ACCESSORIE

location

GENERATOR

REGULATOR

E OWLF B

STARTER RELAY

SR R

TEMPERATURE

SENDER UNIT

BR.R

TO COIL VOLTAGE

LEFT t TRAILER L T MGNT

TAIL -©SOCKET

LAMP IMPLEMENT

SR-R CONTACT

l' I IGNITION

STARTER SPAPN^

SWITCH PLUGS

Fig.

160-Wiring

this manual for serial number

WORK LAMP AN ACCESSORY

IGNITION SYSTEM I THERMOSTART OPTION

BREAKER

DISTRIBUTOR

diagram for all models

other field coil terminal is connected to armature terminal through the regulator. Specifications are as follows:

Max. output (hot) @ 1350

RPM and 15 volts ............ 22

Renew brushes if shorter

than ................. 13/32-inch

Min. brush spring tension

with new brushes ..... 18 ounces

Field coil current .......... 2 amps.

Field coil resistance ........ 6 ohms

Max. commutator runout .... 0.002

Max. armature shaft runout .. 0.002

Cutout Relay:

Cut-in speed (approximate

engine RPM) ............... 765

Cut-in voltage ........... 12.4-13.2

Cut-out voltage ........... 9.5-11.0

Cut-out current .......... -4 amps.

Armature-to-core air gap 0.035-0.045 Contact blade movement 0.010-0.020

Current Regulator:

On-load setting (amps.) ...... 21-23

Armature-to-core air gap .... 0.054

BATTERY -

I-

OR SOLENOID

KEY.

STARTER

PULP]

THERMOSTART

with "C

For

prefix to tractorserial number

tractors with

refer to Fig. 161

BLR

FuEI TEMPERATUR

GAUGE L= --- rJ GAUGE

SR-Y

-----------------------

SELECT.

O-SPEED TRANSMISSION

OIL PRESSURE WARNIN

KEY. DIAL

STARTER LAMP

IWITCN

FUs

3 AM

BNgQN LINES DESIGNATE TAIL

---+

IL PRESSURE

SWITCH

A" or "B

prefix

EQUIPMENT OR LAMP

LAMP

LIGHT

ITCH

ALL GROUND WIRES - BLACK

to tractor serial

BL - BLUE

W- MITE

1-10 G - GREEN

BR - BROWN

Y - YELLOW

BK - BLACK

Refer to page 2 of

number,

Voltage Regulator:

Opening voltage:

50° F . .................. 14.9-15.5

68° F . .................. 14.7-15.3

86° F . .................. 14.5-15.1

104° F . .................. 14.3-14.9

Armature-to-core air gap .... 0.053

STARTING MOTOR

Non-Diesel Starting Motor

172. Ford tractors with non-diesel engine are equipped with a starting motor of the type shown in Fig. 162. This starting motor utilizes a seriesparallel connected field coil arrangement, an integral positive engagement drive assembly and a moveable pole piece which, together with one of the field coils, acts as a solenoid to engage the drive assembly. When motor is not in use, one of the field coils is grounded through the actuating coil contacts. Closing starter switch completes the circuit resulting in the moveable pole

FORD

piece being attracted by the field coil. A lever attached to the moveable pole piece engages the drive gear pinion with the flywheel ring gear. When the moveable pole piece is fully

opens the field coil grounding which applies full field power for normal starting motor operation.

Service specifications are as follows:

C5NF

11001-B-C 7NF-11001-B-

DINN

11001-A Starting Motor

Brush spring tension (min.

with new brushes) ........... 40 oz.

Min. brush length ............ ' -inch

Commutator min. diameter 1.46 inches Max. armature shaft end play .. 0.058

Max. armature shaft runout .... 0.005

No-load test:

Volts ......................... 12

Amps ......................... 70

RPM ................... 6000-9500

Loaded test (with warm engine):

Amps .................... 150-200

Engine RPM .............. 150-200

C5NF-11001

-A, C6NF-11001-A or

CINF-11001-A Starting Motor Brush spring tension (min.

with new brushes

) ........... 40 oz.

Min. brush length ............ E -inch

Commutator min. diameter Max. armature shaft end Max. armature shaft runout

No-load test:

Volts ......................... 12

Amps ......................... 60

RPM ................... 5220-9440

Loaded test (with warm

Amps .................... 225-275

Engine RPM .............. 150-200

Diesel Starting Motor

173. Most diesel engines are

equipped with a Ford 5 inch diameter

starting

Closing the starter switch the solenoid; movement of the solenoid plunger

closes

the drive flywheel,

switch is rent to flow to one field provide enough until drive pinion is in position to en-

gage flywheel

full engagement of drive pinion will close second stage of switch energizing

all four field coils.

When drive pinion is in engaged po-

sition, there should be a clearance of

0.010-0.020 between drive pinion and

thrust collar. To check clearance, first

energize solenoid

source, then check clearance with

feeler gage as shown in

clearance

refer to Fig. 164, loosen locknut and

turn pivot

proper clearance

motor and relay assembly.

engages the

a two-

stage switch

drive pinion and

pinion butt against teeth on

only the first stage of the

closed which

power to turn

ring gear

with 6-volt power

is not within 0.010 to 0.020,

pin as

required to obtain

. Then, tighten

seated, it

contacts

1.46 inches

play .. 0.048

.... 0.005

engine):

energizes

. If the teeth of

will allow cur-

coil. This will

starter

teeth; then,

Fig. 163. If

Page 57

2000

3000-4000

BLBLUE -BROWN

W-WHITE BY-YELLOW

R-RED LG-LIGHT GREEN

G-GREEN BK-BLACK

BAN

BRIG

AMR

ATOR

GENE

ENGINE

OIL SWITCH

GENERATOR WARNING NGINE

RIEGU^TOR

.- (1^ IIGNTS OIL

I 10 SPEED LIGHT

LUBRICATION LIGHT

BATTERY

AND SWITCH

81.

WATER

TEMP.

SENDER STARTER

10 SPEED SELECTOR

DIAGRAM SHOWN OE

ALL GROUND

LOW BEA

HIGH BE

MOTOR

GAL

SOLENOID

WATER TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

ENERGIZED

WIRES - BLACK

wIR

SIDE

LIGHT

TAIL

GHT

Fig. 162

on models

engine

Paragraphs 174-175

MOVABLE'

POLE

Cut-away view of starting motor

2000,3000

A similar

model 3000

and 4000 with non

starting motor is used on some

with diesel engine.

used

diesel

with"A" or "B

Fig. 161-Wiring diagram for all

this manual for serial number location

2 of

models

Refer to

prefix.

lockout and recheck clearance.

are as

Service specifications

Starting Motor & Relay

follows:

Assembly

Brush spring tension (min.

with new brushes) ........... 42 oz.

Min. brush length .......... 5/16-inch

Commutator min, diameter 1.53 inches Max. armature shaft end play .. 0.020

Max. armature shaft runout ....

Drive pinion

(engaged

clearance

) ............. 0.010-0.020

0.005

No-load test:

Volts ......................... 12

Amps ........................ 100

RPM ................... 5500-7500

Loaded test (with warm

engine):

Amps .................... 250-300

Engine RPM .............. 150-200

NOTE: Beginning with production

1-73, series 2000 and 3000 trac-

date

tors are equipped with a 4' inch diameter starting motor which is basically similar to the 5 inch diameter starting motor. The same service procedure can be used.

prefix

Fig.160 for

tractor serial

wiring diagram for models

number.Refer to

IGNITION SYSTEM

174, SPARK PLUGS. Autolite AG5

spark plugs are recommended for all

gasoline engines

0.023-0.027. Install spark plugs with dry threads and tighten to a torque of 26-30 Ft.-Lbs.

175. IGNITION TIMING. Breaker contact gap is 0.024-0.026. Firing order is 1-2-3 on three cylinder engines. To

install and

ceed as follows:

Remove the No. 1 (front) spark plug and turn engine slowly until air is forced out spark plug hole, then continue turning engine slowly until 00 (TDC) flywheel mark is aligned with arrow in inspection rear cover plate, then, place the distrib-

utor with dust cover and rotor in-

stalled, in drive housing with rotor pointing towards No. 1 cylinder distributor cap terminal. This should properly

mesh the distributor gear with the

. Set electrode gap to

time the distributor, pro-

opening

with "C"

of engine

page

Fig. 163 diesel engine for adjustment and

Fig. 164-Adjusting drive pinion clearance on

Measuring drive pinion clearance on

starting motor

adjusting

diesel engine

for measuring and

to text

procedure.

starting motor.

RefertoFig. 164

drive shaft gear. Loosen the bolt clamping the timing arm to the distrib-

utor base and rotate distributor until

breaker points just start to open. Hold

distributor housing in this position,

center the timing arm slot on bolt hole

in drive housing and tighten the

timing arm clamp bolt. Reinstall spark

Page 58

Paragraphs

"ON PIVOTING TYPE

BREAKER

POINT ASSEMB

AfJU9TING

SCREW

MOVA6t

BREAKER

POINT

Fig. 165-View of 3 with cap and rotor removed breaker point

176-177

cylinder Ignition distributor

assemblies are used

for non-pivotIng type.

Two

;

refer

plug, distributor cap and spark plug wire, start engine and set timing with timing light as follows:

176. IGNITION TIMING WITH 'L'IMING LIGHT. A Power Timing Light can be used to check distributor advance mechanism. Stamped timing marks run from 0°(TDC) to 30° (BTDC) which is not sufficient to register com-

bined advance. A suggested procedure

for checking the distributor and ad-

justing timing is as follows:

Connect timing light to No. 1 spark plug and open timing hole cover on right, front side of engine rear plate, then start the engine and run at high

idle rpm. Retard ignition timing until 30° timing mark aligns with timing pointer, tighten clamp screw and shut off engine. Disconnect and plug vacuum advance line. Restart engine and, with engine running at high idle speed, recheck timing which should now be 18° BTDC. Adjust the vacuum advance, if necessary, as outlined in paragraph

179. With engine still running at high

idle speed and with vacuum advance line disconnected, reset ignition timing as follows:

Model 2000 ............... 22°BTDC

Model 3000

W/C5NF-12127A Dist...... 18°BTDC

Model 3000

W/C7NF-12127A Dist...... 22° BTDC

Model 4000 Before

June 1968 ................ 24° BTDC

Model 4000 After

June 1968 ................ 22°BTDC

Tighten clamp

gine speed to slow idle retard

overhaul

to 0°-6° BTDC.

distributor as in paragraph

180 or adjust mechanism as in paragraph 178.

177. DISTRIBUTOR

OVERHAUL. The breaker gap for all models dwell angle for

screw and reduce en-

timing should

;

If is does not,

centrifugal advance

TEST AND

is 0.024

all models is

-0.026. Cam 35-38 de-

types of

to Inset

contact

Fig. 166

Ford 3

grees;

Exploded view of

cylinder ignition dis-

tributor

assembly.

I Distributor cap

2, polar

3. Retainer

4. Seal

5. Dust cover

7. Condenser

8. Breaker points

9. Cam lubricant felt

10. Retainer rings

11. Ground wire

12. Springwasher

13. Upper breaker plate

14. Lower breaker plate

6. Wick

16. Cam retainer ring

17. Diatributorcam

18. Thrustwasher

19. Advance weights

20. secondary advance spring

21. primary advance spring

22. Rubber sleeve

23. Distributor shaft

24. Bushing

25. Wick

26. Primary ignition win

27. Distributor base

28. Timing arm assembly

29. "0"ring

30. Drive gear

31 S ring pin

32. Plug

33. Gasket

34. Shim washer 35, stop

36. Spring

37. Diaphragm assembly

38."O-ring

however, most dwell meters will

not have a 3-lobe position for 3-cylinder

engines

. Therefore, the cam dwell for 3-

lobe distributor cam should test 171/-

19 degrees when dwell meter

is set for

6-lobe (6-cylinder) position.

Breaker contact points may be either

the conventional pivoted type or pivot-

On pivoted type points, breaker

less.

arm spring tension should be 17-21 ounces when measured at end of breaker points contact, or 15-18 ounces when measured at center of contact points. To adjust spring tension, loosen nut holding breaker arm spring and move slotted end of spring towards pivot point to decrease tension, or away

from pivot point to increase tension. Tension on pivotless point set is nonadjustable. Refer to Fig. 165 for views showing both types of breaker points.

For distributor test stands (synchro-

), refer to the following test data

scopes

for both centrifugal and vacuum advance test data: (All

data is in

distributor RPM and distrib-

utor degrees.)

-12127-C-C 7NF-

C 5 NF Distributor for Model 2000 Tractors

Centrifugal Advance Data:

Distributor RPM Degrees Advance

200-350 ................ -0.5 to +0.5

400 .......................... Oto 1

600 .......................... 4to 5

850 ......................... 9to 10

900 ......................... 9to 11

advance test data

12127-B

FORD

Vacuum Advance at 1000 Distributor

RPM:

Inches Mercury Degrees Advance

1 ................................ 0

3 ........................... 0to 0.5

5 ............................ Oto 1

6 ........................... 0to 3.5

7 ......................... 2.2 to 5.2

8 ......................... 3.5 to 6.5

9 ......................... 4.5 to 7.5

15 ........................ 4.5 to 7.5

C5NF-12127 Model 3000 Tractors

Centrifugal Advance Data:

200-550 ................ -0.5 to +0.5

600 .......................... Oto 1

700 .......................... 2to 3

850 ....................... 5

1000 ......................

1200 ..................... 5.75 to 7.0

2000 ...................... 7.2 to 8.8

Vacuum Advance at 1000 Distributor

RPM:

Inches Mercury Degrees Advance

1 ................................ 0

3 ............................ 0 to 0.5

5 ............................ 0W 1

7 ........................... O to 1.5

8 ............................ Oto 3

9 ............................ Ito 4

10 .......................... 2to 5.2

12 ........................ 3.8 to 6.8

13 ........................ 4.5 to 7.5

15 ........................ 4.5 to 7.5

A Distributor for

2 to 6.2

5.5 to 6.5

Page 59

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs

178-180

C5NF-12127-

B Distributor for

Model 4000 Tractors

Centrifugal Advance Data:

Distributor RPM Degrees Advance

200-525 ................. -0.5to +0.5

550 O to 1

800 .......................... 4to 5

1000 ........................ 7to 8.5

1100 ........................ 9to 10

1200 ........................ 9to 11

Vacuum Advance at 1000 Distributor

RPM:

Inches Mercury Degrees Advance

1 ................................ 0

3 ........................... 0to 0.5

5 ............................ Oto 1

6 ............................ Oto 3

7 ............................ 2to 5

9 ......................... 4.5 to 7.5

15 ........................ 4.5 to 7.5

C7NF-12127-

A Distributor for

Model 3000 Tractors

Centrifugal Advance Data

Distributor RPM Degrees Advance

200-525 ................ -0.5 to +0.5

900 ....................... 5.5 to 6.8

1150 ........................ 9to 11

Vacuum advance at 1000 Distributor

,RPM

Inches Mercury Degrees Advance

I ................................ 0

5 Otol

8 ............................ 4to7

9 ......................... 4.5 to 7.5

C7NF-12127-

Model 4000 Tractors

Centrifugal Advance Data Distributor RPM Degrees Advance

200-475 ................ -0.5 to +0.5

900 .......................... 5to7

1150 ........................ 9to 11

Vacuum Advance At 1000 Distributor

RPM

Inches Mercury Degrees Advance

1 ............................... 0

5 Oto1

8 ............................ 2to 5

11 .......................... 5 to 7.5

178. ADJUST CENTRIFUGAL ADVANCE. If the distributor centrifugal advance did not fall within speci-

fications given in paragraph 177, proceed as follows to adjust or correct centrifugal advance mechanism:

Refer to Fig. 167 and check to be sure sleeve (22) is in place on tang of distributor shaft tributor in Fig. 167 is with breaker plate (14-Fig. 166) removed; however, distributor shaft can be rotated qpd

sleeve

justment tabs (T) observed through

hole in breaker plate.

If low RPM centrifugal advance is not within specified limits, turn dis-

D Distributor for

. Note: Top view of dis-

plate

(22-Fig. 167) and spring ad-

Fig. 167-Drawing

with breaker

sembly Fig. 166 for

Fig.

168Cross

vance mechanism showing

vacuum advance stop

washers(34). Refer to

showing

parts identification

for advance springs are (7).

sectipnal

plates

cation.

top of distributor as-

removed

Adjusting

view

of vacuum ad-

proper

and adjusting

(

35)

for parts identifi-

Fig.

166

tributor shaft so that primary spring (21) adjusting'tab (T) is in view through hole in breaker plate and bend tab in to increase the advance or out (away from distributor shaft) to decrease the advance.

If high RPM centrifugal advance is not within specified limits, turn distributor shaft so that secondary spring (20) adjusting tab (T) is in view through hole in breaker plate and bend tab in to increase' the advance or out (away from distributor shaft) to decrease the advance. NOTE: Secondary advance spring should be loose on tang when the distributor shaft is stationary.

After adjusting centrifugal advance

springs, recheck centrifugal advance throughout low, intermediate and high distributor RPM ranges given in test data. Renew advance springs if centri-

fugal advance is not within specified

limits throughout the test RPM range

and cannot be adjusj:ed. Advance

springs for'mgdel 2000 have 711A coils

and are color coded blue; advance

springs for all other models have six

coils and are color coded purple.

Refer

location of

shim

NOTE: 'Primary" and "Secondary" ad-

vance springs are Identical

justment is different.

179. ADJUST VACUUM AD-

VANCE.

If the vacuum advance is not

within the specified limits as outlined

177, remove plug (32-

) and add shims (34) between

in paragraph Fig. 168 plug and spring vance, or remove advance. Be sure gasket

condition or renew gasket when rein-

stalling

leaks after

available in

0.008-0.010, 0.020-0.022, 0.040-0.042

tabs

and 0.080-0.082.

plug. Check vacuum unit for

reinstalling

four thickness ranges:

180. OVERHAUL DISTRIBUTOR.

Refer to exploded view of the ignition

distributor for 3 cylinder engines in

Fig. 166.

It is important to properly lubricate

distributor whenever servicing the

Felts

unit

(4, 9, 15,

. lightly saturated with SAE IOW motor oil. When advance unit

bled, fill grooves in top of distributor shaft and lubricate pivot pins with

multi-purpose

lithium base grease.

When installing new breaker points

or adjusting breaker point gap, make certain that

after the point retaining

screws are tightened (11) is properly positioned as shown in Fig. 165.

To renew distributor shaft and/or shaft bushing Remove the vacuum advance assembly

and breaker plates. Remove felt wick

from top of distributor cam (17-Fig.

166) and extract the retainer needle nose pliers. Drive the gear re-

taining pin (31

23) from gear and housing. Press

shaft

(

old bushing

24) out towards top of

(

housing with bushing driver tool No. SW 503 or equivalent

cate outside of new bushing

oil, place flat steel washer against shoulder on driver and press new

bushing in with driver until washer

seats against top inside housing. Ream diameter shaft, insert

of 0.468-0.469. Lightly oil

shaft into

press gear onto

that shaft end play is 0.029-0.042.

Using pin hole in gear as a guide, drill retaining pin hole through new shaft,

then install pin.

After reassembling distributor,

check and

adjust

as outlined in paragraphs

179.

, only the ad-

to decrease the ad-

shims to increase the

(33) is in good

plug. Shims are

and 25)should be

is disassem-

, the ground wire

proceed as follows:

from gear and press

)

with motor

surface of

the bushing to inside

housing and

lower end of shaft so

advance mechanism

177, 178 and

(

16) with

(Nuday

). Lubri-

Page 60

Paragraphs 181-183

Fig. 169-When reinstalling engine

sion

housing

shown

1. 220-300 Ft: Lba.

2. 125-140 Ft: Lbs.

3. 35-50 Ft. Lin.

(engines with stamped steel oil pen)

Tractors

Independent PTO will be equipped with a 11 Inch diameter clutch. Tractors with "live" type PTO will be equipped loaded disc type clutch having a 11 Inch

diameter transmission

81h Inch diameter PTO disc. Tractors with a 10 speed (Select-O-Speed) will have a disc type torque limiting clutch In the flywheel.

bolts

following

to the

with transmission

tighten

tightening torque

cations.

single

with a dual plate spring

clutch disc and an

TRACTOR SPLIT

All Models Except 4200

181. To split the tractor between en-

gine and transmission, first drain

cooling system, disconnect battery

ground cable and proceed as follows: Remove the vertical exhaust muffler if so equipped. Disconnect wiring harness

from support clips under engine hood,

then unbolt and remove the hood. Disconnect proofmeter drive cable at rear end of generator. Remove steering gear side covers from under fuel tank. On 4000 models, disconnect steering drag link from steering gear arm.

On models 2000 and 3000, disconnect

the steering drag links from steering

gear arms and the radius rods from transmission housing on manual steering models. On models with power steering, disconnect drag links from front axle spindle arms and radius rods from front axle, and disconnect power steering fluid return tube from reser-

voir and the power steering pump.

On models with "C" prefix to serial number, unplug the wiring connector located at front of fuel tank. On all

to transmis-

bolts at locations

220-300

engines with cast

(

iron oil pan)

type PTO or

plate dry type

transmission

specifi-

Ft. -Lb..

CLUTCH

Fig. 170-View showing

clutch

pedal free travel ad-

justmentonall single clutch

and late

models

adjustment specifications.

double

Refer

other models, disconnect wiring from

starter relay terminals, generator,

voltage regulator, front lights, oil pres-

sure switch and temperature gage

sending unit.

Remove the shield from above starting motor and reinstall the fuel filter retaining bolts. Unbolt and remove starting motor and the flywheel access cover from plate between engine and transmission. On models so equipped, unbolt and remove the engine driven hydraulic (piston type) pump assembly. Disconnect the rear throttle control rod under fuel tank and disconnect diesel shut-off cable or gasoline carburetor choke cable. Shut off fuel supply valve at tank and disconnect fuel supply line and diesel excess fuel return line. Unbolt fuel tank and rear hood (fuel tank cover) from support brackets on rear end of engine. On

models equipped with horizontal exhaust, disconnect exhaust pipe from muffler under the left step plate. Disconnect transmission oil cooler lines on models so equipped and on model 4000 (except 4110 L.C.G.) remove steering

gear arm to provide clearance for the tubes.

Insert wood wedges between front axle and front support. Place supports under front end of transmission housing and support engine with hoist or rolling floor jack, unbolt engine from transmission and roll the front unit away.

To reconnect tractor between engine and transmission, reverse the procedure used to split tractor. Refer to para-

graph 129 or 131 for bleeding the diesel

fuel system and to paragraph 361 for bleeding the engine driven hydraulic pump assembly. Refer to Fig. 169 for engine to transmission bolt tightening torque.

Model 4200

182. On model 4200, follow same procedures as outlined for other models in paragraph 181; however, disconnect the four power steering

to text

clutch

for

lines

at connec-

Fig. 171-To models change height and

Fig. 172-Drawing pedal

reduce

when

Pro operation Is not

)

clevis pin

free

shown

height(PH)

clutch

clutch pedal height (early

(

from position

pedal adjustment

;

refer

showing (iee.

measurements

equipped

4) to (3).

text.

pedal (FP) and

tractors.

tions under front of fuel tank and ig-

nore reference to other steering compo-

nents. Be sure to adequately support

tricycle front end when separating the

tractor.

LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT

All Models

183. The recommended clutch pedal

free travel is

models or 1'/4 inches fdrlate models. To

adjust the linkage on all single clutch

models and the late double clutch

models which have clutch release shaft

arm with only one hole, refer to Fig.

170. Disconnect adjusting clevis from

clutch release shaft arm, loosen

lockout and turn clevis in or out as

required.

inches for, early

FORD

required,

Pedal

points

for double

are

Page 61

2000

3000-4000

Paragraph 184

174-Exploded

Fig.

1. Clutch disc

2. Pre ssure plate

3. Clutch spring

4 Cover

5. Retainer

6. Link

view

single disc clutch.

(Cerametalllc)

of the

7. Clip

8. Adjusting screw

9 Locknut

10. Washer

11. Dowel

On et)rly double clutch models which have clutch release shaft arm with two holes, both pedal height and free play must be adjusted. Refer to Fig. 171 and proceed as follows: Loosen locknut (1) and carefully depress clutch pedal by hand until free play is just removed. Hold pedal position and back out stop screw'(2) until it contacts housing stop. Refer to Fig. 172 and measure pedal height (PH) from footrest. Pedal height

should be 91/4 inches for early models or

inches for late models. If it is not,

loosen`clevis locknut (6-Fig. 171), remove clevis pin (4) and turn clevis as required until specified pedal height is bbtgined. After adjusting pedal height, turn stop screw (2) until free play, measured at pedal pad, is 11inches on early models or 1Y4 inches on late models.

After completing adjustment on

double clutch models, make an opera-

tional check as follows: Remove pto

cap, engage pto lever and start engine. Push pedal down against footrest (or stop) and check to see if pto shaft stops turning. Make further adjustments as needed until pto clutch fully releases

8 9

Fig. 173-Exploded view of early type

used on three

single

disc Clutch

modelssoequipped.

1. Clutch disc

2. Pressure plate

3. Clutch spring

4 Clutch cover

5. Anti-rattle spring 6 Release lever

7. Strut

8. Pin

9. Eye bolt

10. Adjusting not

when pedal is fully depressed. If proper adjustment cannot be accomplished, overhaul and/or adjust clutch unit.

R&R AND OVERHAUL

Single Clutch Models

Early type clutches used a full cover with four release fingers facings were a full circle fibrous type as

shown In Fig. 173

1969 production August 1971 production ("cerametallic which uses a skeleton type cover with three release fingers as shown in Fig. 174. The "cerametallic

interchangeable with the earlier (prior

units and both the flywheel and

10/69

)

clutch shaft must be renewed if the "care.

metallic

models. Beginning with September 1971

production

discontinued and a clutch similar to the

early full circle (prior 10

Installed

latest full circle type Is not Interchange-

able with the early type as it has square

cut splines which fit the current clutch

shaft that was Introduced with the "cars-

metallic

type clutch Is Installed In early

clutch.

Beginning with October

and continuing through

the "cerametallic

However

184. To remove the clutch unit after tractor is split, remove the retaining cap screws and lift off the unit.

When reinstalling, use a clutch pilot tool and position clutch disc as follows: On all models using full circle disc, except model 4000 with independent

PTO, position disc with long hub toward pressure plate (rearward). On model 4000 with independent PTO,

position disc with long hub toward fly-

wheel (forward). On all models using "cerametallic" disc, position disc with long hub toward flywheel (forward).

Install cover assembly on flywheel

and tighten cover retaining cap screws to 23-30 Ft.-Lbs. of torque.

Place clutch cover on bed of a press or

and clutch disc

a ceramic button

clutch was Installed

clutch units are not

clutch was

69) clutch was

clutch disc of the

cylinder

Fig. 175-

clutch,

heavy arrow, until leverhnk can

When disassembling

pry spring

Fig. 176-Unhooking leverlink.

retainer to side

on clutch disassembly tool. On models with full cover, refer to Fig. 17:3 and remove the four finger adjusting nuts (10).

On (Cerametallic) units carefully

depress spring retainer (5-Fig. 174)

until it clears clutch cover (4) by approximately 4-inch at nearest point. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, pry spring retainer sideways away from release lever pivot (Fig. 175), and unhook each lever link (Fig. 176) in turn, until all three are disconnected.

NOTE: It may be necessary to thread

adjusting screws (8-Fig. 174) into pressure plate for additional finger clearance.

On all models, slowly release the

pressure and disassemble cover unit.

On late models, DO NOT remove re-

lease levers or pivot pins from clutch

cover (4-Fig. 174); unit is available

only as an assembly. Other parts of all clutches are available individually.

Various color-coded clutch spring,

have been used. Renew any springs which are rusted, distorted, heat discolored, cracked, or which fail to meet the test specifications which follow: Note: All springs are tested at a length of 1

11/16 inches except where noted.

Given free lengths and test loads are

recommended minimum.

cerametallic

as shown

unhooked.

Page 62

Paragraph 185

FORD

Fig. 177-Partially

clutch

Fig. 178-Installing

Part No.

C5NN-7572A

assembled view of single

clutch

eyebolt.

plate assembly.

release

pressure

Color

Code

Dark

lever,

Free

Length

33/64

Green/ Cream

C5NN-7572C

Buff/

2 45/64

Lt. Blue

C5NN-7572F

Yellow/

25/8

Lt. Blue

C9NN-7572A

C9NN-7572B

Lt. Blue

Double Stripe

White

2 55/64

213/16

Dbl. Stripe

Assemble by reversing the disas-

sembly procedure. Use new self-locking

adjusting nuts when assembling early

models. Finger height should be as out-

lined in the following table using a new

clutch disc and measuring from friction

surface of flywheel:

Early Model 2000,

3000,4000 ............

All Models

With Cerametallic

1.945-1.965

Clutch ................ 1.

and

strut

(In.)

Lbs. Test

107

150

140

970-2.030

view of double

1. Jam nut

2. Adjusting screw

3. Center link

4. Lever spacers

5. Lever links

6. Strut

Fig. 179-Exploded

7. Retaining clips S. Shim.

9. Adjusting screws

10. Release levers

11. Jam nut.

12. Coveraseembly

Double Clutch Models

185. To remove the clutch after

tractor split, first depress release le-

vers and secure to clutch cover with wire; then unbolt and remove cover assembly. Transmission clutch disc can be renewed after cover is off, to renew pto clutch disc, it will be necessary to disassemble cover. Use a suitable pilot

when reinstalling and leave pilot in

place until levers are unwired. Position

discs with full circle lining with long

hub rearward. Position discs with ce-

ramic buttons with long hub forward.

Tighten clutch cover retaining cap

screws to a torque of 13-15 Ft.-Lbs.

To disassemble the removed double clutch, mount the -unit on a suitable disassembly tool or on the bed of a press and use a tripod fixture to apply pressure to cover (12-Fig. 179). With pressure applied, remove struts (6) and cotter pins retaining release levers

(10). Do not lose or intermix clip shims (8) as levers are removed. Lift off levers and remove pto pressure plate pins (17), then slowly release the pressure and disassemble the clutch unit.

PTO clutch springs (14) on all models are color coded Violet. The springs have an approximate free length of 3

17/64 inches and should test 110-120 lbs. when compressed to a height of

1.95 inches.

Three different transmission clutch

springs (20) have been used. The original production spring was color coded

5 4 3 2 1

clutch assembly.

disc

13.

14. Pro pre a

15. PTO pressure plate

16. Snap rings

17. Pin.

18. PrO friction disc

Fig. 180-Cross used on duel

pto clutch. Gap must be adjusted after clutch Is

ure spring.

clutch.

sectional

19. Intermediate ressure plate

20. Transmission springs

21. Tranami.eiod

pressure plate

22. Pins

of release lever

,view

Gap (G) conhpls

Installed.

release of

Light Blue. This spring had an approximate free length of 3 7/16 inches and tested 120 lbs. when compressed to a height of 2 17/64 inches. The service spring for early models is bolbr' boded Yellow. It has a free length of 3 7/16 inches and should test 92.102 lbs. when compressed to a height of 2 17/64 inches. On late models with Cerametallic button clutch, the transmission

clutch spring is color coded Dark Blue.

This spring has a free length of approx-

Page 63

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs 186-189

imately 31/2 inches and should test 76 lbs. when compressed to a height of 2 17/64 inches. Be sure springs meet test specification and that correct springs are used.

Assemble by

bly procedure. Install

sufficient thickness preload to retaining clip pin is installed

in thicknesses of 0.005, 0.010,

0.020. Set release lever height to 2.110

inches, measured from hub of pto friction disc (18-Fig. 179) to top of adjust-

ing screw

flywheel.

loosening

justing screw (9) as necessary. All levers

must be adjusted to the same height within 0.010 inch.

Adjust pto clutch

ter clutch locknuts (1-Fig. turning screws (2). The gap (G)

adjusting screw and release lever strut

should be set

tractors

pedal return spring type return

0.070-0.074 inch for tractors with

set at internal leaf type pedal return spring.

adjusting screw

Turn

reversing the disassem-

(9), after clutch

Adjust release

locknut(11) and turning ad-

is installed by loosening

with either

spring

clip shims (8) of

to apply

7) when cotter

(

Shims

at 0.050

8) are available

(

is installed on

lever height by

release linkage af-

180) and backing out

-0.054 inch for

an external clutch or an internal coil

. Gap (G)

2) until

(

AUXILIARY

Ford 2000 and 3000 models prior to 1971 production that are equipped with a four speed transmission Auxiliary Transmission providing an overdrive and underdrive for each of the four

gear ranges making possible a

of twelve forward and speeds. This threedirect) tween the mission.

transmission

engine

range

clutch

REMOVE AND REINSTALL

All Models So Equipped

186. Separate (split) tractor between engine and transmission housing as outlined in paragraph 181. Disconnect the clutch release bearing springs (40

-Fig. 182) and remove the bearing. Drain the auxiliary transmission and

main transmission. Remove the socket head screw (1) from auxiliary transmission shift lever (2) and remove the lever. Then, unbolt and remove the auxiliary transmission from mounting flange (49) on front of main transmission housing.

The auxiliary transmission

mounting flange can be removed at

available an

have

three reverse

(over, under and

is interposed be-

and main trans-

a slight

0.015 and

between

should be

correct

selection

^ \ \`^^ Yf9

Fig. 181-Exploded

showing

correct

view of double

parts relationship

for parts identification.

179

gap is obtained, then tighten locknut while holding adjusting screw. All levers must be adjusted to same height.

TRANSMISSION

this time by removing the four cap screws (50) and pulling flange and shims (48) from tractor transmission housing.

Reinstall by reversing removal procedure and check bearing preload as outlined in paragraph 191.

187. SHIFTER RAILS AND

FORKS. To remove shifter rails and forks, the auxiliary transmission must be removed as outlined in paragraph

186. Refer to Fig. 182, remove the retaining cap screws and lift shifter cap assembly (9) from gear case. Remove the two detent caps (6), detent springs (7) and detent balls (8) from shifter cap. Remove lock wires and the drilled head set screws (35) from shifter fingers

(forks) (33). Remove the Welch plugs

(38) from the shifter rod bores at the

rear of the shifter cap, then drive the

shifter rods (39) out the front of shifter cap. Remove the set screw (4) from the interlock bore and remove the interlock (5). Remove the snap ring (13) from the groove on the selector shaft (12) and slide the selector fork (34) and snap ring toward the end of the selector

OVERHAUL

clutch

finger

Refer to Fig.

shaft which is opposite from the

shoulder stop. Remove the Woodruff key (11), then withdraw selector shaft from the shifter cap. Remove selector shaft seal (36).

Wash all parts in a suitable solvent and position the shifter rods (39) and selector shaft (12) in their respective

bores and check for freedom of movement; if binding occurs due to rods or shaft being bent, renew the bent parts. If binding occurs due to rods or shaft being scored, it may be possible to recondition the scored part by using Crocus cloth. Inspect the shifter lingers (forks) (33) and selector fork 134) and renew them if they show signs of con-

tact at points other than the contact pads. Inspect the interlock (5) for flat

spots or signs of scoring and renew if necessary.

188. When reassembling, use new

seal and Welch plugs and proceed as follows: Place the selector shaft oil seal (36) in its bore and drift into position using a socket of proper size. Start the

selector shaft in its bore selector fork shaft. Install Woodruff then slide selector shaft into place and position snap ring in its groove. Start a shifter rod posite

)

sure the end

toward the detent end of shifter cap. Place a shifter finger (fork) (33) over shifter rod so that the recess in shifter

finger will engage selector

Note: The shifter fingers (forks) and shifter rods are identical and can be

interchanged. Position parts and align

the center groove in the shifter rod :39

with the tapped hole in the shifter

finger (33), then secure shifter finger

the drilled head cap screw (35).

with

Install the interlock

socket head cap screw

other shifter rod

(33), then install lock wires in the

drilled head set screws

holes provided in the shifter fingers.

Place the detent balls (8

(7) in their bores and install the detent

6). Install new Welch plugs (10

caps

(

and 38).

Use a new gasket and install shifter cap assembly to gear case making sure the shift fingers engage the shift collars.

189. CLUTCH SHAFT. With

tractor separated

graph 181 and the unit (trained, the clutch shaft (21-Fig. 182) can be removed by unbolting the support U 7)

and pulling the support shaft assembly from the gear case. Remove the roller bearing

thrust washer

34) and snap ring (13) on

(

39) in the bore farthest (op-

(

from the interlock plug and be

with the two grooves is

(

39) and shifter finger

23) from the pilot end of

(

and place the

key in its slot,

(

5) and tighten

4). Install the

(

35) and the

(

and springs

)

split) as in para-

(

and clutch

22) and the

(

fork (34).

Page 64

Paragraph 190

FORD

Fig

1. Cap screw

2. Shift lever

3. Breather

4. Socket head plug

.5. Interlock

6. Detent cape

i. Detent springs

P. Detent halls 9 Shin cover

0 Welch plugs

182-Exploded

view of auxiliary

It. Woodruakey

12. Selector shaft

13. Snap ring

14. Welch

15. Oil .eel

16. Gasket

17. Release hearing

support

18. Setscrews

19. Snap ring

drive shaft (46). Remove the three

socket head screws (18) from front sup-

port (17) and withdraw the clutch

shaft. Remove the snap ring (19) and

press ball bearing (20) from clutch

shaft. Remove

oil seal

(15) using OTC No. 956 bearing puller and slide hammer.

Wash all parts in a suitable solvent, inspect them for damage and renew as necessary.

install new oil

When reassembling

seal (15),press bearing

shaft

and secure with snap ring (19).

Install

the clutch the front support and three socket

head screws

20) onto clutch

(

shaft and bearing in

secure

(18). Note:

Use caution when inserting shaft into

support to avoid damaging

oil seal. Fill

unit with proper lubricant. Place the

l us

with the

transmission that

20. Bell bearing

21. Input (clutch) shaft

22. Boller bearing

23. Washer

24. Snap ring

25. Shift collar

26. coupling

27. Highs gegesr

29. Coupling

29, shiftcollar

Is available for installation

transmission.

thrust washer (23), then the roller bearing (22) on the pilot end of drive shaft (46) and using new gasket, the front support and clutch shaft assembly after making certain that the oil return hole in front

support is on the

bottom.

190. DRIVE

shifter cap

paragraph

and clutch

in paragraph

remove snap ring

SHAFT. With the

assembly removed as in

187 and the

shaft assembly removed as

189, refer

24) from drive shaft

( (46). Then remove front shift collar (25), short spline

(27), rear shift collar (

gear spline sleeve

sleeve

(28), step-down gear (30) and spacer (31) from drive shaft. NOTE. Identify shift

29) so they can be reinstalled in their proper positions. Pull the drive shaft,

30, low range gear

31. Spacer

32. Gasket

33. Shift fork.

34. Shift finger

35. Setscrew.

36. Seal

37. Grommet

38. Welch plug.

39. Shin rail,

install

front support

to Fig

182 and

26), step-up

(

29), long

collars (25 and

in models

with standard shift

40. Clutch release springs

41. Roll pin

42. Transmission case

43. Bearing cup

44. Bearing cone & roller

46. Oil singer

46. Drive shaft

47. Cluster gear shaft

48. Shim.

oil slinger (45) and taper bearing (44) from rear of gear case; then, using a suitable press or puller, remove the taper bearing and oil slinger from the drive shaft. Remove bearing cup (43) from gear case if necessary.

Clean all parts in a suitable solvent,

inspect and renew as necessary.

To reinstall, place oil slinger (45) on drive shaft onto shaft. Place shaft and bearing in

gear case and install spacer

step-down facing rearward. sleeve (28), then position the rear shift collar (29) with teeth toward rear. Install step-up gear (27) with the shift

collar engaging teeth rearward, and the short spline sleeve (26), then position the front shift collar (25) with engaging teeth forward. Install the re-

and press

(30) with hub of gear

gear

four-speed

49. Mounting flange

50. cep screws

51.Gasket

52. Drain plug

53. cap screws

54. Thrust washer

55. Roller bearings

56. Cluster gear

57. Spacer

Thrust washer

taper bearing

(31) and

Install long spline

Page 65

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs

191-196

taining snap ring (24). Then, install shifter cap assembly.

NOTE

and the shifter cap assembly Installed, a bearing pre follows:

and install approximately 0.050 thickness of shims (48) behind the mounting flange. Be sure flat side of mounting

flange is at top and reinstall the flange.

Shims (48) are available in thicknesses of 0.003, 0.005 and 0.012. Position new mounting flange gasket (51), install the auxiliary transmission and mea-

With the drive shaft assembly

load must be established as

191. Remove mounting flange (49)

FOUR

Tractors having a four speed transmission as covered in this section may also be equipped with an auxiliary transmis-

sion Interposed between engine clutch and the four speed transmission Input

shaft. The auxiliary transmission provides

an underdrive ratio for each four speed transmission ratio thus providing twelve forward and

three reverse speeds

mation on the auxiliary transmission refer

to paragraph 186.

193. Transmission lubricant capacity

is 6 quarts. Oil level plug is located on

right rear side of transmission housing.

Recommended lubricant is SAE S0-EP lubricant (Ford specification No. M2C

53-A). Recommended lubricant change interval is after each 1200 hours of service. Filler plug is located in transmis-

sion shift cover; drain plug is located in

rear center of transmission housing.

REMOVE AND REINSTALL

194. To remove the transmission,

first split tractor between engine and

transmission as outlined in paragraph

181, then, remove the steering gear

and fuel tank as a unit from top of transmission. Following procedures outlined in paragraph 284, remove the transmission from rear axle center housing.

Reinstall transmission by reversing

removal procedures. Refill transmission with proper lubricant as outlined

in paragraph 193.

195. SHIFTER RAILS AND FORKS. Shifter rails and forks can be removed after removing transmission top (shift) cover and splitting tractor

direct drive and overdrive

For service infor-

LUBRICATION

OVERHAUL

sure drive shaft end play. Now, remove shims from behind the mounting flange so that drive shaft has zero end play plus removing an additional 0.005 thick shim to preload the drive shaft

bearing.

Fill unit with specified lubricant and install the clutch shaft as outlined in paragraph 189.

192. CLUSTER GEAR AND SHAFT. Remove the drive shaft assembly as outlined in paragraph 190. Refer to Fig. 182 and drift the cluster

shaft (47) out toward rear of gear case and catch cluster gear (56) and thrust

SPEED TRANSMISSION

between transmission and rear axle center housing as outlined in paragraph 284.

Disconnect starter safety switch wire from switch, unbolt and remove shift lever and transmission top cover assembly (see Fig. 183) and remove the

1st-3rd shift rail detent spring (9-Fig.

184) and detent ball (10). Loosen lockout (12) and remove the 1st-3rd shifter fork lock screw (11), then re-

Fig.

183

Exploded

shift cover.

sion

1. Shift knob

2. Oust seal

3. Shift lever

4. Pin

5. Cover assembly

6. Gasket

7. Starter safety switch

Refer

of shift mechanism.

of four-speed

view

to Fig.

184

transmis-

for remainder

8. Switch plunger

9. Filler plug

19. Gasket

1. Spring

12 S ring seat

13^ Neutral latch

washers (54 and 58) as shaft is driven out. Remove the roller bearings (55) and spacer (57) from cluster gear.

shaft for wear. If wear or damage is

found on any of the parts, it is roconimended that the cluster shaft, gear and

bearings

however

of the

is toward front of gear case. Reassemble balance of parts and reinstall in tractor.

move shift rail (4) and fork (13). Remove shift plate pivot screws (27) from both sides of transmission housing, then remove the shift plates (19 and

20). Remove the detent ball caps 123), springs (25) and detent balls (26) from both sides of transmission housing.

Remove the cup plugs (1) from rear face

of housing at shift rail (2 and 3) bores,

loosen the lock nuts (7 and 15), remove the lock screws (8 and 14), then remove the reverse shift rail (3) and fork (6) and the 2nd-4th shift rail (2) and fork (16).

and reinstall by reversing removal procedure. The square cornered slots in the reverse and 2nd-4th shift rails

must face inward for engagement with

shift plates.

(CLUTCH SHAFT). (Note: On models

equipped with auxiliary transmission, refer to paragraphs beginning with

186). The main drive (input) gear (clutch shaft) can be removed after splitting engine from transmission as outlined in paragraph 181. However, if bearing adjustment is required, the

transmission assembly must be completely removed from tractor; refer to

paragraph 194.

bearing springs and remove the release

bearing and hub from bearing support

(1-Fig. 185). Unbolt the bearing sup-

port from transmission housing and

remove the support and main drive

gear (6) as an assembly. Remove main drive gear, bearing cone (5), bearing cup (4) and oil seal (3).

and reassemble as follows: Install new seal in support with lip of seal to rear (towards bearing.) Drive new bearing cup into support and new bearing cone

Check cluster gear, hearings and

be renewed

Reassembly procedure is evident;

Renew any worn or damaged parts

196. MAIN DRIVE GEAR

Disconnect the clutch release

Renew any worn or damaged parts

keep in mind that the larger

two end gears of the cluster gear

as a unit.

of a three-speed plus reverse

gea-r-un-t __

slightly. Disconnect

safety switch

Page 66

Paragraphs 197-199

FORD

and attach a pull scale to cord; a steady

pull of 22-44 pounds should be required to rotate shaft with shift forks in neutral position. Note: A stub shaft must be installed to check bearing preload if equipped with power take-off. Add or

remove shim between bearing retainer (or PTO support) and housing to obtain

proper preload. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.003,

Reinstall main shaft and gear as-

sembly by

reversing removal ororp-

0.005

and 0.012.

Paragraph 204

Fig. 186-Exploded

parts

ciated

1. Shift knob

2. Snag ring

rin

ainer

4. fi t

5. 0-ring

6. Range shift lever

Main shin lever

Grommet

Cover

pio

'9nsher

view of shift cover and asso-

used

21 20 2I2

six

speed transmission.

12. washer

13. Stop plate

14. Switch wire

15. Safety switch

16. Plunger

17. Bell

18. spring

20. Retainer

21, Shift all

22 Gate

FORD

by reversing the disassembly procedure.

When reinstalling cover, be sure to reconnect the safety switch wires and check to be sure locating pin (19-Fig.

188) in cover enters positioning hole in retainer (20). Tighten cover retaining

cap screws to a torque of 25-30 Ft.-Lbs.

sure

Check to be

properly before releasing tractor for service. -

204. SHIFT RAILS AND FORKS.

Refer to Fig. 190 for exploded view. Upper shift rails, forks and associated parts can be removed for service after removing shift cover as outlined in

Fig. 188-installed view of safety

and associated parts

Into top cover and

pressed

in retainer (20).

fication and to Fig

Positioning dowel (19) Is

Refer to

189

cover.

shift rails

switch

locating hole

enters

186 for parts identi-

Fig.

for assembled view of

paragraph 203 and transmission rear support plate as'in paragraph 206. High speed shift fork (13) slides on an extension of reverse idler shaft (17) and

removal is outlined in paragraph 208.

Be sure to recover detent ball ^(9), spring (8) and plunger (7) for each rail as unit is plunger (

6) lies in a bore in transmis-

sion housing wall between highl rail (4) and low/intermediate Plunger can be removed with a suitable magnet after removing plug (5) and rail (4). The transmission housing

is interchangeable on 8-speed models

bore for shift rails

speed units.

Install by

cedure. Be sure the tang on reverse

fork (12) properly high speed fork (13) during assembly.

Also be sure that interlock pin (6) is

Fig. 189 cover

Assembled view of transmission

viewed from

for parts identification.

bottom.Refer

top

to Fig. 186

properly positioned between the rails

(3 & 4). Tighten set screws and lock

safety switch operates

disassembled

with the one used

, and the left-hand

remains

reversing

the removal pro-

engages

. Interlock

reverse

rail (3).

vacant on 6-

the notch in

1. Transmission housing

2. High/low shift rail intermediate

3. Low/

rail

4. High/reverse rail

5. Plug

6. Interlock pin

7. Plug

6. Spring

9. Detent ball

10. connector

11. Low/

intermediate

fork

Page 67

2000-3000-4000

Paragraphs

205-206

191-Assembled

Fig.

shaft and clutch release

view of transmission input

mechanism

clutch models.

single

nuts to a torque of 20-25 Ft: Lbs.

205. INPUT SHAFT, CLUTCH

RELEASE BEARING SUPPORT

AND FRONT SUPPORT PLATE. On models with

transmission

single disc

input shaft

can be re-

moved after splitting tractor between engine and transmission housing as outlined in

paragraph

181. On dual clutch models, clutch release mechanism,

bearing

support and pto. input shaft can be removed for service after front split, but removal of transmission input shaft will require transmission removal as outlined in paragraph 202.

On all models, drain transmission and make clutch split. Disconnect pedal linkage and on models so equipped, unhook clutch return spring from stop on inside of clutch housing. Refer to Fig. 191. Remove the bolt securing clutch

release

fork to shaft and withdraw the shaft; then lift out clutch release bearing, hub and

spring. Re-

move the inner circle of cap curing shaft sleeve to front plate and withdraw the sleeve. On dual clutch models, pto input shaft will be removed with sleeve. Remove outer bolt circle

retaining

support plate

and withdraw

the plate; noting, on dual clutch models, that plate must come straight forward until free of pto countershaft front bearing.

On single clutch models, unseat snap

ring (10-Fig. 193) and withdraw input

Fig. 192fxploded

Transmission

view of front

Input shaft

support

(14-Fig.

used on

clutch,

screws se-

plate and

193) will remain support plate.

Fig.

193-

Transmission

10. Snapring

11A. Snap ring(Trans

pia)

118. Snap ring

12. Plate

13. Bearin

14. Input

15. Pilot bearing

16. Snap ring

(Live pto)

shag

upper shafts, gears and

17. Thrust washer

18. Intermediate gear

19. Shift collar

20. Connector

21. Low gear

22. Thrust washer 30. Bearing plate

23. Reveres gear

24. Shin roller

shaft (14) and bearings. On dual clutch models (with transmission removed), remove bearing (41-Fig. 194) using a suitable puller, and unseat and remove snap ring (42). Remove snap ring (64) coupling (63) and snap ring (62) from rear of pto countershaft; then drift countershaft and rear bearing (61) rearward until drive gear (44) can be removed. Transmission input shaft can now be removed by unseating snap ring (10-Fig. 193) and withdrawing shaft and bearing (13). Refer to Fig.

195 for differences between single

clutch and dual clutch models.

Assemble by reversing the removal procedure.Tighten cover retaining cap screws to a torque

associated

with

parts used on dual clutch

transmission

of 23-30 Ft.-Lbs.

1, oil seal

2. PTO shaft bearing

3. Shaft sleeve

4. Gasket

6. Front support plate

6. PrO shaft oil seal

7. Snap

ring

8. PTOshaft bearing

9. PTOinputaheft

and Is not removed

models.

with front

36 31 38 39 40

associated

parts used

25. Connector

26. Snapring

27. Snapring

28. Bearing

29. Malnsheft

31. Pilot bearing

32. Shift cover

206. REAR PTO DRIVE SHAFT AND

TERSHAFT

rear support plate associated parts can splitting tractor between transmission and rear axle center housing as outlined in paragraph 284. On dual clutch models it will be necessary to remove

transmission as outlined in paragraph

202 and front support plate as in para-

graph 205.

Remove locking wire and rear cover

cap screws

pry support plate from its doweled posi-

tion on transmission housing. On dual clutch models,remove pto

front bearing (41-Fig. 194) using it

suitable puller;remove snap then bump pto countershaft ward until rear plate

dowels. PTO output shaft will be removed with rear plate; remove snap ring (

64), coupling

(62), then bump the pto output shalt

rearward out of plate.

Transmission output shaft

193) and secondary countershaft (54Fig. 194)will remain in transmission housing.Refer to Fig withdraw secondary countershaft until front bearing clears housing bore, then lower countershaft to bottom of com-

In six speed

33. Output shaft

34. Range gear

35. Thrust washer

36. Rear support plate

37. Bearing

38. snap ring

39. Seal sleeve 40 Oil -al

SUPPORT PLATE,

SHAFT, OUTPUT

SECONDARY COUN-

. On single clutch models,

(36-Fig. 193) and

be removed after

On single clutch models,

countershaft

(36) is free of

(63) and snap ring

196. Partially

models.

ring (42),

(57) rear-

(33-Fig.

Page 68

Paragraphs

207-209

FORD

Fig. 194-Transmission

5. Front support plate 46. Bearing

36. Rear support plate 47. Countershaft main

41. Bearing gear

42. Snap ring 48. Countershaft

43. Thrust washer 49. Bearing

44. PTO drive gear

45. Snap ring 51. Shia collar

partment

withdrawn

lower

shafts,gears

50. Snap ring

Output shaft can now be

and secondary countershaft can be lifted out after output shaft is removed'.

Secondary countershaft front

bearing ( from shaft

puller; and two 3/16-2 inch bolts inserted apply pressure to inside of

53-Fig. 194

)

can be removed

using a suitable press or

in holes provided, to

steel rods or

inner race of

bearing.

Assemble byreversing the disas-

sembly procedure.

port plate attaching

Tighten rear sup-

cap screws to a

torque of 23-30 Ft.-Lbs.

207. MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY. To remove the transmission mainshaft assembly

29-Fig

(

193), first remove

transmission from tractor and remove front support plate

rear support plate,

input and output shafts and the shift mechanism as previously outlined.

Remove snap ring

(

16) from front of

shaft and withdraw thrust washer (17).

Remove the two cap screws retaining bearing plate(30) and lift out the plate;

then slide

rearward while

tors, thrust washer and top opening. and 24) with their (20 and 25). but. matched, and should

29) and bearing (28)

shaft

(

lifting gears

couplings out

Keep sliding

couplings (19

respective couplings

Units are interchangeable

not be inter-

connec-

and associated parts used

pto.

52. Snap ring 58. Bearng

53. Bearing 59. Oil seal

54. Secondary 60. Snap ring

countershaft

55. Reverse idler 62. Snap ring

56. Reverse idler shaft 63. PTO coupling

57. Pro drive shaft

mixed.

Use Figs. 193 and 197 as guides if necessary, and assemble by reversing the disassembly procedure. Tighten bearing retaining plate cap screws to a torque of 72-96 inch-pounds. -

208. REVERSE IDLER. To remove the reverse idler shaft and associated parts, first remove transmission mainshaft as outlined in paragraph 207.

Remove the idler shaft set screw from outside left of transmission housing. Move shaft forward and lift out high speed fork (13-Fig. 190) and its accompanying sliding coupling: then slide shaft,rearward while lifting out reverse idler gear (55-Fig: 194).

Be sure to install the gear with long hub forward, and make sure high speed fork is installed and properly engaging the groove of high speed pling. Tighten idler shaft retaining set screw to a torque of 15-18 Ft.-Lbs.

209. MAIN COUNTERSHAFT. With transmission mainshaff removed as outlined iii' paragraph -207 and reverse idler removed as in paragraph 208, remove main countershaft (48Fig. 194) as follows:

Remove snap ring (52) from front end of secondary countershaft bearing bore and snap ring (50) from rear of main

six speed models

61. PTO bearing

64. Snoring

sliding 'cou-

with live

LIVE P.T.O.

Fig. 195-View

train in Liye PTO models

PTO models(right els, PTO

transmission conntershafl

Fig. 196-With withdrawn and lowered

output shaft assembly can

197-Cross

Fig.

showing

drive

shaft

secondary countershaft

sectional

showing shift

gears

TRANSMISSION P.T.O.

differences

left) and Transmission

(

On Transmission pie mod-

(

57-Fig. 194) splines into

(

48) as

floor of housing,

be removed.

of transmission

view

collars.

countershaft rear bearing (49). Using a step plate of proper

in front bore of

size

hollow shaft, a suitable drift and heavy hammer, bump the shaft rearward until both bearings are.:, free of bores

and shaft is loose in transmission

housing. Move the shaft rearward until cluster gear (47) is adjacent to housing

center wall and insert wooden pro-

tector blocks between gear and wall; then continue to bump countershaft rearward until front bearing (46) is free and cluster gear can be removed.

Install shaft and components by re-

versing the removal procedure.

in pto

shown.

drive

partially

Page 69

2000-3000-4000

EIGHT-SPEED TRANSMISSION

Paragraphs

210-212

21 22

19 -cs^e 19

Fig. 198-Exploded

assembly

4000.Shift

pressed steel

used

cover

late production shift

view of8-

on early

may be either

(

10A). Refer

speed

cast

shift cover

iron (10) or

or 200 for

models 2000,3000 and

to Fig. 199

cover assemblies.

(Models 2000

Fig. 199-Exploded

Iron

(71) and retainer

cover assembly

shift

shift rail

low shift rail

30. High

40. Shift cover 71. Safety switch

61. Shift lever atop plate 72. Switch retainer 61A. Slidingplate 73. Spring 61B. Washer 74. Steel ball

62. Cap screws 75. switch plunger

69. Locatingpin 76. Starterwiring

, 3000

view of late production

Starter safety switch

(

72) are

(

30) instead of in

mounted

REMOVE AND REINSTALL

211. To remove transmission, first

split tractor between engine and trans-

mission as

or 182, then remove steering gear assembly (steering support on model

4200) and fuel tank from top of transmission as a unit. Following procedures outlined in paragraph 284 or 299, remove the transmission assembly

outlined in paragraph 181

and 4000)

high-low

cover.

70. Dowel

Fig.

cast

200-Exploded

pressed steel shift cover

30. High-low shirt rail 70. Dowel

40A. Shift cover 71. Safety switch

61F. Washers 72. Switch retainer

N. Lever atop plate 73. Spring

67. Self-locking nuts 74. steel ball

68. Locatingpin 76. Switch plunger

199 for

from rear axle center housing.

Reinstall transmission by reversing

removal procedure.

OVERHAUL

212. SHIFT COVER. On model

4200 rowcrop, remove the operator's platform. Then, on all models, proceed as follows:

On early production transmissions

with starter safety switch on top of

view of late production

assembly

cast iron

cover.

76. Wiring

Refer to

Fig.

1. Main shift lever

2. High-low shift lever

3. Pin

4. Duatcovera

5. Snap rings Starter safety switch

'•0' ring

Switch plunger

Roller

10.

Cast iron cover

10A.

Steel cover

11.

Springs

12. Retainers

13. Sliding plate

14. Lever atop plate

15. Washer

16. Baffleplete

17. Switch plunger

retainer

16. Support plate

19. Switch connector

20. Washers

21. Bameplate

22. Batlieplate

LUBRICATION

210. Transmission lubricant capacity

is 17 quarts; maintain lubricant to

level of plug located on right side of transmission housing just behind brake pedals. Recommended lubricant is SAE 80-EP gear lubricant (Ford specification No. M-2053-A). Recommended lubricant change interval is after each 1200 hours pf service. Filler plug is located in transmission shift cover; drain plug is at rear center of transmission housing.

Fig. 201-Exploded view

transmission

speed mechanism as used

2000,3000

models

Refer to

shift cover assembly and

Fig. 199 or 200 for late pro-

duction shift covers.

1. Retainer

2. Spring

3. Plunger

4. Pin

5. Selector turn

6. 4th,low & 8th shift fork

7. Interlock pine

8. Plug

9. 4th & 8th shift rail

10. 2nd, 6th is reverse shift .it

11. 7-3, 5-1 shift rail

12. High-low shift rail

13. Detent bans (4)

14. aging. (4)

15. Plungers (4)

16. 2nd, 6th&reverse fork

17. Connector

t8. 7-3, 5-1 shift fork

19. Gate

20. High-low shift fork

21. Oil level plug

Fig.198 for

and

of 8-

shift

4000.

early

9 10 11 12

` r c

c O^ 1 ^/

Page 70

Paragraph 213

Fig. 202

shift mechanism for 6-speed

transmission on

2000,3000 & 4000

Fig. 201 for exploded view.

Late safety switch Is not shown

on high-low shift rail

Assembled view of

production

Figs. 199 and

models

Refer to

starter

;

refer

200.

Fig. 205

bearing with special puller

Removing PTO

countershaftfront

(

Nuday toot No. SW-

501).

FORD

W.UNGER

Fig. 203-View showing

tent

plungers, springs and

retained by

Fig. 204-View of front

location

transmission

sembly.

balls.

and of transmission as-

of shift rag de-

shift

shift cover, disconnect wiring, then unbolt and remove shift cover assembly. Refer to Fig. 198 for guide to disassembly and reassembly of cover. Starter safety switch plunger (8-Fig.

198) should measure 0.990-0.995 on models with steel cover (10A) or 1.315-

Plungers are

cover.

RELEASE SHAFT

RETURN SPRING

1.320 on models with cast iron cover

(10). Tighten safety switch retainer,

roller support and shift lever stop plate

cap screws to a torque of 14-17 Ft.-Lbs.

When reinstalling cover, install dowel

cap screw without a washer in left rear corner of cover and install cap screws with lockwashers in remaining holes. Tighten dowel cap screw first, then tighten remaining cap screws to a torque of 23-29 Ft.-Lbs. Be sure that engine starter can be engaged only when main gear change lever is in neutral position.

On late production transmissions,

unbolt and lift shift cover assembly,

then disconnect wiring (76-Fig. 199 or

200) from starter safety switch (71), then remove shift cover from transmis-

sion

. The starter safety switch can now be serviced at this time. Other than components shown in Figs. 199 or 200, shift lever

assemblies are same as

shown in exploded view in Fig. 198. When reinstalling cover, be sure that dowel pin (70-Fig. 199 or 200) and switch retainer locating pin 69-Fig. 199 or 68-Fig. 200) are in place and

reconnect wiring to starter safety switch. Be sure dowel pin and retainer locating pin properly engage shift cover as it is being lowered into place. Tighten cover retaining cap screws to a torque of 23-29 Ft.-Lbs. Be sure that starter will engage only when high-low

shift lever is in neutral position.

213. SHIFT RAILS AND FORKS. To remove the shift rails and forks, it is necessary to first remove the sion from tractor (refer to paragraph

211), remove top cover (paragraph

212), remove input shaft and front support plate (paragraph 214) and the rear support plate, PTO driveshaft, output

shaft assembly and secondary counter-

transmis-

Fig. 206-Driving pilot bearing from rear and

main drive Input

shaft (

paragraph exploded view in Fig

. 201, to the

of the

Fig. 202 and proceed as

(

clutch)shaft.

215). Then, refer to

shift mechanism

assembled view in

follows:

Remove the four detent plungers and

springs(see Fig

. 203) from their bores.

Remove a detent ball as each corresponding shift rail is removed. Move

the high-low shift rail rearward until

sliding coupling

(see Fig. 212) can be removed from mainshaft and high-low shift fork. Note: On late production

transmission

, refer to Fig. 199 or 200 and remove starter safety switch (71) and retainer (72) as high-low shift rail (30) is being removed. Turn the rail so that locknut can be loosened and the

set screw

fork and

opening locknut can screw removed from connector end of rear of housing connector

removed from high-low shift

remove

the fork out rear

. Then, turn the rail so that

be loosened

and the set

shaft, withdraw the shaft from

and remove the

and detent ball. Loosen the

on front

lockouts and remove the set screws from remaining

shift forks

and arms, withdraw the rails one at a time from rear of housing and remove

the forks,

Page 71

2000

3000

000 Paragraph 214

eight-speed

port

late

view of

ratios

Gear

13A Bearing plate

retaining ring

13B. Bearing plate

14. Bearing

15. Transmission input

(clutch) shaft

16. Snap ring

17. Thrust washer

18. 3rd ear

shift collar

20. Connector

21. let gear

22, Thrust washer

Fig. 207-Exploded

208 for model 4000 transmission

per gear for Identification

Oil Seal

Needle bearing

3. Clutch release

bearing support Gasket

Front su

Gasket

Oil Seal

Snap ring6

Bearin

Dowel pins

PTO input shaft

12. Snap ring

13. Snap ring

arms and detent balls. Note: The 4th8th shift fork is located on the reverse idler shaft; refer to paragraph 217 for shaft and fork removal procedure. Remove the ipterlock.plunger bore plug (see Fig. 215) and the two interlock plungers (7-Fig. 201).

To reassemble, proceed as follows: Insert the 4th-8th shift arm in socket of shift fork and install upper 4-8th shift

PTO)

("live"

Refer to Fig

of early and late production

splined

transmission gears

216 for drawing showing relative gear location

into countershaft

23. Reverse gear

M. Thrust washer

25. Shiftcollar M. Connector

27. 2nd

28. Bearing cup

29. Bearing cone & roller

30. Bell bearing

31. Snap ring

32. Thrust washer

33. PTO countershaft

34. na ring

rail through housing and arm so that set screw tighten the torque of 20-25 Ft.-Lbs. and move rail to neutral position. Next, install the 2nd-6th/reverse shift rail and fork, tighten set screw and locknut to a torque of 20-25 Ft.-Lbs. and move rail to neutral position. Insert second interlock plunger against the shift rail, then install remaining shift rails, forks and

(37) and P70

gear

holes are aligned

shafts

differ.On

set screw

and related

models

drive gears(11

35. Ball bearing

36. Countershaft main

37, Bounterahaft

38. Ball bearing

39. Roller bearing

40. Main shaft

41. Bearingcup

42. Bearing one&roller Q. Shift collar

U. Output shaft

45. Output shaft gear

45A. Bushing

parts as used on models 2000

with transmission

and33)

, install and

and locknut to a

when Installed in transmission

type PTO (

are not used.

46 Thrust washer

47. Bearing cone & roller

48. Bearingcup

49. Dowel pins

50. Gasket

51. Rear support plate

52. Oil seal

53. She..

54. Bearingaupport

55. Res ring

56. Sliding gear ring

57. Sear

58. Balearing

connector,

single

tightening

, 3000 and 4110;

disc clutch

locknuts to a torque and install interlock plunger bore plug. Insert detent balls, springs and plungers in

their bores on top of shift

rails and move all shift rails to neutral

position.

214. INPUT SHAFT, CLUTCH

RELEASE BEARING

AND FRONT SUPPORT PLATE. On all models without a PTO and on

refer

for number

and

), P70 shalt (60) is

59. Sernmlary

nmrolmn

60 PTO

bearing

61 Ball b beari

62. Oil seal

63. Sna ing

64. Ball bearing

65. Snap ring

66. PTO coupling sleeve

67. Snap ring

69. e idler

69. Idler Idler Shalt

70. Plug (w/o PTO)

set screws and

of 20-25 Ft.-Lbs.

SUPPORT

shali

Fig.

teeth

Page 72

Paragraph

214 Cont.

FORD

Fig. 208-Exploded view of model 2000,

3000

to Fig. 217 for diagram showing gear location and for

1. Clutch release

bearing support

2. Gasket 17. Ball hearing

3. Fronteupportplate

4. Gasket

5. Oil seal

6. Snap ring

7. Bell bearing

Snap ring

PTO drive shaft

10.

Dowel pins

11.

Oil Beal

12.

Snap ring

13.

Snap ring

14.

Ball beanng

15.

Retainer

and 4110. On models with transmission type PTO, Items 75 through

16. Transmission input (clutch)shaft

18. Snap ring

19. Thrust washer

20. 3rd

ear

21. Shifcollar

22. Connector

23. let gear

Thrust washer

25. Reverse gear

26. Thrust ...her

27. Shift collar

28, Connector

29. 2nd gear

30. Bearing cup

models 2000 and 3000 with "transmission type" PTO,

transmission input

shaft can be removed after splitting tractor between sion housing

engine and transmis-

as outlined in paragraph

181 or 182. On model 4000 with PTO and on models 2000 and 3000 with "live" PTO (double clutch), sary to remove the

transmission as out-

it is neces-

lined in paragraph 211. With transmission removed

or with tractor

4000 eight-speedtransmission

31. Bearing cone & roller

32. Ball hearing

33. Snap ring M. Thrust washer

35. PTO countershaft 48. Bearing cone & roller

36. nap ng

37. Ball bearing

38. Couhterahaft main

39.

40. Ball bearing

41. Mein shaft

42. Bearing cup

43. Bearing cone&roller

44. Shift collar

tween engine and transmission, as

required, proceed as follows:

equipped, fork

transmission housing.

from

from housing and removefork. clutch release bearing and hub assembly from support

split be-

remove bearing support from front

transmissions

ear

ntershng

gear

have different

Refer to Fig. 204 and on

disengage

return spring

release

fork,

gears

, shafts and related parts; refer

identification by number

45. Output shaft

46. Output shaft gear

46B. Bushing

47. Thrust washer

49. Bearing cup

51. Dowel pins

62. Gasket

58. Rearsupportplate

Oil seal

55. Shims

56. Bearing support

57. Sna

68. Shift collar

69. snapring

60. Ball hearing

gear ratios.

ring

are used

models so

the clutch from

release

stop inside

Remove the bolt

slide release shaft

Remove

then unbolt and

Fig.

instead of 1, 5, 6,

of teeth.

61. Secondary

countershaft 72. Snap ring

62. PTO countershaft

(independent PrO)

62T. PPO countershaft

(transmission PTO)

63. Reverse idler U. Idler shaft

65. Ball bearing .

Oil seal

67. Snap ring

68. Ball bearing

69. sna rig

70. Hydraulic pump

drive gear

Early

7, 8, 9,

and late

models

207 for

and 11. Refer

production

71. Shield

73,Plug

74. PT()

(transmission PTO)

75. Clutch shaft

76. Clutch release

bearin

77. Oil seal

Ball hearing

79. PTO drive gear

80. T}ensmiasion drive (input) shaft

support plate. On models 2000 and 3000 with "live" PTO and on model 4000 with independent PTO, PTO input shaft will be removed with

bearing support

. Then,

remove front support plate fromtransmission housing

. NOTE: On models

2000 and 3000 with "live" PTO and on

all 4000 with PTO, the PTO countershaft front

bearing is

located in front

support plate and plate must be removed squarely.

(w/o no)

coupling sleeve

support

unbolt and

Page 73

2000

Fig. 209

Fig. 210-Transmission

must

Fig. 211-Secondary

can be

Inserted through

3000-4000

rear support plate and

Removing

PTO countershaft assembly.

be removed and reinstalled In conjunction

with

the secondary

removed by

the

IARYtCOUNTEnsHAE

output shaft

countershaft assembly.

countershaft front bearing

pressing

shaft

race as

against steel

against

shown.

inner

assembly

pins

bearing

Fig. 212-View showing-rear

output shalt

shaft

assembly

assembly and

removed.

'disassembly

transmission

secondary

Refer to

procgdure.

text

On model 4000 with PTO, refer to Fig. 208 and unbolt shield (71) on models equipped with independent PTO. Then, on all model 4000, remove snap ring (72) from rear end of PTO countershaft, gear (70) or coupling (74) and remove the snap ring (69) from transmission rear support plate.

On models 2000 and 3000 with live PTO, refer to Fig. 207 and remove snap ring (67) and coupling (66) from rear end of PTO countershaft, then remove snap ring (65) from transmission rear support plate.

On models 2000 and 3000 with live

PTO and all 4000 with PTO, refer to Fig. 205 and remove the PTO countershaft front bearing as shown. Then, remove the snap ring and thrust washer from front end of PTO countershaft, bump the countershaft rearward out of transmission and lift the PTO countershaft gear out of front opening in transmission housing.

On all model 4000, unbolt the trans-

mission input shaft hearing retainer (15-Fig. 208) and remove input shaft, bearing and retainer' assembly. The pilot bearing (17) should be removed with the input shaft and can be re-

moved from shaft as shown in Fig. 206.

On all models 2000 and 3000, remove

the snap ring (12-Fig. 207) and pull the input shaft and bearing (14) as-

sembly from transmission. The pilot bearing (39) for transmission mainshaft can also be removed at this time if not removed with input shaft.

To reassemble transmission, reverse

removal procedures. On model 4000

with independent PTO, tighten the

shield (71-Fig. 208) retaining cap

screws to a torque of 23-30 Ft.-Lbs. and

install new locking wire through rear

support retaining cap screw heads. On

model 4000, tighten input shaft

bearing retainer cap screws to a torque

with

counter-

for further

Paragraph

NDICCATOR STAND"

Fig. 213-Checking

-Removing bearing

Fig. 214

countershaft.

main however, bearing removal on

F(g. 215-View showing

idler shaft retaining

verse

Disregard special

Interlock

is not used at this

of 23-30 Ft

transmission

play with dial Indicator.

Model

and 4110 Is

Ln1,uGn

ratio

duction tractors.

Lbs. On all models

214 Cont.

output

from rear and of

4000 shaft Is

models

similar.

aunt n.ub.

Interlock bore

and oil drain plug.

boll

Interlock

bore plug as

location

on U.S. pro-

front support plate and clutch release

bearing support retaining cap screws to a torque of 23-30

.Ft.-Lbs.

shalt end

shown;

2000, 3000

plug, re-

tighten

Page 74

Paragraph 215

Fig. 216-Diagram showing gear location

4000.Number

transmissions have different gear ratios

15. Transmission input Iclutch)sheft

l8. 3rd gear

19. Shift collar

21, fat gear

of teeth on gear is indicated by number with "T" suffix

number of

on early production gears

teeth

23. Reverseggear

25. Shifcollar

27. 2nd gear

38. Countershaft main

Per

16 26 21 23gO1 25 4L 21 29 "" 41 44 46 45

on models 2000,3060

;

number

of teeth

are on

37. Countershaft

40. Main ,haft

43. Shift collar

45. Output shaft gear

40 43 45 PTO DRIVE SHAFT

1 TERSHAFT. On all models not

56 59 front support plate and the PTO driven

and 4110

;

refer to Fig

on late production

or Immediately adjacent

Early and late production

gears

to gear.

56. Sliding gear

59. Secondary

68. Reverse idler

217 for model

are circled and

countershaft

gg1 I free of bore in housing

FORb

215. REAR SUPPORT PLATE,

, OUTPUT

SHAFT AND

equipped with power take-off and on models 2000 and 3000 with transmission typo PTO, the rear support- plate, PTO drive shaft (if so equipped), output shaft and secondary countershaft can be removed after splitting tractor between transmission housing and rear axle center agraph 284 or 299. On other models, it

will be necessary to remove the trans-

mission as outlined in paragraph 211.

With the transmission removed or tractor split

axle center housing,proceed as follows:

On models 2000 and 3000 with "live" PTO and all 4000 equipped with PTO, refer to paragraph 214 and remove the clutch release shaft, bearing support,

gear from front compartment of transmission housing.

On all models

and remove

rear support plate to housing support plate loose on models not equipped and 3000 with transmission

On 4000 with PTO and 2000

with live PTO' bump the PTO countershaft rearward to loosen rear support

plate

Then

209 and remove the rear suppprt plate

and, if so equipped

assembly. With reaf` support plate removed, pull the seconda'r`y countershaft rearward

the transmission output- shaft assembly and the secondary countershaft as shown in Fig. 210.

SECONDARY COUN-

housing

at transmission and rear

the cap screws retaining

with PTO

on all models

as outlined in par-

, cut the locking wire

or on models 2000

, the 70 shaft as an

until front bearing is

, then withdraw

. Pry the

type PTO.

and 3000

. refer to Fig.

Fig.

217-Diagram

4110.Number of

tion

transmissions have

15. Transmission input

wh,mhl shall

20. 3rd ge

21. Shift collar

23. 1,tgear

showing gear

teeth on eachgear Is indicated by numbers with "T" suffix

of teeth on early gears are

location

different geltr ratios

25. Reversegear

27. Shift collar 38 Countershaft main

gear

on model 4000;refer to Fig.216 for models

;

number of teeth of late gears ere

on or

Immediately adjacent

39. Countershaft

41. Main shaft

44. Shiftcollar

45. outputahaft

2000, 3000

Early and Into produc-

circled and number

to gears.

46. Outputahaf gear

58.Slidin gear

61. Seconder

countershaft

Reverseidler

68.

Disassemble components as follows: Remove the snap ring retaining PTO coupling or hydraulic pump drive gear to rear end of PTO shaft and remove the coupling

or gear

at rear side of PTO shaft bearing-in rear support and drive or press shaft and bearing out to rear of support plate. Remove PTO shaft support plate. Drive the oil @eal, then the output output shalt

bearings

shaft rear bearing cup, from

bearing retainer

from secondary

if necessary;refer to Fig

bearing removal procedure; press, the

output shaft from and bearing cone, than remove bearing

and

cone from front end of shaft. Carefully

inspect all

parts and renew any that

are excessively worn or damaged:

Reassemble components and reinstall in transmission by reversing removal and disassembly. procedure and by observing the following: Install oil

. Remove snap ring

seal from rear

countershaft

. 211. For front

gear

, thrust washers

Remove

Page 75

3000-4000

2000

seals with lips to inside of transmission (forward). Be sure that the high-low coupling is engaged on teeth, on rear end of mainshaft and that snap ring is

in groove in lower bearing bore of transmission housing; refer to Fig. 212. Place the secondary countershaft and the output shaft assembly into rear

compartment of transmission as shown

in Fig. 210. Then, align front bearing of

secondary countershaft with bore in

housing and bump the shaft and

bearing assembly forward until front

bearing seats against snap ring. Install

rear support plate with new gasket, but

without output shaft bearing retainer

or PTO shaft. Tighten rear support

plate retaining cap screws to a torque

of 24-30 Ft.-Lbs. Insert PTO shaft and bearing into rear of transmission, place PtO gear in front compartment and

slide the shaft through the gear. Bump

the shaft forward until thrust washer

and snap ring can be installed on shaft

at front side of gear and snap ring can be installed in rear support plate at rear side of the PTO shaft bearing. In-

stall the front PTO shaft bearing, front

support plate, bearing support and

clutch release shaft as outlined in para-

graph 214. Install the transmission

output shaft bearing retainer with at

least 0.060 thickness of shims between

retainer and rear support plate and

tighten retaining cap screws to a

torque of 24-30 Ft.-Lbs. Measure

output shaft end float with dial indi-

cator as shown in Fig. 213, then re-

move the retainer and remove shim

thickness equal to shaft end float plus

an additional zero to 0,002 thickness to

provide proper bearing preload. Rein-

stall retainer and tighten cap screws to

a torque of 24-30 Ft.-Lbs. Shims are

available in thicknesses of 0.003, 0.005

and 0.012. Install locking wire through rear support retaining cap screw heads and reinstall PTO coupling or hydraulic pump drive gear.

216. MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY.

To remove the mainshaft assembly,

first remove transmission from tractor and remove front support plate, rear

support plate, input and output shafts and the shift mechanism as outlined in

previous paragraphs, then proceed as follows:

Remove the snap ring at front end of transmission mainshaft and withdraw the mainshaft from rear end of trans-

mission. Remove the gears, sliding couplings, connectors and thrust washers as the mainshaft is withdrawn. Remove ball bearing from rear end of shaft. Remove bearing cup from inside rear bore of shaft as shown in

Fig. 214. Carefully inspect all parts and renew any excessively worn or damaged parts. Bushings in inside diameter of gears are not serviced separately; renew bushing and gear assembly if bushing is worn beyond further use.

Reinstall mainshaft assembly by

reversing removal procedure. For reas-

sembly guides, refer to Figs. 207 and 216 for models 2000 and 3000 and to Figs. 208 and 217 for model 4000.

217. REVERSE IDLER. With the

--transmission mainshaft assembly removed as outlined in paragraph 216,

proceed as follows:

Refer to Fig. 215 and remove reverse idler shaft retaining cap screw from outside of transmission housing. Push the reverse idler shaft forward and remove the 4th-8th shift fork. The 4th8th coupling-gear can now be removed from rear end of main countershaft.

Paragraphs

Push the idler

housing and remove the reverse idler

gear.

To reinstall

follows: Place reverse idler gear in housing with long hub of gear forward and insert idler shaft through housing and gear with small diameter of shaft to rear pling

with shifter fork groove to front and insert shifter fork in groove of coupling. Slide the idler shaft forward far enough to install fork, then slide shaft back through fork and install the re-

taining cap screw

coated

screw to a torque of 15-18 Ft.-Lbs.

With the transmission mainshaft removed as outlined in paragraph 216 and the reverse idler removed as in paragraph 217, proceed as follows:

ondary countershaft front bearing bore and the snap ring from bore at rear side

of main countershaft rear bearing.

Then, using suitable drift, drive the main countershaft rearward until both the front and rear bearings are free from their bores and the assembly is resting in bottom of transmission housing. Place suitable wood or soft

metal blocks between the cluster gear and rear supporting wall of transmission main compartment, then continue

to drive countershaft rearward forcing

the cluster gear and front bearing from shaft. Remove the shaft from rear of transmission and remove the cluster gear and bearing from main compartment.

verse the removal procedure.

Place the

on teeth of

sealing washer

218. MAIN COUNTERSHAFT.

Remove the snap ring from sec-

To reinstall main countershaft, re-

shaft rearward out of

reverse idler

4th-8th

main countershaft

with a new rubber

216-219

proceed as

sliding cou-

. Tighten the cap

"SELECT

The "Select-O-Speed" transmission Is a planetary gear drive unit providing ten forward and two reverse speeds. Desired gear ratio Is selected by moving a control lever and starting, stopping or changing gear ratios Is accomplished without operation of q conventional clutch. Afoot opera ated feathering valve Is provided for Inter-

rupting. the gear train gency or for close maneuvering such as the hitching or unhitching of implements.

On models 2000, 3000 and 4000, the

In case

O-SPEED

of enter-

" (

10-SPEED

(All Models)

"Select

-O-Speed"

able with three

without a PTO, RPM PTO or with a two RPM PTO which ground drive speed PTO.

Fora better understanding of the opera-

tion of the

alon, fundamental operating principles of a planetary gear system are outlined In following paragraphs 219 through 226.

transmission Is avail-

PTO options;

with a singlespeed 540

also Incorporates a

Select-O-Speed" transmis-

It Is available

speed

)

540-1000

TRANSMISSION

PLANETARY GEAR POWER

FLOW

All Models

219. Refer to Fig. 218; the three "elements" of a planetary system are the sun gear, pinion carrier and the ring gear. When any element is rotated, the other two elements will also turn un-

less one is

Depending upon which element is held, power can be applied or taken out at

held by an external force.

Page 76

2000

3000-4000

On models 2000 and 3000, a fourth "D" (rear) planetary system is used as a final reduction unit only. Power enters

at the "D" sun gear, the "D" ring gear is held stationary and power is taken from the "D" carrier which is integral

with the transmission output shaft.

Six basic speed ratios, five forward and one reverse, are obtained by various combinations of holding or applying power to the elements of the "B" and "C" planetary units. The "A" (front) planetary unit is used as a direct drive-overdrive unit to double the basic speed ratios providing ten forward and two reverse speeds.

228. PLANETARY CONTROLLING UNITS. Three brake bands and four multiple disc clutches are used to control the "A", and "B", and "C" planetary units to provide the different speed ratios.

The three brake bands are designated, from front to rear, as Band 1, Band 2 and Band 3. The bands are actuated by hydraulic servos designated Servo 1, Servo 2 and Servo 3 to correspond with the band numbers. The servos contain springs that work in the opposite direction from hydraulic pressure. The servos apply the bands with spring pressure and release the bands utilizing hydraulic pressure. The bands, when applied, hold planetary elements stationary as follows:

Band Planetary

Applied Element Held

Band 1 "A" Sun Gear Band 2 "B" Ring Gear

and "C" Sun-Gear

Band 3

"C" Carrier

TIMING VALVE

SERVO 3

VALVE

SERVO

SERVO 2

TIRING

VALVE

SERVO 2

Fig. 220-Schematic diagram of Select

diagram

showing operation of feathering

------- - - --------

TRANSMPS5101

FEATHERING

SEAULNCING

OFF

RESTRICTOR

j \

BANG 3

PT.O. CLUTCH CLUTCH I CLUTCH 2

FLATHERING

EGULATIMC VALY

0-Speed transmission

the servo

and to

valve

2 and 3 timing valves.

FEATHERED

TO GI

VALVE

SYSTEM-

RESTRiCTOR

EACMAMGIM

TRANSMISSION LUBRICATION

El [I

hydraulic

Figs.

222

and

Paragraph 228

LUT

G G E

'TRANSMISSION

HEAT I

SUMP

223

❑❑

system.Refer to

for

operating principles of

RESTRICTOR

DIRECT GUY

CLUTCH

RELIEF VALVE

221 for

Fig

The multiple disc clutch packs are designated, from front to rear, as the Direct Drive Clutch, Clutch 1, Clutch 2 and Clutch 3. (Clutch 2 and Clutch 3 are contained in the same housing.)

The clutches are engaged by hydraulic

pressure against a piston within the

clutch unit and are disengaged by

spring pressure returning the piston to disengaged position. The clutches, when engaged, lock planetary elements together as follows:

Clutch Planetary

Engaged Elements Locked

Direct Drive "A" Sun Gear

to "A" Carrier

Clutch 1 "B" Carrier to

"B" Ring Gear

Clutch 2 "B" Carrier to

"C" Carrier

Clutch 3 "B" Carrier to

"D" Sun Gear (2000

& 3000) or to Out-

put Shaft (4000)

Fig. 221-Cross-

sectional

views showing

"OFF", "FEATHERED"

transmission

and "ON

and PTO feathering

positions.

valve

assemblies

Page 77

Paragraph 229

Fig.

VALVE ASSEMBLY valve

of Servo 2,

time whenhydraulicpressure servo is shown sequence

for valve time

sure is being released.

222-Cross-

is being applied to

servo

Valve

views In Fig.

positions

hydraulic

section

Servo 3 timing

position

Refer to

view

during

223

during

pres-

FORD

"SELECT-

O-SPEED"

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

All Models

229. HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS.

Refer to Fig. 220 for diagram of the

Selec!.-O-Speed" hydraulic circuits.

Pressure is supplied directly to the

Band 1, Band 2 and Band 3 control valves and PTO feathering valve (direct transmission circuit); indirectly to the Clutch 1, Clutch 2 and Clutch 3 control valves via the transmission sequencing valve and the transmission

feathering valve (indirect transmission circuit) and indirectly to the transmission cooling and lubrication circuit via the transmission regulating valve.

Refer to Fig. 221 for diagrams

showing operation of the transmission

and PTO feathering valves. With the

inching pedal (transmission feathering

valve control pedal) up or the PTO con-

trol handle pulled out, pressure is di-

rected to the indirect transmission cir-

cuit or to the PTO clutch. With the

inching pedal fully depressed or the

PTO control handle pushed in, the

feathering valves block pressure from

the indirect transmission circuit or

from the PTO clutch. With the inching

pedal partially depressed or the PTO

control handle partly pulled out, pres-

sure in the indirect transmission cir-

cuit or PTO clutch can be "feathered"

to provide smooth starting of tractor or

smooth engagement of the PTO clutch. This is similar to slipping a conven-

tional clutch and the transmission or

PTO clutch should not be operated for

any period of time with the control in

"feathering" position.

The transmission sequencing valve separates the direct and indirect hydraulic circuits so that oil is supplied only to the direct circuit when system

oil pressure drops below valve setting

of 125 psi. This prevents Bands 2 and 3 from locking up the transmission when !arge quantities of oil are required such as during the 4-5 and 5-4 shifts.

The system trols pressure within the transmission hydraulic system to 200-210 psi (at 800

regulating

valve con-

engine RPM and oil temperature of 80120°F.). When pressure in system exceeds the regulating valve pressure setting, the valve opens and oil passes into the transmission cooling (on some models) and lubrication circuit. When system pressure is below regulating valve setting, oil pressure in lubrication circuit drops to zero and the oil pressure warning light will come on. Note: warning light circuit was discontinued in March 1968.

The transmission relief valve limits maximum pressure in the hydraulic system to 220-230 psi on models with oil cooling system (heat exchanger) and

to 210-220 psi on models without heat exchanger. Oil by-passing the relief

valve is returned to the sump via the return tube attached to control valve assembly.

Timing valves are incorporated in the Servo 2 and Servo 3 circuits to permit gradual application of bands and to prevent both Band 2 and Band 3 from being engaged at the same time during the 4-5 and 5-4 shifts. During these shifts, one servo is pressurized to release its corresponding band and pressure is released from other servo to apply its corresponding band. Oil flow to the servo (See Fig. 222) to release the band is not restricted as the valve assembly return spring will be compressed and oil will by-pass the valve. On the other servo return oil will first compress the valve body return spring (Step 1-Fig. 223) and oil will flow through both the valve orifice and the four annular ports. As servo oil pres-

sure begins to drop, the valve body return spring expands moving the valve to close off the four annular ports (Step

2) which slows down the flow of oil from servo and allows band to gradually apply. When servo pressure drops further, the valve body spring expands to full length again opening the four annular ports (Step 3) to provide a final dumping of oil to permit the band to be completely applied.

When the Band 1-Direct Drive Clutch spool in control valve assembly is closed to pressurize the circuit, oil

OIL FROM SERVO

Fig.

223-Sequence

timing

sure is sure Is

allows afeet begin

creases,timing valve spring

permit a relatively slow continued

sure drop as band sure has decreased

valve spring dumping of oil pletely applying the band by servo

during

valve

being released applying band

Initial

application

band

shown in

application.In view 3,

to move

from servo

ofServo 2-Servo 3

views

time servo

In view t, valve

pressure

for

sure.

hydraulic pres-

and servo

drop in

As servo pressure de-

moves

permit gradual

hydraulic pres-

servo

enough to

valve

can take place, com-

pressure will apply the Direct Drive Clutch as the Servo 1 spring is compressed to release Band 1. Conversely, as the spool is opened to release circuit pressure, the spring in Servo 1 will apply Band 1 as the Direct Drive Clutch is released.

spring pres-

position

servo to

valve

some pres.

allow timing

that a final

spring pres-

Page 78

2000

POSITION

OR SEAR

PARK (P)

NEUTRAA (N)

3000-4000

DIRECT

DRIVE

CLUTCH

A A A A

Paragraphs

230. CONTROL POSITIONS (GEAR SELECTION). Fourteen control positions are provided on the gear

selector. Units of the transmission that are applied in each position of the gear selector are shown in the Application of Bands and Clutches Chart (Fig. 224).

LUBRICATION AND FILTERS

All Models

231. As the Select-O-Speed transmission incorporates a hydraulic control system, use of correct lubricating oil and keeping the oil clean is of utmost importance.

Recommended fluid is Ford Specification No. M2C41-A transmission and hydraulic oil. Capacity is 13'4 quarts

for model 4000 and model 3000 with

heat exchanger, 12 quarts for models

2000 and 3000 without heat exchanger. Fluid should be maintained to bottom of oil level plug (See Fig. 225). Add oil through oil level plug openings.

To remove the pump intake screen,

first drain oil from transmission, then remove filter screen as shown in Fig.

226. The pleated paper filter element

should be renewed each 600 hours of service and the fluid changed every

2400 hours to coincide with each 4th oil

filter change. To remove old filter,

unbolt the filter cover (Fig. 227) and unscrew filter from cover. When reinstalling filter cover, tighten retaining bolts to torque of 35-40 Ft.-Lbs.

230-231

IRTN

224-Chart showing transmission

Fig. plied by

hydraulic

servo

pressure

spring

and are

pressure and are released

released

units appliedateach gear

by spring pressure. Hydraulic pressure Is Indicated by shaded

by hydraulic

area.

selector

pressure

position.

. Clutches

Bands are ap-

are applied by

SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

All Models

Malfunction of the "Select-O-Speed" transmission could be from a number of causes, the most common of which is

maladjustment of one or more units of the transmission. Therefore, the first step in correcting troubles would be a

ILTER ADAPTER PLATE

.is

ILTER SCREEl

3000 and 4000

Fig. 225

oil level-filler plug

View showing

4000

location

models

oftransmission

3000

2000

and screen being removed

Fig. 226

showing transmission

View

and

4000 transmission

rom model 2000

pump filter

3000

Fig. 227-Removing model 2000

Select-O-Speed transmission

and adapter plate

(

from

cover

cover.

Unscrew

oil filter element

element

Page 79

Paragraphs

232-235

FORD

YORAUPC urn

Fig. 228-View (shaft)

lever

showing location of drive line

disengagement lever on mode14000;

models 2000

and

tion.

3000 Is

comaCt rives

In similar

Paragraphs 238-240

Fig.

237-PTO handle housing (

instrument

and "B' indicate

panelbynut (

adjustment

refer

N) and spacer

to text.

H) is retained to

measurements;

loca-

(S). "A"

'.#'..

Fig. 231-View

method ofattaching trans.

mission oil

cooler tubes to

transmission housing.

I Inlet tube

IA. Inlet tube (4200)

2. Outlet tube

2A. Outlet tube (4200)

3. Adapter bolts

4. Unions

position, the first step is to disengage

the ra

ioncnnnlinusa

Pull control handle out and discon-

nect the control cable conduit at both

ends. Remove nut (N), lockwasher and spacer (S) from slider housing and pull the handle and slider housing out of hood opening. If there is no clearance between ends of conduit and fittings with handle pulled out, turn handle and slider housing (H) clockwise until there is clearance; then, be sure handle is fully out and turn handle and slider housing counter-clockwise until ends of conduit just contact fittings. Turn handle and slider slightly farther counter-clockwise, if necessary, so that word "PTO" is in vertical position. Reinstall slider housing and reconnect cable conduit. Recheck control handle movement and readjust if necessary.

240. ADJUST PTO INTERLOCK. On models with 2-speed PTO, an interlock mechanism is necessary to prevent

showing

ollows-

If pressure gage reading

running at 800 RPM was in the speci-

EXTERNAL HELPER RETURN SPRING

Fig. 239-On model 4200,inching pedal rod

be adjusted

foot pedal arm and platform

to obtain

a 0.010-0.060 gap between

with engine

FORD

at point shown.

must

MIL

C-

Fig.

238-View showing

move lever back to left

PTO interlock

linkage.

side if desired

and reinstall shaft end cover.

278. SELECTOR

TION,

LEVER STOPS AND NEU-

LEVER POSI-

TRAL BY-PASS PLATE. The selector lever is normally placed on right side of selector housing for right

hand operation

;

however

if operator prefers, lever can be installed on left side as shown in Fig. 236,

Stop screws can be placed at R2 or RI

and 3rd, 5th

desired. When

or 7th

shift positions if

not in use

the stop

screws are installed on opposite side of housing

from shift

A neutral by-

lever position.

pass plate can be in-

stalled over the neutral notch in

GEAR

RATIO

PARK

NEUTRAL

1st

2nd

3rd

4th

5th

6th

7th

DIRECT DRIVE

CLUTCH

Ali

BAND1BAND

N N

BAND

CLUTCH1CLUTCH

R N

N R1

CLUTCH

L R2

N L

5 5

66TN

1 1

3 3

L 6

N L

L 5 5

Page 80

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs

241-244

possibility of both the engine drive and ground drive PTO from being engaged at the same time. To check interlock

adjustment, proceed as follows:

With engine not running, push engine drive PTO control knob in and move ground drive PTO lever to "ON" position; it then should not be possible to pull the engine drive PTO control knob out. Move the ground drive PTO lever to "OFF" position and pull engine drive PTO control knob out; it then

should not be possible to move the ground drive PTO lever to "ON" posi-

tion. If both controls can be engaged at

the same time, or if neither can be fully engaged even though the other is disengaged, remove top cover from trans-

mission as outlined in paragraph 247,

refer to Fig. 238 and proceed as follows:

NOTE: Transmission control valve must be installed to adjust PTO interlock although it is not shown installed in Fig. 238.

Loosen lock nut and set screw in cable clamp and move ground drive PTO lever to "ON" position. Then, retighten set screw to clamp cable so that

when pulling up on the control cable slider, a 0.005-0.015 clearance remains between end of PTO feathering valve and the cam on feathering valve lever. When adjustment is correct, tighten the lock nut and reinstall transmission top cover. Be sure the engine drive PTO control is properly adjusted as outlined in paragraph 239.

241. ADJUST INCHING PEDAL (Model 4200 Only). Refer to Fig. 239; the length of the inching pedal rod as-

sembly must be adjusted to give a

0.010-0.060 gap between the pedal return stop and the pedal shank. Incorrect adjustment may prevent full closing of the transmission feathering valve, thus result in improper operation and/or damage to transmission components.

TROUBLE SHOOTING

All Models

242. OPERATIONAL (MECHANICAL) CHECK. If the system adjustments outlined in previous section fail to correct transmission malfunction,

the next step in trouble diagnosis

would be an operational check. To perform this check, proceed as follows:

Place traction coupling in engaged position, start engine and set engine speed to 800 RPM and depress the inching pedal. Shift the transmission selector to each of the fourteen positions in turn starting with Park (P), gradually release the inching pedal at each position and record the reaction when pedal is released. One of the five

following conditions will be encountered.

DIRECT CIRCUIT

GEAR RATIO

NEUTRAL

D.D.C.

2nd

3rd

4th

Fig. 241-Hydraulic trouble

"P" Indicates hydraulip

orts.

Refer to text

shooting chart for use

pressure

for hydraulic circuit

(1) The transmission will operate

properly for the control position selected.

(2) The transmission will operate in a

different speed ratio than that selected.

(3) The transmission will go into a

"neutral" condition in control position other than neutral.

(4) The transmission will go into park

condition in control position other than park.

(5) The transmission will lock up and

stall the engine.

If transmission seems to operate properly in all fourteen control positions, proceed with TORQUE LIMITING CLUTCH CHECK as in paragraph 243, then the HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT CHECKS as outlined in paragraph 244. If any of the malfunction conditions (2), (3), (4), or (5) are encountered, compare the recorded reactions for each of the control positions with the columns in the operational trouble shooting chart in Fig. 240. The matching column in the trouble shooting chart will indicate the malfunctioning unit and whether the trouble is caused by the unit being continually applied ("A" column) or released ("R" column).

243. TORQUE LIMITING CLUTCH CHECK. A defective or worn torque limiting clutch should be suspected if transmission malfunction exists only under heavy loads and in the higher speed ratios, especially if the transmission operates properly in

B2 B3

P P

gage installed at one or more servo pressure

with

for different

to unit

applied

shooting procedure.

trouble

the lower speed

To check the torque limiting clutch, operate the tractor in 8th, 9th or 10th speed position at wide open throttle

and quickly apply both brakes. If tractor forward motion can be halted without pulling the engine down below

1000 RPM or without stalling the en-

gine, renew torque limiting clutch as

outlined in paragraph 253.

244. HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT CHECKS. Leakage in any of the hydraulic circuits to servos or clutches can be detected by performing the following pressure checks.

With a 0.300 psi hydraulic

stalled at Servo

or 230), ture at 80-120° F., traction coupling

disconnected as outlined in paragraph 232 and with engine running at 800 RPM, record hydraulic each selector position shown in the

hydraulic trouble shooting chart in

Fig. 241 except 5th gear. Normal gage reading for each position is 200-210 psi with a maximum variation of 3 psi. A

leak in any one circuit will show up as

one of the following conditions; leakage in more than one circuit will show up as a combination of conditions:

A. Low Gage

Positions

tion (Fig. 229 or 230) and observe pressure gage reading with selector at 5th gear. A normal gage reading (200-210 psi) would indicate leakage in Servo 2 circuit; a continued low reading would indicate incorrectly adjusted

INDIRECT CIRCUIT

selector positions.

ratio

gear

ranges.

2 location (

transmission

-Move gage to Servo 3 loca-

see Fig. 229

fluid tempera-

gage reading at

Reading In All

gage

transmis-

in-

Page 81

Paragraphs 245-246

FORD

nocf }ti^osed_cantraLcable at lower

Paragraph

Fig. 249-Presscable wheel and trunnion Into

camshaft so there

cable

wheel

supporting opposite

half

252 Cont.

Is 0.010clearance

and upper

valve body.Note

end of camshaft.

between

ibinch

assembly in Fig. 247 and proceed as follows:

NOTE:

There are some differences between the valve assembly used In model 4000 beginning with September 1968 pro-

duction and the assembly used In other models;notably,the late 4000 servo and clutch valves do not have return springs,

but are returned by the rocker arms which

lit in notches in outer ends of valve

spools.However,service procedures and specifications remain essentially the same for all units with any differences noted in the following text:

Remove the two cap screws that hold the halves of control valve assembly together, then separate valve body half (22) from camshaft body half (3). The

six control valve spools (26A or 26B)

can now he removed. On all models except late 4000, remove the control valve spool return springs (31). Re-

move the feathering valve retaining plate (34) and withdraw the feathering valve plungers (32 and 33), springs (29 and 30) and feathering valves (27 and

28). NOTE: On models without PTO, a valve spool (26) (same as 26B) is substituted for the PTO feathering valve (28), spring (30) and plunger (33) as these parts are not required. The retainer plate (23) can now be removed from valve body half (22) for better access to clean spool bores. Remove the adjusting screw retainers (18 and 19), adjusting screws (17), springs (14, 15 and 16) and valves (13 and 13A) from camshaft body half (3).

Check the cam followers (rocker arms) (11 or IIA and 113) and shaft (101 for wear or damage; to disassem-

and shift

from or vice and detent

Installed in place

Fig. 251-Exploded view of lower valve body and ering valve assemblies. Note that PTO plunger(33) two Identification outer end and PTO feathering valve(29) has land sion PTO feathering

Is shorter than transmission

feathering valve

follower (

Park

versa.New camshaft

plunger can be

type.

than does the transmis-

feathering

8) and

gear

to 10th

of previous

feath-

has

grooves In

shorter

valve (41).

valve spring

spring (38).

spring (9) and the cam-

PREVIOUS TYPE

New type camshaft

Fig. 250

defeat prevents over-

shaft cable wheel (7) for wear or

damage

To disassemble

, thread a Y4inch diameter, 20 thread, 3 inch long socket head screw (or other hardened

V4-inch x 20 bolt with at least 1%

steel

inches threaded) into the cable wheel (7), hold camshaft with wrench and turn the screw to force cable wheel and trunnion assembly from camshaft. Remove trunnion (6) from opposite end of camshaft using same screw. Note:

Do not

use a common steel or rethreaded bolt for a forcing screw; this type of bolt or screw will twist off in cable wheel or trunnion. The camshaft, detent plunger and spring can now be removed.

Carefully clean all parts in solvent,

air dry and check against the following

values:

Control Valve Spool Diameter

Late Model 4000 .... 0.3743-0.3747

All Other Models .... 0.3738-0.3742

Feathering Valve Spool Diameter,

All ................ 0.3743-0.3747

Valve Bore Diameter,

All ................ 0.3751-0.3758

Spring Free Lengths:

Camshaft Detent Plunger ..... 0.75

Control Spool Return ......... 1.24

FORD

NEW TYPE

Transmission Feathering Valve:

Return ...................... 1.22

Plunger ..................... 1.40

PTO Feathering Valve Return .. 1.22

Plunger ..................... 1.12

To reassemble, proceed as follows: Lubricate all parts prior to assembly. Insert detent spring (9) and detent follower (8) in bore of body half (3) and position camshaft (5) so that detent cam is aligned with detent; hold camshaft in place with a %-inch bolt inserted in trunnion (6) end of shaft. Note: The bolt must be long enough to bottom in shaft. Place unit in arbor press as shown in Fig. 249 and press cable wheel into camshaft so there is

0.010 clearance between wheel and valve body. Thread the forcing screw that was used in disassembly into the cable wheel until bottomed; then turn unit over in arbor press and press trunnion (6-Fig. 247), chamfered end first, into camshaft until flush with valve body camshaft support boss.

On late model 4000, insert the shaft (10) through hole in boss of body (3) and install the cam followers (11A and

11B) on shaft as it is pushed into place. Note: Follower (11B) on cable wheel end is constructed with cam arms placed opposite the cam arms of the

Page 82

2000

3000-4000

Paragraph 253

On models other than late 4000, use Fig. 247 as a guide to install shaft (10), cam followers (11) and spacers (11C,

11D and 11E), noting the following: Install followers on shaft with short rounded end seated against cams.

Spacers (11C) are 0.058 thick; spacers

(11D) are 0.348 thick and spacer (11E)

is 0.878 thick. Secure shaft with snap

rings (12) inserted in grooves on shaft.

Insert the valves (13 and 13A-Fig.

247) (all three valves are alike) into

bores of body (

3). Insert spring (14)

(2.89 inches long) in bore farthest from

cable wheel end. Insert spring (15)

(2.06 inches

wheel end and

long) in bore nearest cable

insert spring

(16) (2.47 inches long) in middle bore. Thread the adjusting screws (17) (all screws alike) in flush with valve body. Do not install retainers (18 and 19) until valve has been adjusted as outlined in paragraph

235.

Install retaining plate (23) on valve

body (22). On models with PTO, install

(38) in grooves of

the two snap

rings

the feathering valve plungers (32 and

33), insert the valves through the return springs (37) and plate (35). Compress return springs and install

notched plate (34) over valve plungers. Insert PTO feathering valve (28) (valve with narrow land at hollow outer end) into bore towards end of valve body having four control valve bores and the transmission feathering valve (27) (valve with wide land at hollow outer end) into bore towards end of body having two control valve

spool bores.

Insert the PTO plunger spring (30) (1.12 inches long) in hollow end of valve (28) and transmission plunger spring (29) (1.140 inches long) in hollow end of valve (27). Install the assembled valve plunger, spring and plate assembly so that plunger (33) with identification groove in outer end is in the PTO valve spool bore (towards end of valve body having four control valve spool bores) and secure with screws.

On models without PTO, install the transmission feathering valve as outlined in preceding paragraph; however, valve spool (26) is installed in place of PTO valve (28), spring (30), plunger (33), return spring (37) and snap ring

(38).

On all models except late 4000, drop the six spool return springs (31) in the control valve bores.

Lubricate the control valve spools

(26A or 26B) and carefully insert them in their bores with a twisting motion to avoid scraping bores with sharp edges of valve lands. On late model 4000, turn the valve spools so that notches in outer ends of spools are positioned as shown in Fig. 247. On late model 4000,

Fig.

252-Exploded view

assembly

clutch

tional view showing proper Installation

Fig.

ment

Fig.

assembly.

tion as and seal

1. Cover

3. Rotor

Belleville

1. Clutch housing

2. Spring

3. Pressure plate

253-Cross

of Belleville spring washer

(6); refer to

254-Exploded

Fig

Unit can be disassembled for inspec-

shown; however,

(for models 2000, 3000 & 4000) are

(6)

available for

of typical torque limiting

Refer

sectional

Fig.

spring) washer (2).

(

view

252 for

parts identification

of transmission

view

only

service.

253 for cross-sec-

4. Clutch disc

5. Facings

showing

(

2). Flywheel is

the

of the

place

pump

"0" ring (2)

4. Roller.

or Plug

I se.

place the two valve body halves to-

gether so that ends of followers engage notches in valve spools; or, on other models, place valve body halves together so that ends of followers contact ends of valve spools. Install the two cap screws that hold the body halves together and tighten the cap screws to a torque of 6-8 Ft.-Lbs. Refer to paragraph 235 for adjustment of the trans-

mission regulating and relief valves, then install the adjusting screw retainers (18 and 19).

253. TORQUE LIMITING

CLUTCH. To remove the torque lim-

iting clutch, first split tractor between engine and transmission as outlined in

paragraph 181 or 182. Then, unbolt and remove the clutch assembly from flywheel. Refer to Fig. 252 for exploded view of the clutch assembly.

Renew the clutch disc facings or the clutch disc assembly if facings are glazed, oil soaked or excessively worn. Thickness of new disc with facings is

0.329-0.353 for all models. Note: Late production clutch disc is spring loaded instead of solid disc as shown in Fig.

252. Renew the Belleville (spring) washer

if discolored, cracked, or if it fails to

meet the following specifications:

Color

Code

Red

Yellow

Tractor

Model

2000

,3000

4000

Note. Free height is measured as dish in the spring washer. Color code inch wide paint mark on outer edge of

the spring washer.

Drive plate thickness on all models should be 0.278-0,282. Renew drive plate if cracked, scored, warped or excessively worn.

Check the splines in the clutch disc hub and on the transmission input shaft for rust or excessive wear. Renew the clutch disc assembly if backlash of disc on input shaft, measured at outer diameter of disc, exceeds 'Fs-inch. Renew the input shaft if backlash of new disc on input shaft exceeds 1/4-inch.

Before reassembly, be sure splines on

input shaft and in clutch disc are clean

and free of rust; then, apply a thin film of light silicone grease (Ford part No. M1C-43) to splines of both parts.

When reassembling, be sure that the

concave side of the Belleville washer

(2) is towards the clutch cover (1) as

shown in Fig. 253. The clutch disc is

piloted in the flywheel, thus no

aligning pilot is required. Tighten the

clutch cover retaining cap screws to a

torque of 25-30 Ft.-Lbs.

Thick-

news

.106-0.109

0.106-0.109

Free

Height

0.175

0.189

is a ''/c-

Page 83

Paragraphs

IRA HUMS 5101

INPUT SHAFT

254-256

DIRECT DRIVE

CLUTCH

E, N SUN GEAR

UTCH

2000 3000

DISTRIBUTOR

4000

5000

EIALt..'.+:

NDICATOP

Fig. 256-View showing dial Indicator

"C" sun

gear

to check

play on models

transmission front end

2000, 3000

and

FORD

set against

4000.

"C" SUN GEAR

Fig. 255-Exploded

Washer between

frontend play. Washer

output shaft

view

of transmission

I assembly and Distributor

Clutch

between "D" Sun

and rear support (models 4000)

254. TRANSMISSION PUMP. To remove the transmission pump, first split tractor between engine and transmission as outlined in paragraph 181 or 182, then unbolt and remove the pump assembly. Refer to Fig. 254 for exploded view of pump. The transmission input shaft extends through and

drives the pump.

The transmission pump, except for rear plate retaining screws, "0" ring (2) and

seal (6

assembly only.

is serviced as a complete

)

Disassemble

clean and

, inspect the pump paying particular attention to the cam surface in pump

body (5). If cam surface is worn or pit-

ted, renew the pump assembly. If pump is serviceable, "0" ring and

reassemble using new

. Install seal with lip

seal

to inside using OTC step plate No. 6305 or equivalent.

Reinstall pump with new mounting gasket. Be sure pump is correctly positioned and

install two retaining cap

screws opposite each other. Tighten these screws to torque of 3-5 Ft.-Lbs., then install two remaining screws to torque of 3-5 Ft.-Lbs. Final

cap screws alternately and evenly

four

to torque

of 15-18 Ft.-Lbs.

tighten all

255. TRANSMISSION END

PLAY.

Transmission end play is controlled by bronze thrust washers placed between each of the rotating members. Refer to Fig. 255 length

of the

Variation in total

transmission components

is compensated for during assembly by

providing two selective ers, one at

the rear of

fit thrust wash-

each transmis-

CLUTCH

2 ANDR

drive

components

selective

Gear and "D" Carrier (models

D" SUN GEAR

C" RING GEAR 2000

showing thrust

thickness

thickness to

sion section, to hold end play within specified limits. Cumulative wear of the thrust washers and of thrust surfaces on other parts will require that the end play be checked at each overhaul, then renewing the selective fit thrust washers with ones of greater thickness to provide correction for wear.

End play should be checked as out-

lined in paragraphs 256 and 257 before

disassembly

of the involved

sion components

dures outlined based on the

supposition

selective fit thrust only ones which will be renewed. However, if any other thrust other transmission parts are renewed, the difference in thickness of the new parts will affect thickness of the selective fit washers to be installed. Thus, it is important to check end play during reassembly to be sure the proper thick-

ness of selective fit thrust washers have been installed.

256. TRANSMISSION FRONT

END PLAY. To check transmission

front end play, all drive rear of "C" sun gear and distributor must first be removed and, if the trans-

mission has

not been removed from tractor, the steering front compartment cover plate must be removed to

provide access

transmission components. Loosen

Band 1 and

Band 2 adjusting screws.

Then, mount dial indicator

rear end of "C" sun gear as shown in

Fig. 256. Pry "C" sun gear forward and

\ ' \ CARRIER

RING OEAIIQ

placement.

washer

to adjust

2000 & 3000)

adjust rear end play.

transmission

or between

transmis-

. The overhaul proce-

in this manual are

that the two

washers are the

washers or

components to

assembly or

gear

to the front

against

CREW DRIVER

RANSMISSION

OUTPUT SHAFT

DIAL INDICATOR

SUPPORT-TOOL

Fig. 257

transmission

rear and play on

Pry against

Model however

View showing dial indicator

output shaft to C" ring gear

obtain endplay reading.

Fig. 258-Removing

5000 Is shown

other models are similar

is located

at upper side of transmission housing.

models 2000

Servo I assembly

check transmission

as shown

for illustrative purposes;

3000 and 4000.

set dial indicator to zero while holding slight pressure against the sun gear. Refer to Fig. 255 and insert a screwdriver between the "B" carrier and "A" ring gear and pry "B" carrier rearward. The resulting dial indicator reading is transmission front end play which

against

set

In Inset

and

cover.

except servo

Page 84

2000

Fig. 259

band 1

direct drive

gear

(

4. Servo spring

4. "0" ring

S. Servo piston

9. Piston rod

10. "0" ring 1I. Strut

3000-4000

View showing

adjusting

screw

clutch

placement

and

housing).

13. Bend1

39.

Servo 1,

strut to "A" sun

Adjusting screw

A'sungearDirect Drive Clutch housing

262-Rembying Servo 2-3

Fig.

cover

housing

tubes

tributor

transmission

from

Inset shows

being pulled

permit removal of

the distributor.

from

servo

dis-

Paragraphs

257-259

Fig.

260-Exploded

N. Nut

W. Washer

1. Cover

2. Gasket

3. RatainSr

4. Spring

Fig. 261-Compressing

press to remove

draulic

view of Servo I

servo

nut and

piston rod.

assembly.

5. Snap ring

7. "0" ring

8. Piston

9. Piston rod

10. "0., ring

11. Strut

assembly in hy-

washer

should be 0.005 to 0.015. Record the end play measurement for reassembly.

Front end play is adjusted by selecting,the,proper thickness of thrust washer to be installed between the distributor and clutch 1; refer to Fig. 255. This thrust washer is available in thickness of 0.062 to 0.122 in steps of

0.010.

1257. TRANSMISSION REAR END PLAY. Transmission rear end play can be checked after splitting tractor between transmission and the rear axle center housing and removing the top cover. To check rear end play, proceed as follows:

i.oosen the Band 3 adjusting screw so

that the band is completely released.

Mount a dial

. indicator as shown in Fig.

257. Pugh in on the transmission output shaft while holding

and zero

pressure

pry between "C" carrier and "C" ring gear with a screwdriver (see inset in Fig: 257); the resulting dial indicator

reading will be. transmission

play which should be 0.005 to 0.015.

Transmission

rear end play' is ad-

justed by selecting the proper thickness

of thrust washer to be installed between the shoulder on transmission output shaft. and rear support on

models 400,0, or between the 'D' sun

geat and "D" carrier on models 2000

and 3000. This washer is available in thicknesses of 0.102 to 0.142 in steps of

0.010 fbr models 4000 and in thicknrisses of 0.092 to 0.132 in steps of

0.010, and also thickness of 0.140 and

0.150 for models 2000 and 3000.

268. SERVO

SERVO 1 ASSEMBLY. To remove

the Servo 1 Cover and Servo 1 assem-

bly, proceed

as follows:

While holding Band 1 adjusting

screw from turning, remove the ad-

from

justing screw locknut and flat washer.

the dial indicator

on shaft. Then

rear end

1 COVER AND

Then, slowly back adjusting screw out until servo spring tension is relieved.

CAUTION: Do not back adjusting screw out farther than necessary as this will allow the Band 1 strut to fall out of place making disassembly of transmission necessary. Remove the

four cap screws retaining Servo 1 Cover to transmission and carefully remove cover. Slowly turn adjusting screw in, forcing servo assembly out, until screw is,tight. Then, withdraw servo assembly from transmission

housing. Refer to Fig. 258.

The servo sealing "0" rings (7 and 10

-Fig. 260) can now be renewed and the servo assembly reinstalled. However, if inspection of unit reveals excessive wear or other defect, proceed as follows to disassemble and overhaul the servo:

NOTE: On early production units, Servo

1 piston rod pilot diameter was 0.730-

and piston outer diameter was

0.714

1.993 countered proved by

piston rod pilot diameter Is 0.734 piston outer diameter Is 1.981 larger rod pilot diameter and the smaller piston diameter reduce the possibility of piston cocking and wedging In bore of transmission housing.

if these early parts are en-

1.997

servo operation can be Im-

renewing both the rod and

„

service and late production piston

;

0.736, and

-1.985. The

259. To disassemble the servo, place

the assembly in a press using sleeve

and step plate as shown in Fig. 261. Compress the servo spring and remove

the nut (N-Fig: 260) and washer (W)

from piston rod (9). Slowly release spring tension, remove unit from press and remove the retainer (3) and spring (4). Remove piston retaining snap ring (6), then push or press piston rod from piston. To reassemble, reverse disassembly procedure. When reinstalling piston, be sure. sharp edge of snap ring-

Page 85

Paragraphs 260-264

FORD

Paragraph 267

-1 tom

Fig.

271-Removing

Fig. 272-

Removing rear support from model

2000 or 3000

transmission rear support

with jack

with

single speed PTO.

screws.

C RING GEAR

D SUN GEAR

ASSFM5IY

REAP SUPPO U

ASSEM8IY

AR 8',

Fig. 275 rear support

and "C

2000

speed power

Models with single PTO ilar

not having a PTO drive

2. Thrust washer

3. "C"ring gear

4. "D"sun gear

5. Snap ring

6. Bush'qq(not

7. Selective fit thrust

8. "D"ringgear

9. "D" carrier-output

10. Ball bearing

and

or without

except

1. Snap ring

vice d)

washer

shaft

Exploded view

, "

D" planetary

carrier on models

3000

with two-

take-oft.

speed

PTO are sim-

for "D"carrier

gear.

1 2 3

backed out farther than necessary, the band struts may fall out of place. Reinstall Servo 2 and 3 Cover as outlined in paragraph 263.

267. R&R REAR SUPPORT, OUTPUT SHAFT AND "C" RING GEAR (

Models 2000

Includes "D

And 3000)." To remove

Planetary On

rear support, first split tractor between

transmission and rear axle center housing as outlined in paragraph 284 or 299, drain transniission, then pro-

ceed as follows: ' '

On models equipped with 2-speed PTO, remove transmission top cover, hold the hex nut retaining PTO interlock cable housing and unscrew the rear support top retaining bolt, then remove the hex nut and lockwasher from inside of housing. On other models, cap screws are' used at all five bolting points. Remove the then thread two cap screws into the

tapped holes in rear support for use as

jack screws (See Fig. 271) to remove

rear support from transmission

housing. Then, remove rear support as shown in Fig. 272 or 273. If not re-

moved with rear support, remove the

11. Gasket

12. Rear support plate

13. Bushing (not

serviced)

cap screws,

10 11 12

13. Oilseal

15. Oil seal or plug

output shaft (or "D" sun gear) and "C"

ring gear assembly as shown in Fig.

274. Refer to Fig. 275 or 276 for exploded view of the rear support, output shaft ("D" planetary on models 2000 and 3000), and "C" ring gear; be careful

not to lose the thrust washer (2) located between output shaft (or "D" planetary) and the Clutch 2 and 3 assembly.

To remove PTO shaft assembly from rear support, refer to paragraph 277 for models with 2-speed PTO. PTO shaft oil seal for all single speed PTO models

can be renewed

at this time; install

new seal with lip to inside (forward)

using a suitable

driver.

Remove the "D" carrier and "D" ring

gear(or output shaft and

from rear 2-speed PTO,

-Fig. 276)

support

. On model 4000 with

renew

in rear support

"C" ring gear)

needle bearing (10

if bearing is

excessively worn' or damaged press on lettered end of bearing cage

only when installing new bearing. On

models

2000 and 3000, inspect the "D" carrier assembly; planet gear end play should be 0.010-0.028. Renew "D" carrier if any

gear

is excessively loose or

damaged. If "D" carrier is serviceable,

FORD

; drive or

0,0

>•

Fig. 273-

Removing rear support from model

4000

with two speed PTO

Fig. 276-Exploded

rear

support,

and "C"

blies for model 4000 trans-

mission.Top view

assembly used

speed

shows

single speed PTO. Bushings(13) in rear

support

viced

ring gear

PTO;

assembly used'with

plate are

separately

Snap ring

Thrust washer

"C" ring gear

Outpatehaft

4A.

Outputsha`t(2 apd.

PTO)

view of

output shaft

assem-

shows

with two

bottom

PTO or without

not ser-

from plate.

view

11. Gasket

12. Rear Support plate

t2A. Rear eupportplete(2-

apd PTO)

13. Bushinga

!4. Oilaeal

Page 86

2000

3000-4000

Paragraph 268

selective fit thrust

Fig. 277-View

installed

Fig.

Clutch

showing

on output shaft

illustrative

Removing

278

2 and

5000 is

Model

purposes.

transmission

3 assembly and "C" carrier from

transmission.

renew ball bearing (10-Fig. 275) if bearing is worn or rough. Bushings (13

-Fig. 275 or 276) are not serviced separately; renew rear support if bushings are excessively worn or scored.

Bushing (6-Fig. 275) in "D" sun

gear (models 2000 and 3000) is not ser-

viced separately; renew gear if bushing is excessively worn or scored. Inspect

output shaft (model 4000) bearing journals; renew output shaft if journals are

excessively worn or rough. To remove

"D" sun gear or output shaft, remove

rear snap ring (5-Fig. 275 or 276) and push gear or shaft forward out of "C" ring gear. Note: Later production units will have ends of snap ring (5) brazed together; break weld with chisel, then remove and discard the snap ring. To reassemble, install new snap ring (1) in front groove in sun gear or output shaft and insert gear or shaft through "C" ring gear from front side. Install new late type snap ring (5) in rear groove and braze ends of snap ring together using a 1/16-inch bronze rod. Be careful not to overheat ring gear and sun gear

or output shaft and remove all brazing

flash.

To reassemble transmission, proceed

as follows: Install new output shaft oil

washer

used for

mainshaft,

C" sun gear

Fig. 279-Removing

Fig.

280-View

rings from transmission.

showing Band 3 and strut

tion.

seal in rear support using suitable driver so that flange of seal (14-Fig. 275 or 276) contacts rear support evenly. Use a light film of grease to

stick the thrust washer (2) over Clutch 2 and 3 retaining snap ring with coun-

terbore of washer over the snap ring.

Carefully install the assembled "C" ring gear and "D" sun gear or output shaft over the Clutch 2 and 3 assembly so that "C" ring gear engages gears on "C" carrier. On model 4000, place the selective thickness thrust washer (7Fig. 276) over end of output shaft as shown in Fig. 277. On models 2000 and 3000, stick the selective thickness thrust washer (7-Fig. 275) in front end of "D" carrier with a light film of

grease.

On models 2000 and 3000, install the "D" carrier assembly in rear support taking care not to damage the oil seal, then place "D" ring over the "D" planet gears so that ears on ring gear engage notches in rear support.

Install the rear support using a new gasket (11) taking care not to damage any seals passing over output shaft or PTO shaft. On models with 2-speed PTO, be sure the long cap screw is installed at top and enters PTO interlock cable support bracket. On models with single speed PTO, tighten the lower cap screws at each side of PTO shaft first. On all models, tighten the cap screws to a torque of 35-40 Ft.-Lbs. On 2-speed PTO models, install lock washer and hex nut on top cap screw. Check transmission rear end play as

and sealing

installa-

Fig.

281-

Removing

Fig.

282-Removing

3 housing.

outlined in paragraph

"C" carrier

mainshah

from

257 and

Clutch

essary, renew the selective thickness thrust washer with new washer of suitable thickness to bring end play within

Reinstall top cover as

correct limits

outlined in paragraph 247.

268. MAINSHAFT

AND 3 ASSEMBLY

, CLUTCH 2

C" CARRIER,

, " "C" SUN GEAR AND BAND 3. After removing the

or output shaft

tary (

support, "D" plane-

rear

) and the "C" ring

gear as outlined in paragraph

mainshaft, "C" carrier and Clutch 2 and 3 assembly can be removed as a unit. Back out Band 3 adjusting screw until Band 3 is loose, then remove mainshaft, Clutch 2 and 3 assembly

and "C" carrier as shown in

The "C"

sun gear and sealing rings can then be removed from the distributor; refer to Fig

279. Refer to Fig. 280,

compress Band 3 and remove adjusting strut and actuating strut.

30-Fig. 283)

Remove thrust washer

(

from rear face of distributor.

Remove the four cast iron sealing

rings(14-Fig mainshaft

(37-Fig.

284) from front end of

13) and slide

(

283) and

thrust washer (31)

the "C"

off shaft as shown in Fig. 281. Remove

the snap ring

(16-Fig. 284) from rear

end of mainshaft and remove

shaft from Clutch 2 and 3 assembly as

shown in Fig. 282. To overhaul the removed Clutch 2 and 3 assembly, refer

to exploded view in Fig. 284 and to

paragraph 270.

mainshaft.

2 and

, if nec-

267, the

Fig. 278.

the band,

carrier

the main-

Page 87

Paragraphs

269-270

FORD

26. Oil pressure switch

27. Distributor

25. Sealing rings

29. "C. Sun Gear

20. Thrust wa sher T1-,,t washer

Fig. 283-Exploded

view of oil

tubes,distributor

assemblies.

C" Carrier and Sun

, "

32. Bushing for(37)-not serviced

33. Band 3

34. Actuating strut

35. Lever arm

36. Pivot pin

37. "C" carrier

38. Bushing-not

serviced

39. Piston rod

40. "0"ring

41. Guide

42."0"ring

43. Not

44. Washer

45. Adjuetingscrew

46. Adjusting strut

Band 3 and Servo 3

Gear

gaps along

top side of sun gear and carefully insert sun gear through distributor. side to side of gear with

Rotate sun

to align splines

gear slightly from

splines in

on front end

Clutch 1

housing.

Place thrust

over front

washer

end of mainshaft

mainshaft through the "C" carrier (37

-Fig. 283), then place thrust washer

(31) over front end of mainshaft and against "C" carrier. Carefully install four new sealing rings (14-Fig 284) on front end of mainshaft, lubricate rings with petroleum jelly, align ring end gaps along top side of mainshaft and holding the carrier and shaft assembly with ring end gaps up, carefully insert shaft through "C" sun gear. Work the shaft slowly

to side while

up and down

pushing forward to allow

the rings to enter "C" sun gear. Rotate

mainshaft slightly engage splines with splines

"C" carrier

on front end of shaft

in the "B" carrier. When

and mainshaft are in place

and fully forward, tighten Band 3 ad-

justing screw.

Install three new sealing rings (15) on rear end of mainshaft, lubricate the rings with petroleum jelly and align ring end gaps at top side of shaft. Carefully install the Clutch 2 and 3 assembly over mainshaft to avoid breaking sealing rings. Partly support clutch housing and rotate housing slightly from side to side while lightly pushing forward on housing to align Clutch 2 discs with splines on "C" carrier. When housing is in position

against the thrust washer and "C" car-

rier, pull mainshaft rearward while

lifting up on snap ring

groove on

clutch housing so that

(16) can be installed in

rear end of mainshaft.

(1-Fig. 284)

(13), insert

and from side

from. side to side to

Fig. 284-Exploded view

I rh rust washer 5. Internal spline plates

3. Pressulre plates 7. Retainerss

4 External spline 8. Piston returnsprings

plates

of Clutch

The "C" carrier is serviced as a com-

plete assembly only. Check to see that the "C" carrier pinions are in good condition and that pinion shafts are tight in carrier. Pinion end play in carrier should be 0.010-0.028. Also check end thrust surfaces and bushing in carrier;

renew carrier as an assembly if defect

is noted.

Renew Band 3 if friction material inside band is worn, pitted or eroded or if band has been overheated. Also inspect the strut sockets at band ends for

"rins 15.

transmission

ing 16. Snap ring

hous

2 and

3 assembly and

9. "0"rings 13.

l0. Clutch pistene

12. Clutch

cracks or other damage.

269. To reassemble transmission, proceed as follows: Install Band 3 and the two struts as shown in Fig. 280,

making sure that end of flat (actuating) strut having notch is towards the band and the end of band having an identifying notch is towards the ad-

justing screw strut

washer (30-Fig. tributor. Install new on "C" sun gear, lubricate the rings with petroleum jelly, align ring end

mainshaft.

Msinshaa

14. Front sealing rings

Rear sealing rings

Install thrust

283) on rear of dissealing rings (28)

270. OVERHAUL CLUTCH AS-

Except Direct Drive

SEMBLIES

( Clutch). The following service procedure will apply to all transmission clutch assemblies except the Direct Drive Clutch. The illustrations (Figs. 285 through 289) are of the 2-speed PTO clutch; however, the other clutch assemblies are of similar construction. Refer to Fig. 284 for exploded view of the Clutch 2 and 3 assembly; to Fig. 250 for Clutch 1 assembly and to Fig. 305 or 306 for PTO clutch assemblies. To disassemble clutch, proceed as follows:

Remove the pressure plate retaining

snap ring as shown in

Ends of snap

ring in the Clutch 1 and

Fig. 285. NOTE:

Clutch 2 and 3 assemblies are welded together; break weld with sharp chisel, then remove and discard snap ring. On

Clutch 1 assembly, the "B" ring gear also functions as the clutch pressure

Page 88

2000

Fig. 285-Removing clutch pressure plate re-

3000-4000

snap

taining

ring.

ring, then remove piston using com-

pressed air in port to piston as shown in

Fig. 289. Remove the "0" rings from inside and outside diameters of piston.

Clean all parts in solvent, air dry and inspect for wear or other damage. Renew clutch pressure plate if cracked,

scored or showing signs of overheating. Fit the piston into clutch housing to

check for any binding condition; minor

imperfections that cause binding or would cause damage to piston "0" rings can be removed with fine emery cloth. Check the clutch discs for wear, signs of overheating or warping. All clutch discs, except PTO clutch steel discs, should be flat. Renew any bronze discs that will snap over center. Check the PTO clutch

coning as

steel discs

shown in Fig. 290; discs

should be coned 0.015 to 0.020. Renew

any PTO clutch

steel discs coned less

than 0.015. Check clutch housing, es-

pecially in hub area, and the piston for cracks. Lubricate all parts with transmission fluid and reassemble as follows:

for proper

Paragraph 271

289-With piston

Fig. remove clutch piston with air

Inset shows piston

above

return spring removed,

("0" rings).

CLUTCH

PISTON

pressure as shown

Inner and

outer seals

Fig.

286-Bronze plates and steel

ternately placed between

Fig.

287-Clutch

snap ring being removed

No. N-775)is

clutch piston.

piston return

used

return spring.

pressure

spr

Special tool

in press to compress

plate. After removing snap ring, re-

move the pressure plate and the bronze and steel discs; refer to Fig. 286.

With the pressure plate and clutch

discs removed, place clutch

a press and compress spring using

Nuday tool No. N-775 as

assembly in

the piston return

shown in Fig. 287. With spring compressed, remove retaining

and slowly release the spring to prevent cocking retaining washer on clutch housing. Remove the return spring, retaining washer and snap

plates are al-

plate and

retaining

(Nuday

piston

snap ring

Install new "0" rings in inside diameter and on outside diameter of piston, lubricate with petroleum jelly and install piston, flat side in, in the clutch housing. Be sure piston is seated in housing, then place housing in press. Place piston return spring, retaining

in Fig

on piston, com-

Nuday tool No.

. 287 and install

washer and snap ring

press the

spring using

N 775 as shown the retaining snap ring in groove of clutch housing.

On model 4000 Clutch 3 assembly only, place one of the bronze discs that is lined on one face only next to piston

with unlined face down (

piston). Then, alternately place steel

and double faced bronze discs. Install

the other single faced bronze disc on

top of last steel disc with unlined face up (against pressure plate). Install pressure plate with machined surface down (against unlined face of top

bronze disc).

On all other clutch assemblies, place

a steel disc on top of piston, then alternately install bronze and steel discs.

Install pressure

plate with machined face down against the top bronze disc. NOTE: On PTO clutch

stall all steel

assemblies, in-

discs with concave (hollow) side up towards plate.

After installing pressure plate, install the retaining snap ring. On all clutch assemblies except the PTO clutch, be sure snap ring end gap straddles two teeth of housing, then weld ends of snap ring together using an AWS 312-16 Electrode. CAUTION: Do

against

pressure

290-Checking steel clutch plates for coning

Fig.

with feeler

gage

;

refer to

text.

not attempt to weld snap ring to pressure plate and be careful not to overheat plate or housing. Remove all weld flash.

In some early production model

NOTE:

4000 PTO clutch assemblies, a special

shim was fitted between the clutch piston and clutch housing shim Is not available for service ent, it must be protected against damage and reinstalled If the PTO clutch housing (driven gear assembly) Is to be reused. If new housing Is being Installed and relief groove(see Fig

shim may be discarded and the piston be Installed without a shim. The shim is necessary only when using a housing with a

0.120 wide relief groove in the model 4000 tractor.

refer to Fig. 291. This

;

291) Is 0

095 or less, the

271 DISTRIBUTOR, CLUTCH 1 AND "B" CARRIER. The oil distributor, Clutch 1 assembly and the "B" carrier can be removed after removing the control valve assembly as in paragraph 251, the mainshaft "C" sun gear

and Band 3 as outlined in paragraph 268 and the Servo 2 and 3 Cover as out-

;

if pres-

Page 89

Paragraph 271 Cont.

FORD

RELIEF GROOVE

Fig. 291-Cross-sectional view of PTO

sembly showing

clutch assemblies

special

shim

;

EXTERNAL TOOTH

PLATE

clutch as-

locatedInsome

refer to

text.

Fig. 293-Removing Clutch I and

an assembly after removing oil

shown in Fig

B Fps C'ARR "], E

Fig. 294-Removing oil distributor,Clutch

"B" carrier as a unit

292.

'R'

Refer also

Refer also to

293.

B" carrier as

distributor as

Fig.

R" RING

GEAR

CRUTCH i

Figs

294.

292

,y„^

I and

292. Then, remove Clutch 1 assembly and "B" carrier as a unit as in Fig. 293. On models without PTO or with 2speed PTO, the distributor, Clutch 1 assembly and "B" carrier can be removed as a unit; refer to Fig. 294.

Remove"B" carrier assembly and remove the clutch assembly from distributor separately

Clutch 1 assembly

carrier for loose or rough bearings or for loose journal pins in carrier. Pinion end play should be 0.010-0.028. Check the thrust and bearing surfaces of distributor for scoring or excessive wear. Renew parts as necessary and reassemble as follows:

Place "B" carrier on work bench,

pinion side down, and stick thrust washer (3-Fig. 295) in counterbore of carrier with light film of grease. Place the assembled Clutch 1 and "B" ring gear unit, "B" carrier. While partially supporting the clutch assembly, rotate the clutch assembly back and forth to align notches in clutch discs with splines on

"B" carrier and to align

ring gear with pinion gear teeth on "B" carrier. Be sure that thrust washer (1) is in place in hub of "B" sun gear in transmission. Then, holding Clutch 1

and "B" carrier together, install them

and

on "B" sun gear.

Refer to paragraph 270 for

pinion gears in "B"

ring gear

from Clutch 1

if not removed

overhaul instruc

-tions. Inspect the

side down, over the

teeth of "B"

Fig. 292

from Clutch 1 and"B" carrier

lined in paragraph

mission front

Removing oil distributor separately

text

and

also to

assembly

Fig. 294.

262. Check trans-

end play as

paragraph 256, then proceed

Loosen the four distributor cap screws and with a pair of pliers, remove the Servo 2 and 3 pressure tubes from the distributor; do not completely remove tubes from housing. On models with PTO disconnect the fitting en PTO pressure tube at right front corner of distributor; see Figs. 283 and

296. On models with heat exchanger (transmission oil cooler), remove the adapter bolts (see Fig. 296) retaining heat exchanger oil tubes to side of t ran.smission. Remove the cap screws retaining distributor and on models with single speed PTO, insert long screwdriver through center of distributor against Clutch 1 housing. Hold Clutch 1 forward with screwdriver while removing distributor

refer

;

outlined in

as follows:

retaining

as in Fig.

Fig. 295-Exploded

I. Thrustwasher

2 "B" carrier

3. Thrust washer

4. Snap ring

5. "B" ring gearClutch 1 pressure

pate

Retai er

8. Piston return spring

viewofClutch

1, "B" carrier

3000 and 4000

9, Band 2

10. Actuating strut

11. Leverarm

12. Pivot P n

13, Inic later

14. "0"ring

16. "O"ring

16. Clutch 1 housing

17. Bushing-not

serviced

and Servo 2 assemblies

transmissions.

l8. Thrust washer

19. External spline lates

20. Internal spline plates

21. Piston rod

22. "0" ring

23. Guide

24. "O"ring

25. "0" ring

26. Piston

Installed

in model

27. Snap ring

28. Spring

29.Retainer

30. Washer

31. Nut

32. Not

33.Washer

34. Adjusting screw

35. Adjusting strut

2000,

Page 90

2000

incorrect when measured before disas-

sembly and

which could change end play, measure old thrust washer renew with new washer of proper thickness to bring end play into limits

of 0.005-0.015.

side of distributor and install new seal rings on distributor with seal ring

having the locking ends in the rear

groove and ring with square ends in front groove. Note: It is advisable to

renew both

having locking ends (Ford part No.

313864)

assembly. Install new main pressure tube and the Servo 1Direct Drive Clutch tube the sealing rings and petroleum jelly and align ring end gaps at top side of distributor front end of distributor through Clutch

1 hub and if

used ring with two long screwdrivers and

3000-4000

If transmission front end play was

no new parts were installed

(

13-Fig

Place washer on front

seal rings

as this will make for easier

square cut end snap ring is

in front groove

with rings

0" rings on

0" rings with

compress snap

Ctt?TCH PA

Lubricate

Insert the

EECT

283) and

Fig.

position

models

; Adapter

connecting

ow e

Fig. 297-Removing "B" Sun-

"A" Ring

and

push the distributor into place

be necessary to align the main supply

the Servo 1-Direct Drive Clutch

tube

tube and PTO pressure tube with the holes and fitting on distributor while the distributor is being pushed into place. It may be necessary to lift distributor up slightly to engage pilot diameter with bore in transmission case. Start the fitting onto PTO connection stall the four distributor retaining cap screws. Insert the Servo 2 and 3 pressure tubes through left side of transmission case rings on each end of the tubes cate the bores of distributor and turn the tubes so beveled outer ends are aligned with oil passage slots in Servo 2 and 3

Cover new "0

adapter bolts

and install the bolts through lines and housing into the distributor the distributor retaining cap screws to

on models so equipped, the

then install new "0"

0" rings

On models so equipped

rings on heat exchanger line

lubricate the "0" rings

296-Dotted lines show

of oil

tubes

and

2000,3000

bolts at

oil

exchanger

Gear

Direct

Drive

semblies.

push tubes into

4000.

right are for

cooler (heat

)

lines.

, "A" Carrier

Clutch as-

It will

Loosely in-

Lubri-

install

Tighten

Paragraph 272

a torqup of 20-25 Ft..Lbs. Recheck end

play and if not within limits of 0.005-

0.015

strove distributor and renew

selecti fit thrust washer with one of

Tighten the PTO line

correct thickness

fitting'andieat exchanger adapter bolts on models so equipped. Adapter bolts should be tightened to torque of 20-25 Ft.-Lbs.

Reassemble remainder of transmission as outlined in paragraphs and 251.

272. "A" RING GEAR GEAR, "A RECT DRIVE moving the distributor sembly and paragraph "B" Sun Gear Drive Clutch can be removed as shown in Fig. 297.

NOTE

assemblies have been used. Refer to ex-

ploded view of Fig clutch assemblies use only one piston

(

return duction clutch assemblies have two piston return springs and the Internally splined bronze discs (45 grooves In faces on disc Instead of circumferential grooves as on early production discs are not interchangeable between early and late production units and only the new housings and pistons are available for service housing

requires renewal, then a new type housIng, piston and two return springs must be Installed changeable bronze discs with radial grooves should be Installed for Improved clutch performance.

Clutch,

the snap ring clutch plates

Belleville

To disassemble

ring removed from housing, install the

Belleville spring

tool No. N-488) Using the lever (N-488-3), pry the

spring compressor

stepped stud under the snap ring as shown in Fig. 301. Repeat this at the other two studs, then again at all three studs until highest step of studs is

under snap ring spiral retainer ring of clutch housing and release the compressor by prying it and turning the studs snap ring.

Remove the compressor

Fig. 298 and

(

48), piston return spring

ring

and large pivot ring

clutch piston

CARRIER AND DI-

CLUTCH. After re-

B" carrier as outlined in

271, the "A"

, "

A" Carrier and Direct

Two types of Direct Drive Clutch

)

Clutch housings and pistons

If either a piston

55) of early production assembly

(

The clutch discs are Inter-

however, the late type

;

refer to Fig

. Then,

lift out the

51) with compressed air

(

, Clutch 1 as-

298. Early production

(

spring

pressure plate and

as shown in

49). Later pro-

)

the Direct Drive

299 and remove

using the snap

compressor (Nuday

down and turn a

. Then remove the

Fig. 299

(

down::. with lever

£ronl under the

(50). Remove the

263, 269

B" SUN

Ring Gear-

have radial

51) or a

(

Fig. 300.

) from hub

tool, refer to

small pivot

(s) (49)

Page 91

Paragraph

272 Cont.

FORD

rig.

298-Exploded

system and related

I. Ser Dies"rr

2 Gnskat

11 Setolncr

Slug

Sr,', ri•ig

7 eoi

9. Peeve pton

9. Pbi^mn n i

11. in 9

11, Strut

12. Thrust washer

13. Band 1

15. Adjusting screw

15. Washer

12 13 14 15 16 oj

view of model 2000

parts.

Input

with single

speed PTO;and shaft(23)

Nut

17.

540 RPM PTO ,or

Shin collar

Input shag

I Ono RPM PTO gear

540 RPM PTO door

22.

Input shaft

23.

Input shaft

24.

Ball bearing

25.

Snap ring

26.

Rear sealing rings

27,

Front sealing rings Ball bearing

28.

29.

Gasket

shaft

I I I

(

3000

19)

is for

and 4000 front support

models

with

Is for modelswithout PTO.

30. Plug

31. Front support plate

32. Bushing

33. Gasket

14. Pump assembly

35 seal

36. Plug (win PT0)

37."0"ring

38. Thrust washer

40.Thrust washer

41. "A" carrierassembly

42. Thrust washer

plate, input shaft,

2-speed

19 20

PTO; shaft(22) Is for models

43. Snap ring

44. Pressure plate

45 Internal

46. External

Spiral retainer

47.

48.

Pivot ring

49.

Spring

50.

Pressure ring

51.

Clutch piston

52.

"0" ring

63.

"0" ring

54.

Bushin

65.

Clutchhousing

56.

Bushing

planetary

spline discs

.ANSM SS. _.._ __.. ^_........ CtorC

1RANSMISBION ClU1CH N 408

Fig.

300

Special tools used to disassemble the

Direct Drive

Clutch assembly.

CLUTCH HOUSING PRESSURE PLATE

SNAP RING \ ., ,. r.

Fig. 299-Direct drive clutch

assembly.

and

A" sun gear

as shown in Fig. 289.

Carefully inspect all parts and renew as required.The two steel plates (46Fig. 298

the two bronze plates (45) and the friction surface of the pressure plate(44) should be flat; renew the

plates if they

are warped,scared or

excessively, worn. Free height of the

piston return ( should be 0.115-0.1. or if free height

0.115.

The bushings in clutch housing

Belleville

)

spring(s)

25; renew if cracked

measures less than

(55) are renewable. Front bushing (56) inside diameter (new) is 1.440-1.441; rear bushing (54) is 1.315-1.316. Bushings are pre-sized and should not require reaming if carefully installed.

To reassemble, install new inner "0" ring (53) and outer "0" ring (52) on piston, lubricate "0" rings with petroleum

jelly and install piston in housing.

Place large pivot ring (50) on piston, piston return spring(s) on large pivot ring and place small pivot ring on the return (Belleville) spring(s). Compress the piston return spring(s) with compressor tool as during disassembly, then install the spiral retaining ring (47). Remove compressor tool and place steel disc on piston (either side down),

install bronze disc (either side down),

then the second steel disc and the

second bronze disc. Place pressure plate, machined side down, on the top bronze disc and install retaining snap ring (43).

The "A" carrier is renewable as a complete assembly only. Check pinions and thrust surfaces and renew carrier

if defect is noted. Pinion end play in

carrier should be 0.010-0.028.

Check the two sealing rings (26) and thrust washer (12) on rear end of transmission shaft and renew if worn, scored or broken. Place new thrust washer against shaft rear bearing (24), then

special

Fig. 301-Using

compress

Direct

tools shown

Clutch

Drive

In Fig.

spring.

install the two lock-end rings in grooves on shaft. Lubricate the sealing rings with petroleum jelly and align ring ends at top of shaft.

Place the "A" carrier with splines up on work bench. Stick thrust washer (42) in recess of the carrier hub with light film of grease. Set the assembled Direct Drive Clutch on carrier and rotate clutch back and forth while par-

tially supporting it to align splines of clutch discs with splines on carrier. Holding the carrier and clutch together, install them as a unit, taking care to work clutch housing over the sealing rings on transmission shaft.

Place thrust washer (40) on shaft against "A" carrier, then install the

"A" ring gear-'B" sun gear taking care not to dislodge thrust washer (40)._.

300 to

100

Page 92

2000-3000-4000

Fig.

302-

Band 2,it must be rotated around transmission

To remove

shown.

or Install

web as

Paragraphs

273-275

Install thrust washer (38) in hub of "B" sun gear.

273. BANDS 1 AND 2, STRUTS AND ACTUATING LINKAGE. After removing the "A" carrier and Direct Drive Clutch as outlined in paragraph 272, Bands 1 and 2 can be removed as follows: Loosen Band 1 adjusting screw and remove the band and strut. Turn adjusting screw in to remove from housing. Compress Band 2 and remove

band struts. Remove Band 2 from housing by rotating it around cast web in top of transmission as shown in Fig.

302. With Band 2 removed, the actuating lever pivot pin for both Bands 2

and 3 can now be removed and the Bands 2 and 3 actuating levers re-

moved from housing. However, it is usually not necessary to remove the pivot pin and actuating levers. Note: Servo 3 actuating lever is the longest

lever.

274. PUMP ADAPTER PLATE

(TRANSMISSION FRONT

state of transmission disassembly will permit, renew the sealing "0" rings on tube ends and reinstall in housing. Note: Lubricate "0" rings with petro-

leumjelly before reinstalling tubes. COVER). To remove the pump adapter plate, the tractor must be split between engine and transmission as outlined in paragraph 181 or 182, then proceed as follows:

On models so equipped, remove the PTO pressure tube from front cover and PTO bearing retainer, then unbolt and remove PTO front bearing retainer. Take care not to lose or damage any of the shims located between PTO front bearing retainer and pump adapter plate. Unbolt transmission pump, bump pump body with soft faced

hammer to break gasket seal and re-

move the pump assembly.

Remove the six cap screws and nut

securing adapter plate to transmission

housing and thread two jack screws

into the tapped holes in pump adapter plate as shown in Fig. 303. Tighten the

jack screws evenly to pull adapter plate

loose from gasket. CAUTION: Do not allow input shaft to move forward while removing pump adapter plate, or thrust washer may drop from between

end of input shaft, lock ring ends together, lubricate with petroleum jelly and align ring ends at top side of shaft.

Carefully install pump adapter plate with new gasket over input shaft to avoid damage to the sealing rings; lift PTO shaft up on models so equipped using a screwdriver as shown in Fig.

304. Install new seal on the top pump adapter plate retaining cap screw (see SW-Fig. 304) and tighten the cap screws and nut to a torque of 25-30 Ft.Lbs. On models so equipped, install PTO shaft front bearing cup and a new sealing ring on front end of PTO shaft. Lock ends of ring together, lubricate ring with petroleum jelly and turn ring so that ends are at top of shaft. Carefully install PTO front bearing retainer with shims and new "0" ring and tighten the retaining cap screws to a torque of 14-17 Ft.-Lbs. Check PTO shaft preload as outlined in paragraph 278 and adjust preload by varying shim

"A" carrier and "A" ring gear requiring disassembly of transmission to reinstall thrust washer.

On all models, inspect inside of sleeve (32-Fig. 298) located in pump adapter plate and renew sleeve if worn or scored. Press damaged sleeve out, align oil holes in new sleeve and adapter plate and press sleeve in so that end with chamfered inside diameter is flush with recessed surface at rear side of plate.

NOTE:During complete transmission overhaul,the main supply pressure tube, Servo 1 and on models so equipped, the PTO clutch pressure tube should be re-

moved and new sealing "0" rings In-

stalled on the tube ends

The oil distributor must be removed as well as the front plate to allow removal of all tubes.

Remove the oil passage tubes as

Install new sealing rings on front

Fig.

303-Using

adapter

Fig. 304-Aligning PTO

inserted in end of shaft when installing (front support)plate on

4000.Sealing washer(SW) Is Installed on one

jack

(front support

3000 and 4000.

plate retaining bolt.

to remove

screws

)

plate on models 2000,

shaft

with screwdriver

models

2000, 3000

thickness under PTO bearing retainer

as necessary. Install PTO pressure tube with new "0" rings. Install transmission pump as outlined in paragraph

254.

275. INPUT SHAFT, BEARINGS AND PTO DRIVE GEARS. To remove the transmission input shaft, it is

necessary to remove the transmission

from tractor as outlined in paragraph

249. Then, remove all transmission components as outlined in paragraphs

247 through 272 and the front cover

(pump adapter) plate as outlined in paragraph 274. The input shaft can then be removed from transmission.

Remove the four cast iron sealing rings (26 and 27-Fig. 298) from input shaft (19, 22 or 23) and if renewal of shaft, bearings, PTO drive gear(s)

and/or sliding coupling is indicated, remove the ball bearings (24 and 28) from shaft and slide off the PTO gear (21) and coupling (18) (single speed PTO) or PTO gears (17 and 20) and

pump

adapter

and

101

Page 93

Paragraph 276

FORD

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10

W^U' .

IQ 7n it

Fig. 305-Exploded

I. Bearing retainer 9. PTO countershaft

2. Shims 10. Bushing

3. "O"ring 11. Clutch housing

4. Sealing ring 12. Bushing 5, Bearing cup 13. "O"ring

6. Bearing cone

7. Washer

8. Sealing rings

view of single speed PTO

roller 14. Piston

6. Piston return spring

clutch

and shaft

PTO clutch.

11 12 13 14 15 16 1118

assembly.Refer to Fig.306 for

17. Retainer

18. Snap ring

19. External spline plates

20. Internal spline plates

21. Prainag ate

22. Snap ring

23. Thrust washer

28 29

0 31

/,/Jj^

24. Clutchhub

25. Snap ring

26. Snap ring

27. Was

her

28. Bearing cone

29. Bearing cup

30, oileeel

31. Coupling

2-speed

&roller

snap ring

(25) groove in outer race forward. Be sure that both bearings are pressed firmly

against

shoulders on shaft; press on center race of bearings only.

On single speed PTO models, install PTO gear (21) on front end of shaft with clutch teeth to rear. Press front

bearing (28) onto shaft with ball filling

notch in race forward. Slide the cou-

pling (18) onto splined section of shaft, then press rear bearing (24) onto shaft with snap ring (25) groove in outer race forward.

On models without PT.O, install bearing on shaft (23) as outlined for 2speed or single speed PTO models.

Reinstall input shaft assembly in

transmission making sure that on PTO equipped engages groove in slidingcoupling (18) and that snap ring (25) on bearing (24) is seated compartment in transmission. Then, install pump adapter plate as outlined in paragraph 274 and install other

components sion as

graphs.

models

, the PTO shifter fork

against rear

wall of front

to reassemble

outlined in appropriate para-

transmis-

Fig. 366-Exploded

for

I Beenvg retainer

2. Shims 3 "O"ring

4 Saehnannc

6 Bcerrngcup 6, Bearing one & roller

7. Washer

8. Sealing rings

9. Countershaft

Bushin

II. Clutch housing

12. Bushing

3. 'W ring

view of

model 4000;

two-speed PTO

other models use shaft(29).

14 "0" ring

15. Raton

16. External spline

yin tea

17. Internal spline plates

18. Pressure plate 19 . Snap ring

20. Piston return spring

21. Retainer

22. Sneering

23. Thrust washer

24. Clutch hub

sliding coupling(2-speed PTO models).

To reassemble and reinstall input

shaft,

proceed as follows:

On 2-speed PTO models, install large

PTO gear (20) on front with clutch

teeth to rear.Press front

end of

shaft (19)

4da

clutch and

shaftelssediblies

RefertoFlg.

26. Bearing adapter

27. Dearing

28. Bearing Cup

29. Countershaft, rear

29A. Countershaft, rear

30. Shift collar

30A. Shift collar

31. Driven or

31A. Driven gear

305

pone & roller

(model

. 2000 & 3000)

(made] 4000)

bearing (28) onto shaft with ball filling

notches in race forward. Slide the cou-

pling (18) over splines on shaft, then

install small

PTO gear (17) on rear end of shaft with clutch teeth forward. Press rear bearing (24) onto shaft with

32 33 35

Lower countershaft

for single

speed

33A. Oil seal

(

29A) is

PTO.

32. Snap ring

33. Snap ring

34. Washer

35. Bell hearing

36. Snap ring

37. snap ring

38, oil seal

39. Coupling

40. Snap ring

41. Thrustweaher

42. Sealing rings

276. PTO CLUTCH. To remove the

PTO clutch assembly, the transmission input shaft must first be removed as outlined in paragraph 275. Then, proceed as follows:

On 2-speed PTO transmissions, the

clutch and front PTO shaft can be re-

moved as a unit. Disassemble the unit by removing rear bearing adapter (26

-Fig. 306) and pulling shaft (9) forward out of assembly. Pull front

bearing cone washer from shaft

and roller and thrust

and pull bearing

cone and roller from rear bearing adapter if renewal is indicated.

To remove the single speed PTO clutch, first remove the bearing cone and roller (28-Fig. 305), washer (27) and snap ring (26) from rear end of shaft (9). Using a small punch or screwdriver, drive the snap ring (25) out of groove on shaft behind the splined clutch hub (24). Then pull shaft forward out of clutch assembly and lift the clutch assembly from transmission.

Bushings (10 and 12-Fig. 305 or Fig. 306) in clutch housing are renewable. Inside diameter of new front

bushing is 1.874-1.875; inside diameter

of new rear bushing is 1.624-1.625. Bushings are pre-sized and reaming

should not be necessary if carefully in-

stalled. For servicing remainder of

clutch assembly, refer to paragraph

270. After clutch is reassembled, stick the

thrust washer (23-Fig. 305 or Fig.

306) in recess in front side of splined hub (24) of PTO clutch using light film

102

Page 94

2000

3000-4000

Paragraphs

277-280

Fig. 307-Checking

preload

with

PTO countershaft bearing

scale

pull

around shaft.

and

cord

of grease. Insert the hub into clutch discs until thrust washer contacts thrust surface of clutch housing.

On 2-speed PTO, assemble the clutch

and shaft

on bench as

follows: Place thrust washer (7-Fig. 306) on front end of shaft and press front bearing cone and roller (6) tightly against washer. Install the two sealing rings (8) from rear end of shaft, lubricate the

with petroleum jelly and align

rings

ring end

securely in clutch, insert shaft,

gear

. While holding the bevel

gaps

with snap ring ends up, through the clutch housing and bevel gear. Then, install spacer sleeve (25) and rear adapter (26) with rear bearing cone and roller (27) installed. Reinstall unit in transmission.

On single speed PTO, install thrust washer (7-Fig. 305) on front end of PTO shaft and press front bearing cone and roller (6) tightly against washer.

rings

Install two sealing

(8) from rear end of shaft, lubricate the rings with petroleum

. Holding the

gaps

assembly,

jelly and align ring end

splined hub in clutch

place clutch in transmission

and insert shaft through clutch with sealing

ring end gaps

When thrust washer ( clutch housing, drive the

at top of shaft.

7) is against snap ring (25)

around shaft into groove at rear of splined hub. Install the snap ring (26), washer (27) and bearing cone and roller (28) on rear end of shaft.

277. 2-SPEED PTO GROUND

DRIVE SPEED

GEARS. All 2-speed PTO transmissions also have a ground drive speed PTO ratio, in which the PTO shaft is driven from a gear on the transmission output shaft (model 4000)

wrapped

Fig. 308-Exploded view of linkage and

used on

for model 4200

two-speed

all models except 4200

feathering

1. Foot pedal

2. Roll pin

3. "0" ring

4. Shaft and arm

5. Retainers

8. Link

7. Plugs

8. Returnspring

9. Rocker

10. Pivot shaft

rings

it. Sna

12. PlO control cable

13. PTO slider

14. Spacer

15. Rocker assembly

16. Spacer

18. Conduit assembly

19. Washer

20. Interlock cable

21. Retaining pin

22. Jam net.

23. Setscrew

25. Connector

27. Snap ring

28. shift fork

29. Shift rail 30 Spacer

31. Interlock

32. Lever

33. Shaft

34. '0" ring

35. Shift lever

36. Washer

or on the "D" carrier (

3000). The driven Fig. 306)

is located on the rear trans-

feathering

PTO Interlock linkage

Refer to Fig. 239

pedal and linkage.

models 2000 and

(31 or 31A-

gear

mission PTO shaft (29 or 29A).

with the "D"

oil seal

32) and drive

(

drive gears,

(38 or 38A)

disassembly

). End play

To remove the ground

remove the

transmission rear

as outlined in paragraph 267. On models 2000 and 3000, the drive gear is

serviced as an assembly

carrier only; on model 4000, drive gear is serviced separately. To remove the driven gear, proceed as follows: Re-

move the PTO shaft from rear support and then remove snap ring (37) from shaft (29 or 29A).

The PTO shaft can then be bumped forward out of the ball bearing (35). Remove the thrust washer (34) and snap ring (33); then, slide PTO driven

(31 or 31A) from rear end of shaft.

gear If necessary

to renew bearing (35),

remove snap ring bearing forward out of rear support. Reassemble

by reversing

procedure. Be sure seal surface

(29 or 29A)

stalling new seal

is not damaged

(38 or 38A).

278. PTO SHAFT END PLAY

(BEARING PRELOAD

(bearing preload) of the power take-off clutch and shaft unit is controlled by varying the thickness of the shim stack (2-Fig. 305 or 306) between the transmission front cover (pump adapter plate) and the PTO front bearing retainer (1). Shims are available in thick-

nesses of 0.002, 0.003, 0.010 and 0.030.

Check bearing preload as follows:

On 2-speed PTO, bearing preload is

pedal

support

of shaft

before in-

and

checked with the rear support and rear PTO shaft removed from the transmis-

sion

. On single speed PTO, check bearing preload with PTO shaft removed from transmission rear support.

Tighten the PTO front bearing re-

tainer (1) cap screws to a torque of 14-

17 Ft.-Lbs. Wrap a cord around the PTO shaft and attach a pull scale as shown in Fig. 307. Bearing preload is correct when a steady pull of 18 to 25 pounds is required to keep the shaft rolling. Add or remove shims as required to obtain proper bearing preload.

279. TRANSMISSION CONTROL LINKAGE. Usually, the control linkage components do not need to be disassembled when overhauling trans-

mission

renew linkage

. However, if necessary to

or sealing

PTO shift levers or inching pedal shaft,

proceed as follows:

280. INCHING PEDAL AND FEATHERING VALVE LINKAGE. Refer to Fig. 308 for exploded view of inching pedal and feathering valve linkage. (Refer to paragraph 281 for information on PTO interlock linkage shown in Fig. 308). Inching pedal (1) can be renewed by driving out pin (2) and removing transmission top cover (paragraph 247) and holding pry bar

against

lever shaft (4) while installing new pedal. If necessary to renew the "O" ring (3), shaft (4) or link (6), it will be necessary to remove the Clutch 2 and 3 assembly, mainshaft and "C" carrier as outlined in paragraph 268.

oil seal

"0" rings at

103

Page 95

Paragraphs 281-283

View showing

Fig 309-

sitions

for single speed PTO shift lever.

Fig. 310 for

neutral

2-speed

and engaged po-

PTO.

Refer to

able to synchronize movement of sliding collar (30 or 30A-Fig. 306) with detente

in transmission

shift lever tang.

282. PTO SPEED SHIFT LINKAGE.

On single

take off drive with lever

speed PTO

models

is in neutral position

to front as shown in Fig. 309, or is in engine drive position

center hole;

when lever

rear hole is not used on

single speedPTO models.

On 2-speed models, the PTO speed shift lever has three positions; 540 RPM, neutral and 1000 RPM as shown in Fig. 310.

On both the

single speed and 2-speed

PTO models, speed shift lever can be

^ GSPEED P.TA i

-6 OUN

SHIFT LEVER

case for

, the power

(540 RPM)

is engaged in

Fig. 311-Exploded

both single

speed

Refer also to Figs

1. Shift lever

2. "Wring

3. Shaft

4. Bushing

view

and

of PTO

speed

309

linkage for

shift

PTO models.

and 310.

5. Shift arm

6. Pin

7. Shift fork

FORD

d P. T.

O. SPEED

SHIFT LEVER '

To remove the feathering valve lever

shaft. (10) or components located on

shaft, remove top transmission cover,

disconnect inching pedal return spring

8), remove snap rings (11) from shaft

and drive against either sealing plug

7) with thin punch. Shaft need not be

way

driven all the stalling shaft

sealing plugs

valve

levers on

against

and components

and center the feathering

either plug

On 2000, 3000 and 4000

single

with

items

speed PTO,

(20 through

models without a PTO,

out. After rein-

the valves by driving

as required. Note:

transmissions item(18) and

36) are not used; on items (12

through 36) are not used.

281. PTO INTERLOCK LINKAGE.

On models 2000, 3000 and 4000 with 2-

speed PTO, interlock linkage is used to prevent both the ground drive PTO

speed and the engine drive PTO from

being engaged at the same time. Refer

to items (18) and (20 through 36) in

Fig. 308. To service the ground speed shift and interlock mechanism, the "C"

carrier, mainshaft and Clutch 2 and 3

assembly must be removed as outlined in paragraph 268. Refer to exploded view in Fig. 308 for disassembly and reassembly 240 for adjustment lock mechanism. Lever (

guide. Refer to paragraph

procedure for inter-

35) is adjust-

insert

Fig. 310-View

tral,

540

positions for 2-speed

shift lever

for single

showing neu-

RPM and 1000 RPM

Refer to

speed PTO.

moved only when engine is not running. Refer to Fig. 311 for exploded

view of the linkage. After removing

front

cover as

outlined in paragraph 274, the linkage can be removed by removing pin (6), sliding the shaft (3) out of housing, then removing arm (5) and fork (

7). Bushing(4) in transmis-

sion housing can be renewed if neces-

sary.

Install new

1. Cover

2. Housing. L.R.

3. Nut

4. Dial

5. Dial deal

6. spacer

7. Snap ring

8. Cover

9. Control wheels cable easy.

10. Shen

11. Oil pressure

light wire

12. Wiring barneee

13. Warning light lens

sealing "0"

warning

Fig.

312-Exploded

view of

PTO

Fig. 309

ring (2),

transmission

lubricate ring with petroleum jelly and

reassemble

by reversing disassembly

procedure.

283. SPEED

SEMBLY

. To remove the speed

selector assembly, refer to paragraph

245. To disassemble, refer to exploded view in Fig. 312 and proceed as follows:

First, remove the two side

and 17) and the three Phillips head

screws securing

housing (2). Remove the hex nut (3) from the shaft (10) and remove the snap ring (7) and retainer plate (8) to expose the wheel and cable assembly. Note: Impact torque is usually required to loosen nut (3) without twisting the shaft (10). Further disassembly procedure is obvious from inspection of unit and reference to exploded view in Fig.

312. To reassemble, reverse disassembly procedure. Adjust the speed selector assembly as outlined in paragraph 237 after reinstalling assembly as in paragraph 245.

'SELECTOR AS-

the left hand selector

14. Clip

15. Warning light

16. Dial light

17. Cover

8. Spring

19. Control lever

20. Wear plate

21. Homing, R.H.

22. Connector

24. Conduit

speed(gear ratio)selector

assembly.

covers (1

104

Page 96

2000-3000

4000 Paragraphs 284-286

DIFFERENTIAL,

Fig. 313-

housing

3000,

65-86 Ft

pinion and perform other jobs, it will be necessary to split tractor between transmission

housing. Proceed as follows:

center housing. Note: On models with hydraulic lift, move selector lever to draft control, control lever to bottom of quadrant and force lift arms to lowest

position. Disconnect wiring to rear

light and brake pedal return springs

under right step plate. Unbolt and remove both step plates from fenders,

transmission and rear axle center housing. On models with transmission type PTO, move PTO shift lever to neutral position. Disconnect rod at front clutch. On models with Select-O-Speed

transmission

pling.

gine and transmission

lows: Remove hydraulic housing tube and manifold assembly.

Attach hoist to transmission, support rear axle center housing, then unbolt and remove transmission.

axle center housing split on assembled tractor, proceed as follows: Disconnect horizontal exhaust pipe from muffler, if

When reconnecting

to transmission on models 2000

tighten bolts at location(9) to

Lbs.

and

bolts at

55 Ft-Lbs.

(10

rear axle

)

a torque of 40-

SPLIT TRACTOR BETWEEN

TRANSMISSION AND REAR

AXLE CENTER HOUSING

284. To remove final drive bevel

and rear axle center

Drain lubricant from rear axle

clutch release

end on models

disengage tractor cou-

If tractor has been split between en-

If performing transmission to rear

with engine

proceed as fol-

pump to center

BEVEL GEARS

(Models 2000

so equipped, at left side of tractor. Unbolt hydraulic tube manifold from

rear axle center

wedges between front axle and front

support and place floor stand under rear of transmission housing.Support rear housing with suitable hoist or rolling

floor jack, then unbolt

from rear axle center housing and move the rear axle unit away from transmission.

To reconnect tractor between trans-

mission and rear axle

reverse disassembly procedure using a

new gasket between transmission and center housing. Refer to Fig. 313 for bolt tightening torques. Refill rear axle center housing (hydraulic sump) with

proper lubricant as outlined in para-

center

a torque of

graph 339. Bleed the piston type hydraulic pump as in paragraph 361.

and

DIFFERENTIAL AND BEVEL

286. R&R DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY. To remove the differential assembly, first drain rear axle center housing and hydraulic system, then proceed as follows: Block up under center housing to raise rear wheels, then remove left rear wheel and disconnect brake linkage and light wire. Unbolt the left rear axle housing from center housing and remove the axle,

brake, housing and fender assembly

from tractor. The differential assembly

can then be removed from the rear axle center housing.

NOTE:

bearing preload Is adjusted by varying the

thickness of gasket used between the left

rear axle housing and the center housing.

Therefore Ing, determine thickness of gasket In-

stalled before destroying or discarding

the old gasket.However center housing

differential housing or the differential carrier bearings are renewed

carrier bearing preload should be read. justed as outlined In paragraph 286. If a

different thickness of axle housing to center housing gasket Is Installed, axle shaft bearing adjustment should be checked as outlined In paragraph 294. If an early production unit having paper

(composition)axis housing to center

housing gaskets is encountered, both axle housings should be removed and the later steel gaskets Installed graph 286.

3000 and Model 4110

housing. Drive wood

jack or work

axle center

transmission

center housing,

GEARS

differential carrier

On all models

when removing left axle hous-

If the rear axle

either axle housing, the

differential

refer to para-

;

AND REAR AXLE

L.C.G.)

Proceed as follows to reinstall differential assembly: If removed, reinstall bevel pinion assembly as outlined in paragraph 288 and reinstall right rear axle housing using one 0.006-0.008 gasket; tighten retaining cap screws to a torque of 125-155 Ft.-Lbs. Install the differential assembly in center housing, then reinstall left rear axle housing with gasket thickness as determined as outlined in paragraph 286, or if no new parts affecting carrier bearing preload were installed, with same gasket thickness as removed. Tighten axle housing retaining cap

screws to a torque of 125-155 Ft.-Lbs. If

axle assemblies were removed or if a different gasket thickness was installed between left axle housing and

rear axle center housing than was

removed on disassembly, refer to paragraph 294 for axle installation.

After final installation of left rear axle housing on all models, check to be sure that the differential assembly can

be turned by hand and that some backlash exists between differential ring

gear and bevel pinion gear.

286. ADJUST DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER BEARING PRELOAD. Differential carrier bearing preload is adjusted by varying the thickness of gasket installed between the left rear axle housing and rear axle center housing. To determine the proper thickness of gasket to be installed, proceed as follows:

Remove the rear axle center housing from transmission as outlined in paragraph 284. If removed, reinstall bevel pinion assembly as outlined in para-

graph 288 and reinstall right rear axle

housing with a 0.006-0.008 thick steel gasket; tighten housing retaining cap screws to a torque of 125-155 Ft.-Lbs.

Turn the axle housing and center

housing assembly so that axle housing is pointing down and place the differential assembly in the center housing.

Lower the left rear axle housing, without a sembly installed, down over the differ-

ential assembly

ential to be Install four

screws equally spaced and finger tight. Using a feeler gage, check gap between axle housing and center housing and

equalize the gap, if necessary, by loosening and tightening alternate cap

screws. Be sure not to tighten any of

the cap screws more than finger tight.

gasket and

and rotate the differ-

sure bearings

axle housing

without axle as-

retaining cap

are seated.

105

Page 97

Paragraph 287

FORD

Fig.

with rear retained

collar (

Axle shaft

2. Brake assembly

Grease seal

Axle besrin

Bearingcup

r d

Rea rin

iS,gGnrkin

,is collar

00 seal Shims

Axle housing

Rushing

lock shaft

cone & roller

differential

Carefully measure

with feeler

gage to determine thickness

314-

Exploded

by lock

58). Exploded view

retainer

not

view of final drive

axle housing

collar

(

13. Plug

14. Gasket

15. Brake shaft bushing 16

Plug

Bearing cone

Differential rose half

19A

N14)

Differential case half

198

with

(R H

differential lock)

19C. Differential case half

R.H. without

( difTersetial lock)

the resulting gap

of steel gasket to be installed between

left axle housing and center housing. After determining the proper gasket

remove the left rear axle

thickness

housing, then reinstall housing with gasket as outlined in paragraph 285. The steel gaskets are available in thicknesses of 0.006-0 and 0

015-0.017. Install only one

008, 0

gasket of thickness nearest to mea-

Do not install more than

sured gap

one gasket.

287. OVERHAUL DIFFEREN-

TIAL. With the

removed as

differential assembly

outlined in paragraph 285,

proceed as follows:

If equipped remove the washer (

with differential lock,

snap ring

35), coupling

36-Fig. 314),

(

34), coupling

(

and rear axle

11) having round

8A); other models will have axle bearing retained by

shows models with

27); other models have plain

(

20. Bevel ring gear

21. Bushing

23. Axle gear

& roller

24 Thrust washers (4)

25. Differential pinions

26. Spider

27. Axle gear, RH. with

28. Thrust washer

29. Bushing

assemblies for models

cross-section Instead

different lock

without

differential lock)

lock

axle

L.H. (also

(32

gear

of square type

through 36)

and differential

(

23)

30. Bearing cone & roller

31. Bearingcup

32. Adapter

33. Spring

34. Coupling

35. Washer

36. Snapring

37. Ring gear thrust block

388. Ring gearb.1to

38N. Ring gearnuts

39. Snap ring

40 Pilot bearing

spring (33) and adapter (32). Place cor-

relation marks on the two halves of the differential case (19A and 19B) so that they may be reassembled in same relative position. Cut the cap screw locking

wire and remove the cap screws evenly

while lifting up right half of differen-

tial case (19B).

On models without differential lock,

011-0.013

cut the cap screw locking wire, remove the cap screws and lift right differential case half (19C) from the differential assembly.

On all models, remove the thrust washer (28), right hand side gear (27), spider (26), pinion (25) and washer (24)

assembly, left hand side gear (23) and left thrust washer (22). Check the dif-

ferential carrier bearings (30 and/or

18) and renew if worn or damaged. To renew the carrier bearing cups (31

3000 and model 4100 L.C.O. Model 2000 tractors

2000

housing nut(8). Select-0 which locks

differential

case half (19C).

shown will have

models will have

Speed

case

41. Bevel pinion

41B, Bevel pinion (with

handbrake)

42. Bearing cone

43. Bearin cup

44. Pinionbearing

retainer

45. Bearingcup

46. Bearing cone

47. Thrust washer (not

used with 52 or 57)

48. Hex nut

49 Locking washer

axle bearing (7)

rear

hall (19B

roller

and/or 17), the right hand axle housing

must be removed from center housing and the axle assemblies removed from

both axle housings to provide clearance

for removing the cups.

The differential case left half (19A) and the bevel ring gear (20) are riveted together during factory assembly. If renewing either the case or ring gear separately, drill through rivet heads with a 1/z-inch drill, then remove rivets with punch. Assemble new ring gear and/or differential case with special bolts (38B) and self locking nuts (38N) that are available for service. Be sure the ring gear is not cocked on differential case and tighten the nuts to a

torque of 40-45 Ft.-Lbs. Note: Bevel ring gear and bevel pinion are available as a matched set only; when installing new ring gear, refer to para-

disconnect

)

gear

to axle

x nu

51. Driveshaa coupling

52. Spacer

57. Handbrake gear

58. Disconnect coupling

59. Disconnect shaft arm 60, Snap ring

61, '*0" ring

62. Bushing

63. Lever

64. Roll pin

used on 41B

(

less handbrake)

106

Page 98

2000

-3000-4000

Paragraphs 288-292

Fig. 315-

Removing

Fig.

316-Checking

with

graph 288 and install the matched bevel pinion.

and 28) if worn or scored and other parts if excessively worn or, The differential case bushings (21 and

29) may be renewed are otherwise are pre-sized and should not require reaming if carefully installed.

versing disassembly procedure and tighten the differential case, retaining cap screws to a torque of 65-75 Ft.-Lbs. and secure with locking wire.

the main drive bevel pinion, remove the differential assembly as outlined in paragraph 285 and split rear axle center housing from transmission as outlined in paragraph 284. Remove the hydraulic power lift cover, if so equipped, as outlined in paragraph 347 and proceed as follows:

carrier (44-Fig. 314) to rear axle

rier and pinion assembly with jack

scale and cord wrapped around pinion

pull

Renew the thrust washers (22, 24

Reassemble the differential by re-

288. BEVEL PINION. To remove

Remove the cap screws and lock

washers retaining bevel pinion bearing

center housing, then remove the.car-

bevel pinion beating retainer

with

jack screws.

pinion bearing preload

bevel

shaft.

damaged.

if the case halves

serviceable

Bushings

screws as shown in Fig. 315. Straighten tabs on locking washer (49

-Fig. 314) and remove nuts (50) and (48); then press shaft (41) and bearing (42) out of retainer (44) and associated parts.

The bevel pinion is available only in a matched set with the bevel ring gear; if necessary to renew the pinion, refer to paragraph 287 and install the matched ring gear. Renew bearings if rough or excessively worn and adjust bearing preload as follows: Tighten the nut (48) until pull required to rotate the pinion in the bearings is 16 to 21 pounds when checked,with pull scale and cord as shown in Fig. 316. When bearing preload adjustment is correct,

install new tab washer (49-Fig. 314)

tighten the nut (50) and bend tabs

against nuts. Then recheck bearing preload as shown in Fig. 316 and readjust if necessary.

When reinstalling the pinion, bearing and carrier assembly; tighten retaining cap screws to a torque of 80100 Ft.-Lbs.

289. BEVEL RING GEAR

Proce-

dure for renewing the bevel ring gear is

outlined in paragraph

287, OVER-

HAUL DIFFERENTIAL.

290. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK. The differential lock consists of a dog type coupling (32 and 34-Fig. 314) which can be engaged to lock the right hand axle gear (27) to the differential case (19B). This results in both rear wheels

being turned at the same speed, re-

gardless of any difference in traction. In operation, when one rear wheel starts to spin, the foot pedal (78-Fig.

317) is

pressure

the dogs on the coupling with notches in the coupling the spring

the operating fork will snap the cou-

pling into engaged position

pedal can then be released and the differential lock will remain engaged until the traction on the rear wheels becomes equalized. As there will then be he side pressure on the coupling dogs, the coil spring (33-Fig. 314) between the sliding coupling (34) and the coupling adapter (32) will push the sliding coupling to disengaged position. If necessary to make a turn before the differential lock is automatically disengaged, the lock can be manually disengaged by momentarily

transmission

the brakes on the wheel with least traction.

depressed

to the sliding coupling. When

which applies spring

pressure

clutch pedal or applying

applied through

depressing the

are aligned

adapter,

. The foot

291. ADJUST DIFFERENTIAL LOCK. Proper adjustment of the differential lock

mechanism requires min-

imum clearance between the operating

fork and face of the sliding coupling when the lock is in disengaged position and that the lock be fully engaged when the foot pedal is depressed until it contacts the right hand foot rest. Before attempting to adjust differential

lock, be sure foot rest is not bent out of

position and there is nothing on the

foot rest to prevent full travel of foot pedal. Then, disconnect the spring loaded operating rod (75-Fig. 317)

from operating lever (74). Back-off the

lockout (68) on adjusting screw (69) in

axle housing. Position operating lever so that operating fork (67) just contacts face of sliding coupling (34-Fig. 314). Turn adjusting screw in until screw contacts operating fork (operating lever will start to move), then back screw out 1/4-turn from this point.

Block up right rear wheel and turn

the wheel while pushing down on oper-

ating lever to fully engage the differential lock. Hold operating lever in this

position and with foot pedal against foot rest, adjust length of spring loaded operating rod by loosening lockout (76

-Fig. 317) and turning rod (75) so that

pin can just be inserted through rod and the operating lever. Shorten the

rod one turn froth this position and

reinstall the clevis pin and retaining cotter pin.

292. OVERHAUL DIFFERENTIAL

LOCK.

pivots on an extended lower link shaft

bushing(79-Fig. 317 grease hole in bushing with hole in pedal is renewable only as a complete as-

sembly. The operating lever and fork

shaft pivots in renewable bushings in right rear axle housing operating shaft

70), fork(67) and

(66), remove the right axle housing as follows

hydraulic lift compartments nect differential lock operating rod from operating lever and remove foot pedal and hydraulic lower pivot shaft housing and unbolt and remove right rear wheel and fender, then remove axle assembly from axle housing. Be careful not to lose or damage shims (see

Fig. 319) located between bearing retainer axle housing. Then remove axle housing from center housing and/or pedal pivot shaft as necessary. Procedure is evident from inspection of unit and reference to Fig ferential lock sliding coupling, spring

and coupling adapter can also be in-

spected and,. if necessary this time

right differential carrier bearing (30-

The differential lock foot pedal

Pedal has renewable

The, spring loaded operating rod

(

Drain oil from differential and

Block up under center

Renew shaft bushings, fork

. Note:

be sure to align

71), bushings (12 and

If necessary to renew

To renew the

or pedal pivot shaft

unbolt and

317. The dif-

renewed at

hydraulic

link from

Discon-

107

Page 99

Paragraphs 293-294

FORD

Fig. 317-Exploded equipped. Fork (

11.

A, 1, housing

12.

Ba yhrm

I R.

plug Fl Damn ;l-point

fi]

hitch,

67)

view

contacts

of differential

coupling

66. Pedal& lift link shaft

67.

68.

69.

711.

Fig. 314) and cup (31), carrier bearing preload should be adjusted as outlined in paragraph 286. If service of the differential unit is indicated, remove left axle housing and differential as outlined in paragraph 285.

When reassembling one 0.006-0.008 thick tween axle housing and tighten the retaining a torque of 125-155 Ft.-Lbs. assembly

Fig. 318-View showing backing plate

wheel

in axle

that can be removed to facilitate

bolt renewal.

tractor

steel gasket be-

and center housing

cap screws to

Install axle

housing with same

knockout

Replace with

lock

(34-Fig.

pedal Is

Fork

, him rut

Adjusting screw

Bushing

install

plug in

rubber plug.

brake

2000,

linkage

314) to depressed.

for models

engage

coupling with

71. Shan

72.

73.

75.

3000

Oil seal

Lover

Link assembly

number of shims as were removed and tighten retaining nuts to a torque of 90-100 Ft.-Lbs. Note: If axle housing, axle or axle shaft bearings were renewed, axle shaft end play should be readjusted as outlined in paragraph

294.

REAR AXLE SHAFTS,

AND SEALS

293. RENEW WHEEL DISC BOLTS. To renew a broken or damaged wheel bolt, remove wheel and brake drum from axle and refer to Fig. 318; a knockout plug is provided in brake backing plate so that wheel bolts can be driven out of axle shaft flange without disassembly of axle unit. After driving in new bolt(s), seal the opening

in brake backing plate with rubber

plug (Ford part No. CSNN-2N214-A)

which is available for service. Then,

reinstall brake drum and rear wheel.

294. BEARING ADJUSTMENT. The rear axle shafts are carried on one tapered roller bearing at the outer end of each shaft. The bearings are retained in their cups by contact of the inner ends of the two axle shafts in the differential assembly. The recommended axle shaft end play of 0.004-

0.012 is obtained by varying the shims installed between the axle housing and axle bearing retainer as shown in Fig.

319.

and 4110 L.C.G.

adapter(32)

BEARINGS

when

76.Jam nut

77. Olevis

78. Pedal

79.

Bushing

shaft bearings are adjusted by

located between axle

bearing retainer.

To check axle shaft

hold one

or other

wedge,then check

other shaft

as shown in Fig. 321.

toot

Fig.

319-Axle

varying shims

Fig.

320

(endplay

chisel

To measure axle end play, block up under rear end of tractor and remove both rear wheels and brake drums. Use a chisel or other suitable tool to wedge

one axle

320; then,

shaft outward as shown in Fig.

measure

axle with dial indicator as shown in Fig. 321. If the measured end play is not within

limits

the adjustment by adding or removing shims between the bearing retainers and axle housings. Adjustment may be made on either axle shaft bearing, but

housing and

bearing preload

axle shaft

outwards with

endplay of

end play of other

of 0.004-0.012, correct

108

Page 100

-3000-4000

2000

Fig.

321-Checking

indicator.Other

shown in

Fig.

axle shaft endplay with dial

shaft must be

320

while

held outwards as

checking

endplay.

323-Drilling

Fig.

bushing Inserted in special axle puller

guide

tool No

(Nuday

available,refer to Fig

axle bearing collar

NCA-4235

).Ifspecial tool is not

326 and text.

with

Paragraphs

drill

Fig.

325-

tainer after

cedure using special rear axle puller (Nuday tool No. N-4235) and cracking chisel (Nuday tool No. N-4235-A1). If

the special puller is not available, pro-

ceed as follows:

Pressing axle

drilling collar (Fig. 323), then

crack

collar with chisel

from bearing re-

shaft

295-297

(Fig.

324).

Fig. 322 housing,axle shaft bearing Is retained collar as shown.

model 2000 tractors with

On other models

nut Is used

;

refer

to Fig. 327.

round

,aself-locking

an effort should be made to keep the total shim pack equally divided between both axle shaft bearing retainers. To add or remove shims, it will be necessary to remove the axle shaft(s) as outlined in following paragraph 295. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.004-0.006, 0.008-

0.010, 0.015-0.017, 0.020-0.022, 0.030-

0.032 and 0.049-0,051.

295. R&R AXLE ASSEMBLY. To remove either rear axle assembly, support rear of tractor, disconnect brake linkage and wiring to fender mounted light and remove the wheel and tire assembly and the brake drum. Then, unbolt axle bearing retainer from axle housing and remove the axle shaft, retainer and bearing assembly, brake

axle

by lock

Fig. 324-Cracking bearing collar

drilling hole as shown in Fig.

after

assembly and brake camshaft from axle housing as a unit. Take care not to lose or damage the shims located between bearing retainer housing. Disassemble, if necessary, as

outlined in paragraph 296 or 297.

The axle shaft inner oil

seal

314) can now be renewed. Pry out old seal and drive new seal into housing

with lip of seal to inside. Lubricate seal before reinstalling axle assembly.

When reinstalling axle assembly,

reverse the removal procedure, ad-

justing axle end play as outlined in

paragraph 294. Tighten axle bearing

retainer nuts to a torque of 90-100 Ft.-

Lbs.

296. OVERHAUL AXLE AS-

SEMBLY (

Axle Housing

model 2000 with Round

). On model 2000 with round axle housing, the rear axle shaft is retained with a steel collar (see Fig.

322) which is a heat-shrink fit on rear axle' shaft. To remove the lock collar, refer to Figs. 323, 324 and 325 for pro-

with

chisel

323.

and axle

(9-Fig.

Center punch upper face of lock collar near the outer edge, then drill a %-inch pilot hole at approximately a 10 degree angle from axle shaft as shown in Fig. 326. The drill will speed up when collar is drilled through and the drill contacts the hard bearing inner race. Follow up with a '/s-inch drill bit to enlarge the pilot hole, then crack the lock collar with a chisel. Press the axle

shaft from the collar, bearing and retainer with a heavy duty press.

Axle shaft outer seal (3-Fig. 314)

can be renewed without removing

bearing cup (6). Install new seal with lip inward, and lubricate lip of seal. Install new bearing cup in retainer if bearing is worn or damaged. Assemble brake backing plate to bearing retainer and place the assembly over axle shaft. Pack bearing with about 3 ounces of wheel bearing grease and use a clean 2'/a-inch I.D. pipe, approximately 30 inches long, to drive bearing cone and roller onto axle shaft. Be sure cone is firmly seated against shoulder on shaft. Heat a new locking collar to 800°

F. and install collar on shall. next to bearing. A temperature indicating crayon such as "Therm-0-Melt" or

"Tempilstick" should be used; the crayon will smear when rubbed against the collar when collar is heated to proper temperature. Hold the collar in

place while cooling with the pipe used to drive bearing onto shaft.

'297. OVERHAUL AXLE AS-

SEMBLY(All Models Except 2000

With Round Axle Housing

). The rear

109

Ford 4000 Service Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual